diff options
| author | Joey Hess <joeyh@debian.org> | 2005-10-07 19:51:38 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Joey Hess <joeyh@debian.org> | 2005-10-07 19:51:38 +0000 |
| commit | 1ea73eea5ecc6a8ed901316049259aee737ee554 (patch) | |
| tree | 03a077f0b1b1548f3c806bd1c5795964fba0fb52 /en | |
| download | installation-guide-1ea73eea5ecc6a8ed901316049259aee737ee554.zip | |
move manual to top-level directory, split out of debian-installer package
Diffstat (limited to 'en')
164 files changed, 17645 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/en/administrivia/administrivia.xml b/en/administrivia/administrivia.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..028dce6ca --- /dev/null +++ b/en/administrivia/administrivia.xml @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<appendix id="administrivia"> + <title>Administrivia</title> + + + <sect1 id="about"> + <title>About This Document</title> + +<para> + +This manual was created for Sarge's debian-installer, based on +the Woody installation manual for boot-floppies, which was based +on earlier Debian installation manuals, and on the Progeny +distribution manual which was released under GPL in 2003. + +</para><para> + +This document is written in DocBook XML. Output formats are generated +by various programs using information from the +<classname>docbook-xml</classname> and +<classname>docbook-xsl</classname> packages. + +</para><para> + +In order to increase the maintainability of this document, we use +a number of XML features, such as entities and profiling attributes. +These play a role akin to variables and conditionals in programming +languages. The XML source to this document contains information for +each different architecture — profiling attributes are used to +isolate certain bits of text as architecture-specific. + +<!-- +</para><para> + +Translators can uncomment this paragraph and add an acknowledgement +to the people responsible for the translation of the manual. +Translation teams are advised to just mention the coordinator and maybe +major contributors and thank everybody else in a phrase like "all +translators and reviewers from the translation team for <your language> +at <your l10n mailinglist>". + +(Note: support for this for translations using PO files will be added + soon.) +--> + +</para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="contributing"> + <title>Contributing to This Document</title> + +<para> + +If you have problems or suggestions regarding this document, you +should probably submit them as a bug report against the package +<classname>debian-installer-manual</classname>. See the +<classname>reportbug</classname> package or read the online +documentation of the <ulink url="&url-bts;">Debian Bug +Tracking System</ulink>. It would be nice if you could check the +<ulink url="&url-bts;debian-installer-manual">open bugs against +debian-installer-manual</ulink> to see whether your problem has +already been reported. If so, you can supply additional corroboration +or helpful information to +<email><replaceable>XXXX</replaceable>@bugs.debian.org</email>, +where <replaceable>XXXX</replaceable> is the number for the +already-reported bug. + +</para><para> + +Better yet, get a copy of the DocBook source for this document, and +produce patches against it. The DocBook source can be found at the +<ulink url="&url-d-i-websvn;">debian-installer WebSVN</ulink>. If +you're not familiar with DocBook, don't worry: +there is a simple cheatsheet in the manuals directory that will get +you started. It's like html, but oriented towards the meaning of +the text rather than the presentation. Patches submitted to the +debian-boot mailing list (see below) are welcomed. +For instructions on how to check out the sources via SVN, see +<ulink url="&url-d-i-readme;">README</ulink> +from the source root directory. + +</para><para> + +Please do <emphasis>not</emphasis> contact the authors of this +document directly. There is also a discussion list for &d-i;, which +includes discussions of this manual. The mailing list is +<email>debian-boot@lists.debian.org</email>. Instructions for +subscribing to this list can be found at the <ulink +url="&url-debian-lists-subscribe;">Debian Mailing +List Subscription</ulink> page; or you can browse the <ulink +url="&url-debian-list-archives;">Debian Mailing List Archives</ulink> +online. + +</para> + + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="contributors"> + <title>Major Contributions</title> + +<para> + +This document was originally written by Bruce Perens, Sven Rudolph, Igor +Grobman, James Treacy, and Adam Di Carlo. Sebastian Ley wrote the +Installation Howto. +Many, many Debian users and developers contributed to this document. +Particular note must be made of Michael Schmitz (m68k support), Frank +Neumann (original author of the <ulink +url="&url-m68k-old-amiga-install;">Amiga install manual</ulink>), +Arto Astala, Eric Delaunay/Ben Collins (SPARC information), Tapio +Lehtonen, and Stéphane Bortzmeyer for numerous edits and text. +We have to thank Pascal Le Bail for useful information about booting +from USB memory sticks. Miroslav KuÅ™e has documented a lot of the new +functionality in Sarge's debian-installer. + +</para><para> + +Extremely helpful text and information was found in Jim Mintha's HOWTO +for network booting (no URL available), the <ulink +url="&url-debian-faq;">Debian FAQ</ulink>, the <ulink +url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink>, the <ulink +url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;">Linux for SPARC Processors +FAQ</ulink>, the <ulink +url="&url-alpha-faq;">Linux/Alpha +FAQ</ulink>, amongst others. The maintainers of these freely +available and rich sources of information must be recognized. + +</para><para> + +The section on chrooted installations in this manual +(<xref linkend="linux-upgrade"/>) was derived in part from +documents copyright Karsten M. Self. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +The section on installations over plip in this manual +(<xref linkend="plip"/>) was based on the +<ulink url="&url-plip-install-howto;">PLIP-Install-HOWTO</ulink> +by Gilles Lamiral. + +</para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="trademarks"> + <title>Trademark Acknowledgement</title> +<para> + +All trademarks are property of their respective trademark owners. + +</para> + </sect1> +</appendix> + diff --git a/en/appendix/chroot-install.xml b/en/appendix/chroot-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31c70a65c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/chroot-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,458 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="linux-upgrade"> + <title>Installing &debian; from a Unix/Linux System</title> + +<para> + +This section explains how to install &debian; from an existing +Unix or Linux system, without using the menu-driven installer as +explained in the rest of the manual. This <quote>cross-install</quote> +HOWTO has been requested by users switching to &debian; from +Red Hat, Mandrake, and SUSE. In this section some familiarity with +entering *nix commands and navigating the file system is assumed. In +this section, <prompt>$</prompt> symbolizes a command to be entered in +the user's current system, while <prompt>#</prompt> refers to a +command entered in the Debian chroot. + +</para><para> + +Once you've got the new Debian system configured to your preference, +you can migrate your existing user data (if any) to it, and keep on +rolling. This is therefore a <quote>zero downtime</quote> &debian; +install. It's also a clever way for dealing with hardware that +otherwise doesn't play friendly with various boot or installation +media. + +</para> + + <sect2> + <title>Getting Started</title> +<para> + +With your current *nix partitioning tools, repartition the hard +drive as needed, creating at least one filesystem plus swap. You +need at least 150MB of space available for a console only install, +or at least 300MB if you plan to install X. + +</para><para> + +To create file systems on your partitions. For example, to create an +ext3 file system on partition <filename>/dev/hda6</filename> (that's +our example root partition): + +<informalexample><screen> +# mke2fs -j /dev/hda6 +</screen></informalexample> + +To create an ext2 file system instead, omit <userinput>-j</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +Initialize and activate swap (substitute the partition number for +your intended Debian swap partition): + +<informalexample><screen> +# mkswap /dev/hda5 +# sync; sync; sync +# swapon /dev/hda5 +</screen></informalexample> + +Mount one partition as <filename>/mnt/debinst</filename> (the +installation point, to be the root (<filename>/</filename>) filesystem +on your new system). The mount point name is strictly arbitrary, it is +referenced later below. + +<informalexample><screen> +# mkdir /mnt/debinst +# mount /dev/hda6 /mnt/debinst +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> +<note><para> + +If you want to have parts of the filesystem (e.g. /usr) mounted on +separate partitions, you will need to create and mount these directories +manually before proceding with the next stage. + +</para></note> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Install <command>debootstrap</command></title> +<para> + +The tool that the Debian installer uses, which is recognized as the +official way to install a Debian base system, is +<command>debootstrap</command>. It uses <command>wget</command> and +<command>ar</command>, but otherwise depends only on +<classname>/bin/sh</classname>. Install <command>wget</command> and +<command>ar</command> if they aren't already on your current system, +then download and install <command>debootstrap</command>. + +</para><para> + +If you have an rpm-based system, you can use alien to convert the +.deb into .rpm, or download an rpm-ized version at +<ulink url="http://people.debian.org/~blade/install/debootstrap"></ulink> + +</para><para> + +Or, you can use the following procedure to install it +manually. Make a work folder for extracting the .deb into: + +<informalexample><screen> +# mkdir work +# cd work +</screen></informalexample> + +The <command>debootstrap</command> binary is located in the Debian +archive (be sure to select the proper file for your +architecture). Download the <command>debootstrap</command> .deb from +the <ulink url="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/d/debootstrap/"> +pool</ulink>, copy the package to the work folder, and extract the +binary files from it. You will need to have root privileges to install +the binaries. + +<informalexample><screen> +# ar -x debootstrap_0.X.X_arch.deb +# cd / +# zcat /full-path-to-work/work/data.tar.gz | tar xv +</screen></informalexample> + +</para><para> + +Note that running <command>debootstrap</command> may require you to have +a minimal version of <classname>glibc</classname> installed (currently +GLIBC_2.3). <command>debootstrap</command> itself is a shell script, but +it calls various utilities that require <classname>glibc</classname>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Run <command>debootstrap</command></title> +<para> + +<command>debootstrap</command> can download the needed files directly +from the archive when you run it. You can substitute any Debian +archive mirror for <userinput>http.us.debian.org/debian</userinput> in +the command example below, preferably a mirror close to you +network-wise. Mirrors are listed at +<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/misc/README.mirrors"></ulink>. + +</para><para> + +If you have a &releasename; &debian; CD mounted at +<filename>/cdrom</filename>, you could substitute a file URL instead +of the http URL: <userinput>file:/cdrom/debian/</userinput> + +</para><para> + +Substitute one of the following for <replaceable>ARCH</replaceable> +in the <command>debootstrap</command> command: + +<userinput>alpha</userinput>, +<userinput>arm</userinput>, +<userinput>hppa</userinput>, +<userinput>i386</userinput>, +<userinput>ia64</userinput>, +<userinput>m68k</userinput>, +<userinput>mips</userinput>, +<userinput>mipsel</userinput>, +<userinput>powerpc</userinput>, +<userinput>s390</userinput>, or +<userinput>sparc</userinput>. + +<informalexample><screen> +# /usr/sbin/debootstrap --arch ARCH &releasename; \ + /mnt/debinst http://http.us.debian.org/debian +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Configure The Base System</title> +<para> + +Now you've got a real Debian system, though rather lean, on disk. +<command>Chroot</command> into it: + +<informalexample><screen> +# LANG= chroot /mnt/debinst /bin/bash +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + + <sect3> + <title>Mount Partitions</title> +<para> + +You need to create <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>. + +<informalexample><screen> +# editor /etc/fstab +</screen></informalexample> + +Here is a sample you can modify to suit: + +<informalexample><screen> +# /etc/fstab: static file system information. +# +# file system mount point type options dump pass +/dev/XXX / ext3 defaults 0 1 +/dev/XXX /boot ext3 ro,nosuid,nodev 0 2 + +/dev/XXX none swap sw 0 0 +proc /proc proc defaults 0 0 + +/dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy auto noauto,rw,sync,user,exec 0 0 +/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 noauto,ro,user,exec 0 0 + +/dev/XXX /tmp ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /var ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /usr ext3 rw,nodev 0 2 +/dev/XXX /home ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 +</screen></informalexample> + +Use <userinput>mount -a</userinput> to mount all the file systems you +have specified in your <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>, or to mount +file systems individually use: + +<informalexample><screen> +# mount /path # e.g.: mount /usr +</screen></informalexample> + +You can mount the proc file system multiple times and to arbitrary +locations, though <filename>/proc</filename> is customary. If you didn't use +<userinput>mount -a</userinput>, be sure to mount proc before continuing: + +<informalexample><screen> +# mount -t proc proc /proc +</screen></informalexample> + +</para><para> + +The command <userinput>ls /proc</userinput> should now show a non-empty +directory. Should this fail, you may be able to mount proc from outside +the chroot: + +<informalexample><screen> +# mount -t proc proc /mnt/debinst/proc +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title>Configure Keyboard</title> +<para> + +To configure your keyboard: + +<informalexample><screen> +# dpkg-reconfigure console-data +</screen></informalexample> + +</para><para> + +Note that the keyboard cannot be set while in the chroot, but will be +configured for the next reboot. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title>Configure Networking</title> +<para> + +To configure networking, edit +<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>, +<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>, and +<filename>/etc/hostname</filename>. + +<informalexample><screen> +# editor /etc/network/interfaces +</screen></informalexample> + +Here are some simple examples from +<filename>/usr/share/doc/ifupdown/examples</filename>: + +<informalexample><screen> +###################################################################### +# /etc/network/interfaces -- configuration file for ifup(8), ifdown(8) +# See the interfaces(5) manpage for information on what options are +# available. +###################################################################### + +# We always want the loopback interface. +# +auto lo +iface lo inet loopback + +# To use dhcp: +# +# auto eth0 +# iface eth0 inet dhcp + +# An example static IP setup: (broadcast and gateway are optional) +# +# auto eth0 +# iface eth0 inet static +# address 192.168.0.42 +# network 192.168.0.0 +# netmask 255.255.255.0 +# broadcast 192.168.0.255 +# gateway 192.168.0.1 +</screen></informalexample> + +Enter your nameserver(s) and search directives in +<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>: + +<informalexample><screen> +# editor /etc/resolv.conf +</screen></informalexample> + +A simple <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>: + +<informalexample><screen> +search hqdom.local\000 +nameserver 10.1.1.36 +nameserver 192.168.9.100 +</screen></informalexample> + +Enter your system's host name (2 to 63 characters): + +<informalexample><screen> +# echo DebianHostName > /etc/hostname +</screen></informalexample> + +If you have multiple network cards, you should arrange the names of +driver modules in the <filename>/etc/modules</filename> file into the +desired order. Then during boot, each card will be associated with the +interface name (eth0, eth1, etc.) that you expect. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title>Configure Timezone, Users, and APT</title> +<para> + +Set your timezone, add a normal user, and choose your <command>apt</command> +sources by running + +<informalexample><screen> +# /usr/sbin/base-config new +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title>Configure Locales</title> +<para> + +To configure your locale settings to use a language other than +English, install the locales support package and configure it: + +<informalexample><screen> +# apt-get install locales +# dpkg-reconfigure locales +</screen></informalexample> + +NOTE: Apt must be configured before, ie. during the base-config phase. +Before using locales with character sets other than ASCII or latin1, +please consult the appropriate localization HOWTO. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Install a Kernel</title> +<para> + +If you intend to boot this system, you probably want a Linux kernel +and a boot loader. Identify available pre-packaged kernels with + +<informalexample><screen> +# apt-cache search kernel-image +</screen></informalexample> + +Then install your choice using its package name. + +<informalexample><screen> +# apt-get install kernel-image-<replaceable>2.X.X-arch-etc</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> +<title>Set up the Boot Loader</title> +<para> + +To make your &debian; system bootable, set up your boot loader to load +the installed kernel with your new root partition. Note that debootstrap +does not install a boot loader, though you can use apt-get inside your +Debian chroot to do so. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +Check <userinput>info grub</userinput> or <userinput>man +lilo.conf</userinput> for instructions on setting up the +bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to install Debian, just +add an entry for the Debian install to your existing grub +<filename>menu.lst</filename> or <filename>lilo.conf</filename>. For +<filename>lilo.conf</filename>, you could also copy it to the new system and +edit it there. After you are done editing, call lilo (remember it will use +<filename>lilo.conf</filename> relative to the system you call it from). + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +Here is a basic <filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> as an example: + +<informalexample><screen> +boot=/dev/hda6 +root=/dev/hda6 +install=menu +delay=20 +lba32 +image=/vmlinuz +label=Debian +</screen></informalexample> + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Check <userinput>man yaboot.conf</userinput> for instructions on +setting up the bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to +install Debian, just add an entry for the Debian install to your +existing <filename>yaboot.conf</filename>. You could also copy it to +the new system and +edit it there. After you are done editing, call ybin (remember it will +use <filename>yaboot.conf</filename> relative to the system you call it from). + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Here is a basic <filename>/etc/yaboot.conf</filename> as an example: + +<informalexample><screen> +boot=/dev/hda2 +device=hd: +partition=6 +root=/dev/hda6 +magicboot=/usr/lib/yaboot/ofboot +timeout=50 +image=/vmlinux +label=Debian +</screen></informalexample> + +On some machines, you may need to use <userinput>ide0:</userinput> +instead of <userinput>hd:</userinput>. + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/appendix/example-preseed-etch.xml b/en/appendix/example-preseed-etch.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b10853fee --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/example-preseed-etch.xml @@ -0,0 +1,372 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<informalexample condition="etch"><screen> +#### Startup. + +# To use a preseed file, you'll first need to boot the installer, +# and tell it what preseed file to use. This is done by passing the +# kernel a boot parameter, either manually at boot or by editing the +# syslinux.cfg (or similar) file and adding the parameter to the end +# of the append line(s) for the kernel. +# +# If you're netbooting, use this: +# preseed/url=http://host/path/to/preseed +# If you're remastering a CD, you could use this: +# preseed/file=/cdrom/preseed +# If you're installing from USB media, use this, and put the preseed file +# in the toplevel directory of the USB stick. +# preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed +# +# If you feel comfortable modifying the installer's initrd image, +# you can also place a preseed file in the root directory of the initrd's +# filesystem, named "preseed.cfg" -- the installer will always use this +# file if it is present. Otherwise, be sure to copy this file to the location +# you specify. +# +# To make sure the installer gets the right preseed file, you can specify +# a checksum for the file. Currently this needs to be a md5sum, and if +# specified it must match the file or the installer will refuse to use the +# file. +# preseed/url/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d +# preseed/file/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d +# +# Some parts of the installation process cannot be automated using +# some forms of preseeding, because the questions are asked before +# the preseed file is loaded. For example, if the preseed file is +# downloaded over the network, the network setup must be done first. +# One reason to use initrd preseeding is that it allows preseeding +# of even these early steps of the installation process. +# +# If a preseed file cannot be used to preseed some steps, the install can +# still be fully automated, since you can pass preseed values to the kernel +# on the command line. Just pass path/to/var=value for any of the preseed +# variables listed below. +# +# While you're at it, you may want to throw a debconf/priority=critical in +# there, to avoid most questions even if the preseeding below misses some. +# And you might set the timeout to 1 in syslinux.cfg to avoid needing to hit +# enter to boot the installer. +# +# Note that the 2.4 kernel accepts a maximum of 8 command line options and +# 8 environment options (including any options added by default for the +# installer). If these numbers are exceeded, 2.4 kernels will drop any +# excess options and 2.6 kernels will panic. With kernel 2.6.9 or newer, +# you can use 32 command line options and 32 environment options. +# +# Some of the default options, like 'vga=normal' may be safely removed +# for most installations, which may allow you to add more options for +# preseeding. + +# To select your language and country, use this setting, but remember +# that this will only work for initrd based preseeding, for other forms of +# preseeding you must convert it into a kernel parameter, +# such as debian-installer/locale=en_US +d-i debian-installer/locale string en_US + +# To select your keyboard, use this setting. Again it will need to be +# passed as a kernel parameter for most preseed setups. +d-i console-keymaps-at/keymap select us + +#### Network configuration. + +# Of course, this won't work if you're loading your preseed file from the +# network! But it's great if you're booting from CD or USB stick. You can +# also pass network config parameters in on the kernel params if you are +# loading preseed files from the network. + +# netcfg will choose an interface that has link if possible. This makes it +# skip displaying a list if there is more than one interface. +d-i netcfg/choose_interface select auto + +# If you have a slow dhcp server and the installer times out waiting for +# it, this might be useful. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_timeout string 60 + +# If you prefer to configure the network manually, here's how: +#d-i netcfg/disable_dhcp boolean true +#d-i netcfg/get_nameservers string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/get_ipaddress string 192.168.1.42 +#d-i netcfg/get_netmask string 255.255.255.0 +#d-i netcfg/get_gateway string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/confirm_static boolean true + +# Note that any hostname and domain names assigned from dhcp take +# precedence over values set here. However, setting the values still +# prevents the questions from being shown even if values come from dhcp. +d-i netcfg/get_hostname string unassigned-hostname +d-i netcfg/get_domain string unassigned-domain + +# Disable that annoying WEP key dialog. +d-i netcfg/wireless_wep string +# The wacky dhcp hostname that some ISPs use as a password of sorts. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_hostname string radish + +#### Mirror settings. + +d-i mirror/country string enter information manually +d-i mirror/http/hostname string http.us.debian.org +d-i mirror/http/directory string /debian +d-i mirror/http/proxy string + +# What suite of Debian to install. +#d-i mirror/suite string testing +# What suite of Debian to use for loading installer components. +# (Defaults to same as mirror/suite.) +#d-i mirror/udeb/suite string testing + +#### Partitioning. + +# If the system has free space you can choose to only partition that space. +#d-i partman-auto/init_automatically_partition \ +# select Use the largest continuous free space + +# Alternatively, you can specify a disk to partition. The device name can +# be given in either devfs or traditional non-devfs format. +# For example, to use the first disk devfs knows of: +d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/discs/disc0/disc + +# You can choose from any of the predefined partitioning recipes: +d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe \ + select All files in one partition (recommended for new users) +#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select Desktop machine +#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select Multi-user workstation + +# Or provide a recipe of your own... +# The recipe format is documented in the file devel/partman-auto-recipe.txt. +# If you have a way to get a recipe file into the d-i environment, you can +# just point at it. +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe_file string /hd-media/recipe + +# If not, you can put an entire recipe the preseed file in one (logical) +# line. This example creates a small /boot partition, suitable swap, and +# uses the rest of the space for the root partition: +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string \ +# boot-root :: \ +# 40 50 100 ext3 \ +# $primary{ } $bootable{ } \ +# method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \ +# mountpoint{ /boot } \ +# . \ +# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 \ +# method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \ +# mountpoint{ / } \ +# . \ +# 64 512 300% linux-swap \ +# method{ swap } format{ } \ +# . + +# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation. +d-i partman/confirm_write_new_label boolean true +d-i partman/choose_partition \ + select Finish partitioning and write changes to disk +d-i partman/confirm boolean true + +#### Boot loader installation. + +# Grub is the default boot loader (for x86). If you want lilo installed +# instead, uncomment this: +#d-i grub-installer/skip boolean true + +# This is fairly safe to set, it makes grub install automatically to the MBR +# if no other operating system is detected on the machine. +d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean true + +# This one makes grub-installer install to the MBR if if finds some other OS +# too, which is less safe as it might not be able to boot that other OS. +d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean true + +# Alternatively, if you want to install to a location other than the mbr, +# uncomment and edit these lines: +#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0) +#d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean false +#d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean false + +#### Finishing up the first stage install. + +# Avoid that last message about the install being complete. +d-i prebaseconfig/reboot_in_progress note + +# This will prevent the installer from ejecting the CD during the reboot, +# which is useful in some situations. +#d-i cdrom-detect/eject boolean false + +#### Shell commands. + +# d-i preseeding is inherently not secure. Nothing in the installer checks +# for attempts at buffer overflows or other exploits of the values of a +# preseed file like this one. Only use preseed files from trusted +# locations! To drive that home, and because it's generally useful, here's +# a way to run any shell command you'd like inside the installer, +# automatically. + +# This first command is run as early as possible, just after +# preseeding is read. +#d-i preseed/early_command string anna-install some-udeb + +# This command is run just before the install finishes, but when there is +# still a usable /target directory. +#d-i preseed/late_command string echo foo > /target/etc/bar + +# This command is run just as base-config is starting up. +#base-config base-config/early_command string echo hi mom + +# This command is run after base-config is done, just before the login: +# prompt. This is a good way to install a set of packages you want, or to +# tweak the configuration of the system. +#base-config base-config/late_command \ +# string apt-get install zsh; chsh -s /bin/zsh + +###### Preseeding the 2nd stage of the installation. + +#### Preseeding base-config. + +# Avoid the introductory message. +base-config base-config/intro note + +# Avoid the final message. +base-config base-config/login note + +# If you installed a display manager, but don't want to start it immediately +# after base-config finishes. +#base-config base-config/start-display-manager boolean false + +# Some versions of the installer can report back on what you've installed. +# The default is not to report back, but sending reports helps the project +# determine what software is most popular and include it on CDs. +#popularity-contest popularity-contest/participate boolean false + +#### Clock and time zone setup. + +# Controls whether or not the hardware clock is set to UTC. +d-i clock-setup/utc boolean true + +# You may set this to any valid setting for $TZ; see the contents of +# /usr/share/zoneinfo/ for options. +d-i time/zone string US/Eastern + +#### Account setup. + +# To preseed the root password, you have to put it in the clear in this +# file. That is not a very good idea, use caution! +#passwd passwd/root-password password r00tme +#passwd passwd/root-password-again password r00tme + +# If you want to skip creation of a normal user account. +#passwd passwd/make-user boolean false + +# Alternatively, you can preseed the user's name and login. +#passwd passwd/user-fullname string Debian User +#passwd passwd/username string debian +# And their password, but use caution! +#passwd passwd/user-password password insecure +#passwd passwd/user-password-again password insecure + +#### Apt setup. + +# This question controls what source the second stage installation uses +# for packages. Choices are cdrom, http, ftp, filesystem, edit sources list +# by hand +base-config apt-setup/uri_type select http + +# If you choose ftp or http, you'll be asked for a country and a mirror. +base-config apt-setup/country select enter information manually +base-config apt-setup/hostname string http.us.debian.org +base-config apt-setup/directory string /debian +# Stop after choosing one mirror. +base-config apt-setup/another boolean false + +# You can choose to install non-free and contrib software. +#base-config apt-setup/non-free boolean true +#base-config apt-setup/contrib boolean true + +# Do enable security updates. +base-config apt-setup/security-updates boolean true + +#### Package selection. + +# You can choose to install any combination of tasks that are available. +# Available tasks as of this writing include: Desktop environment, +# Web server, Print server, DNS server, File server, Mail server, +# SQL database, Laptop, Standard system, manual package selection. The +# last of those will run aptitude. You can also choose to install no +# tasks, and force the installation of a set of packages in some other +# way. We recommend always including the Standard system task. +tasksel tasksel/first multiselect Desktop environment, Standard system +#tasksel tasksel/first multiselect Web server, Standard system + +#### Mailer configuration. + +# During a normal install, exim asks only a few questions. Here's how to +# avoid even those. More complicated preseeding is possible. +exim4-config exim4/dc_eximconfig_configtype \ + select no configuration at this time +exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true +exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true + +# It's a good idea to set this to whatever user account you choose to +# create. Leaving the value blank results in postmaster mail going to +# /var/mail/mail. +exim4-config exim4/dc_postmaster string + +#### X Configuration. + +# Preseeding Debian's X config is possible, but you probably need to know +# some details about the video hardware of the machine, since Debian's X +# configurator does not do fully automatic configuration of everything. + +# X can detect the right driver for some cards, but if you're preseeding, +# you override whatever it chooses. Still, vesa will work most places. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/device/driver select vesa + +# A caveat with mouse autodetection is that if it fails, X will retry it +# over and over. So if it's preseeded to be done, there is a possibility of +# an infinite loop if the mouse is not autodetected. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/autodetect_mouse boolean true + +# Monitor autodetection is recommended. +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/autodetect_monitor boolean true +# Uncomment if you have an LCD display. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/lcd boolean true +# X has three configuration paths for the monitor. Here's how to preseed +# the "medium" path, which is always available. The "simple" path may not +# be available, and the "advanced" path asks too many questions. +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/selection-method \ + select medium +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/mode-list \ + select 1024x768 @ 60 Hz + +#### Everything else. + +# Depending on what software you choose to install, or if things go wrong +# during the installation process, it's possible that other questions may +# be asked. You can preseed those too, of course. To get a list of every +# possible question that could be asked during an install, do an +# installation, and then run these commands: +# debconf-get-selections --installer > file +# debconf-get-selections >> file + +# If you like, you can include other preseed files into this one. +# Any settings in those files will override pre-existing settings from this +# file. More that one file can be listed, separated by spaces; all will be +# loaded. The included files can have preseed/include directives of their +# own as well. Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from +# the same directory as the preseed file that includes them. +#d-i preseed/include string x.cfg + +# The installer can optionally verify checksums of preseed files before +# using them. Currently only md5sums are supported, list the md5sums +# in the same order as the list of files to include. +#d-i preseed/include/checksum string 5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d + +# More flexibly, this runs a shell command and if it outputs the names of +# preseed files, includes those files. +#d-i preseed/include_command \ +# string echo if [ "`hostname`" = bob ]; then echo bob.cfg; fi + +# To check the format of your preseed file before performing an install, +# you can use debconf-set-selections: +# debconf-set-selections -c preseed.cfg +</screen></informalexample> diff --git a/en/appendix/example-preseed-sarge.xml b/en/appendix/example-preseed-sarge.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..76a8bb709 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/example-preseed-sarge.xml @@ -0,0 +1,366 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<informalexample condition="sarge"><screen> +#### Startup. + +# To use a preseed file, you'll first need to boot the installer, +# and tell it what preseed file to use. This is done by passing the +# kernel a boot parameter, either manually at boot or by editing the +# syslinux.cfg (or similar) file and adding the parameter to the end +# of the append line(s) for the kernel. +# +# If you're netbooting, use this: +# preseed/url=http://host/path/to/preseed +# If you're remastering a CD, you could use this: +# preseed/file=/cdrom/preseed +# If you're installing from USB media, use this, and put the preseed file +# in the toplevel directory of the USB stick. +# preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed +# Be sure to copy this file to the location you specify. +# +# Some parts of the installation process cannot be automated using +# some forms of preseeding, because the questions are asked before +# the preseed file is loaded. For example, if the preseed file is +# downloaded over the network, the network setup must be done first. +# One reason to use initrd preseeding is that it allows preseeding +# of even these early steps of the installation process. +# +# If a preseed file cannot be used to preseed some steps, the install can +# still be fully automated, since you can pass preseed values to the kernel +# on the command line. Just pass path/to/var=value for any of the preseed +# variables listed below. +# +# While you're at it, you may want to throw a debconf/priority=critical in +# there, to avoid most questions even if the preseeding below misses some. +# And you might set the timeout to 1 in syslinux.cfg to avoid needing to hit +# enter to boot the installer. +# +# Note that the kernel accepts a maximum of 8 command line options and +# 8 environment options (including any options added by default for the +# installer). If these numbers are exceeded, 2.4 kernels will drop any +# excess options and 2.6 kernels will panic. With kernel 2.6.9 or newer, +# you can use 32 command line options and 32 environment options. +# +# Some of the default options, like 'vga=normal' may be safely removed +# for most installations, which may allow you to add more options for +# preseeding. + +# It is not possible to use preseeding to set language, country, and +# keyboard. Instead you should use kernel parameters. Example: +# languagechooser/language-name=English +# countrychooser/shortlist=US +# console-keymaps-at/keymap=us + +#### Network configuration. + +# Of course, this won't work if you're loading your preseed file from the +# network! But it's great if you're booting from CD or USB stick. You can +# also pass network config parameters in on the kernel params if you are +# loading preseed files from the network. + +# netcfg will choose an interface that has link if possible. This makes it +# skip displaying a list if there is more than one interface. +d-i netcfg/choose_interface select auto + +# If you have a slow dhcp server and the installer times out waiting for +# it, this might be useful. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_timeout string 60 + +# If you prefer to configure the network manually, here's how: +#d-i netcfg/disable_dhcp boolean true +#d-i netcfg/get_nameservers string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/get_ipaddress string 192.168.1.42 +#d-i netcfg/get_netmask string 255.255.255.0 +#d-i netcfg/get_gateway string 192.168.1.1 +#d-i netcfg/confirm_static boolean true + +# Note that any hostname and domain names assigned from dhcp take +# precedence over values set here. However, setting the values still +# prevents the questions from being shown even if values come from dhcp. +d-i netcfg/get_hostname string unassigned-hostname +d-i netcfg/get_domain string unassigned-domain + +# Disable that annoying WEP key dialog. +d-i netcfg/wireless_wep string +# The wacky dhcp hostname that some ISPs use as a password of sorts. +#d-i netcfg/dhcp_hostname string radish + +#### Mirror settings. + +d-i mirror/country string enter information manually +d-i mirror/http/hostname string http.us.debian.org +d-i mirror/http/directory string /debian +d-i mirror/suite string testing +d-i mirror/http/proxy string + +#### Partitioning. + +# If the system has free space you can choose to only partition that space. +#d-i partman-auto/init_automatically_partition \ +# select Use the largest continuous free space + +# Alternatively, you can specify a disk to partition. The device name can +# be given in either devfs or traditional non-devfs format. +# For example, to use the first disk devfs knows of: +d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/discs/disc0/disc + +# You can choose from any of the predefined partitioning recipes: +d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select \ + All files in one partition (recommended for new users) +#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select Desktop machine +#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select Multi-user workstation + +# Or provide a recipe of your own... +# The recipe format is documented in the file devel/partman-auto-recipe.txt. +# If you have a way to get a recipe file into the d-i environment, you can +# just point at it. +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe_file string /hd-media/recipe + +# If not, you can put an entire recipe in one line. This example creates +# a small /boot partition, suitable swap, and uses the rest of the space +# for the root partition: +#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string boot-root :: \ +# 20 50 100 ext3 $primary{ } $bootable{ } method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } mountpoint{ /boot } . \ +# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 method{ format } format{ } \ +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } mountpoint{ / } . \ +# 64 512 300% linux-swap method{ swap } format{ } . +# For reference, here is that same recipe in a more readable form: +# boot-root :: +# 40 50 100 ext3 +# $primary{ } $bootable{ } +# method{ format } format{ } +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } +# mountpoint{ /boot } +# . +# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 +# method{ format } format{ } +# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } +# mountpoint{ / } +# . +# 64 512 300% linux-swap +# method{ swap } format{ } +# . + +# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation. +d-i partman/confirm_write_new_label boolean true +d-i partman/choose_partition select \ + Finish partitioning and write changes to disk +d-i partman/confirm boolean true + +#### Boot loader installation. + +# Grub is the default boot loader (for x86). If you want lilo installed +# instead, uncomment this: +#d-i grub-installer/skip boolean true + +# This is fairly safe to set, it makes grub install automatically to the MBR +# if no other operating system is detected on the machine. +d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean true + +# This one makes grub-installer install to the MBR if if finds some other OS +# too, which is less safe as it might not be able to boot that other OS. +d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean true + +# Alternatively, if you want to install to a location other than the mbr, +# uncomment and edit these lines: +#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0) +#d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean false +#d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean false + +#### Finishing up the first stage install. + +# Avoid that last message about the install being complete. +d-i prebaseconfig/reboot_in_progress note + +#### Shell commands. + +# d-i preseeding is inherently not secure. Nothing in the installer checks +# for attempts at buffer overflows or other exploits of the values of a +# preseed file like this one. Only use preseed files from trusted +# locations! To drive that home, and because it's generally useful, here's +# a way to run any shell command you'd like inside the installer, +# automatically. + +# This first command is run as early as possible, just after +# preseeding is read. +#d-i preseed/early_command string anna-install some-udeb + +# This command is run just before the install finishes, but when there is +# still a usable /target directory. +#d-i preseed/late_command string echo foo > /target/etc/bar + +# This command is run just as base-config is starting up. +#base-config base-config/early_command string echo hi mom + +# This command is run after base-config is done, just before the login: +# prompt. This is a good way to install a set of packages you want, or to +# tweak the configuration of the system. +#base-config base-config/late_command string \ +# apt-get install zsh; chsh -s /bin/zsh + +###### Preseeding the 2nd stage of the installation. + +#### Preseeding base-config. + +# Avoid the introductory message. +base-config base-config/intro note + +# Avoid the final message. +base-config base-config/login note + +# If you installed a display manager, but don't want to start it immediately +# after base-config finishes. +#base-config base-config/start-display-manager boolean false + +# Some versions of the installer can report back on what you've installed. +# The default is not to report back, but sending reports helps the project +# determine what software is most popular and include it on CDs. +#popularity-contest popularity-contest/participate boolean false + +#### Clock and time zone setup. + +# Controls whether or not the hardware clock is set to UTC. +#base-config tzconfig/gmt boolean true +# If you told the installer that you're in the United States, then you +# can set the time zone using this variable. +# (Choices are: Eastern, Central, Mountain, Pacific, Alaska, Hawaii, +# Aleutian, Arizona East-Indiana, Indiana-Starke, Michigan, Samoa, other) +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone/US select Eastern +# If you told it you're in Canada. +# (Choices are: Newfoundland, Atlantic, Eastern, Central, +# East-Saskatchewan, Saskatchewan, Mountain, Pacific, Yukon, other) +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone/CA select Eastern +# If you told it you're in Brazil. (Choices are: East, West, Acre, +# DeNoronha, other) +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone/BR select East +# Many countries have only one time zone. If you told the installer you're +# in one of those countries, you can choose its standard time zone via this +# question. +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone_single boolean true +# This question is asked as a fallback for countries other than those +# listed above, which have more than one time zone. You can preseed one of +# the time zones, or "other". +#base-config tzconfig/choose_country_zone_multiple select + +#### Account setup. + +# To preseed the root password, you have to put it in the clear in this +# file. That is not a very good idea, use caution! +#passwd passwd/root-password password r00tme +#passwd passwd/root-password-again password r00tme + +# If you want to skip creation of a normal user account. +#passwd passwd/make-user boolean false + +# Alternatively, you can preseed the user's name and login. +#passwd passwd/user-fullname string Debian User +#passwd passwd/username string debian +# And their password, but use caution! +#passwd passwd/user-password password insecure +#passwd passwd/user-password-again password insecure + +#### Apt setup. + +# This question controls what source the second stage installation uses +# for packages. Choices are cdrom, http, ftp, filesystem, edit sources list +# by hand +base-config apt-setup/uri_type select http + +# If you choose ftp or http, you'll be asked for a country and a mirror. +base-config apt-setup/country select enter information manually +base-config apt-setup/hostname string http.us.debian.org +base-config apt-setup/directory string /debian +# Stop after choosing one mirror. +base-config apt-setup/another boolean false + +# You can choose to install non-free and contrib software. +#base-config apt-setup/non-free boolean true +#base-config apt-setup/contrib boolean true + +# Do enable security updates. +base-config apt-setup/security-updates boolean true + +#### Package selection. + +# You can choose to install any combination of tasks that are available. +# Available tasks as of this writing include: Desktop environment, +# Web server, Print server, DNS server, File server, Mail server, +# SQL database, Laptop, Standard system, manual package selection. The +# last of those will run aptitude. You can also choose to install no +# tasks, and force the installation of a set of packages in some other +# way. We recommend always including the Standard system task. +tasksel tasksel/first multiselect Desktop environment, Standard system +#tasksel tasksel/first multiselect Web server, Standard system + +#### Mailer configuration. + +# During a normal install, exim asks only a few questions. Here's how to +# avoid even those. More complicated preseeding is possible. +exim4-config exim4/dc_eximconfig_configtype \ + select no configuration at this time +exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true +exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true + +# It's a good idea to set this to whatever user account you choose to +# create. Leaving the value blank results in postmaster mail going to +# /var/mail/mail. +exim4-config exim4/dc_postmaster string + +#### X Configuration. + +# Preseeding Debian's X config is possible, but you probably need to know +# some details about the video hardware of the machine, since Debian's X +# configurator does not do fully automatic configuration of everything. + +# X can detect the right driver for some cards, but if you're preseeding, +# you override whatever it chooses. Still, vesa will work most places. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/device/driver select vesa + +# A caveat with mouse autodetection is that if it fails, X will retry it +# over and over. So if it's preseeded to be done, there is a possibility of +# an infinite loop if the mouse is not autodetected. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/autodetect_mouse boolean true + +# Monitor autodetection is recommended. +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/autodetect_monitor boolean true +# Uncomment if you have an LCD display. +#xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/lcd boolean true +# X has three configuration paths for the monitor. Here's how to preseed +# the "medium" path, which is always available. The "simple" path may not +# be available, and the "advanced" path asks too many questions. +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/selection-method \ + select medium +xserver-xfree86 xserver-xfree86/config/monitor/mode-list \ + select 1024x768 @ 60 Hz + +#### Everything else. + +# Depending on what software you choose to install, or if things go wrong +# during the installation process, it's possible that other questions may +# be asked. You can preseed those too, of course. To get a list of every +# possible question that could be asked during an install, do an +# installation, and then run these commands: +# debconf-get-selections --installer > file +# debconf-get-selections >> file + +# If you like, you can include other preseed files into this one. +# Any settings in those files will override pre-existing settings from this +# file. More that one file can be listed, separated by spaces; all will be +# loaded. The included files can have preseed/include directives of their +# own as well. Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from +# the same directory as the preseed file that includes them. +#d-i preseed/include string x.cfg + +# More flexibly, this runs a shell command and if it outputs the names of +# preseed files, includes those files. For example, to switch configs based +# on a particular usb storage device (in this case, a built-in card reader): +#d-i preseed/include_command string \ +# if $(grep -q "GUID: 0aec3050aec305000001a003" /proc/scsi/usb-storage-*/*); \ +# then echo kraken.cfg; else echo otherusb.cfg; fi + +# To check the format of your preseed file before performing an install, +# you can use debconf-set-selections: +# debconf-set-selections -c preseed.cfg +</screen></informalexample> diff --git a/en/appendix/example-preseed.xml b/en/appendix/example-preseed.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5fcd460b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/example-preseed.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<sect1 id="example-preseed"> +<title>Preconfiguration File Example</title> + +<para> + +This is a complete working example of a preconfiguration file for an automated +install. Its use is explained in <xref linkend="automatic-install"/>. You +may want to uncomment some of the lines before using the file. + +</para> + +<note condition="sarge"><para> + +In order to be able to properly present this example in the manual, we've had +to split some lines. This is indicated by the use of the line-continuation-character +<quote>\</quote> and extra indentation in the next line. In a real preconfiguration +file, these split lines have to be joined into <emphasis>one single line</emphasis>. +If you do not, preconfiguration will fail with unpredictable results. + +</para><para> + +A <quote>clean</quote> example file is available from &urlset-example-preseed;. + +</para></note> + +<para condition="etch"> + +The example file is also available from &urlset-example-preseed;. + +</para><para> + +&example-preseed-sarge.xml; +&example-preseed-etch.xml; + +</para> +</sect1> diff --git a/en/appendix/files.xml b/en/appendix/files.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b81ebe48 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/files.xml @@ -0,0 +1,298 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1 id="linuxdevices"><title>Linux Devices</title> +<para> + +In Linux you have various special files in +<filename>/dev</filename>. These files are called device files. In +the Unix world accessing hardware is different. There you have a +special file which actually runs a driver which in turn accesses the +hardware. The device file is an interface to the actual system +component. Files under <filename>/dev</filename> also behave +differently than ordinary files. Below are the most important device +files listed. + +</para><para> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> +<row> + <entry><filename>fd0</filename></entry> + <entry>First Floppy Drive</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>fd1</filename></entry> + <entry>Second Floppy Drive</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> +<row> + <entry><filename>hda</filename></entry> + <entry>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Master)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>hdb</filename></entry> + <entry>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Slave)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>hdc</filename></entry> + <entry>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Master)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>hdd</filename></entry> + <entry>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Slave)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>hda1</filename></entry> + <entry>First partition of the first IDE hard disk</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>hdd15</filename></entry> + <entry>Fifteenth partition of the fourth IDE hard disk</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> +<row> + <entry><filename>sda</filename></entry> + <entry>SCSI Hard disk with lowest SCSI ID (e.g. 0)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>sdb</filename></entry> + <entry>SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 1)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>sdc</filename></entry> + <entry>SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 2)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>sda1</filename></entry> + <entry>First partition of the first SCSI hard disk</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>sdd10</filename></entry> + <entry>Tenth partition of the fourth SCSI hard disk</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> +<row> + <entry><filename>sr0</filename></entry> + <entry>SCSI CD-ROM with the lowest SCSI ID</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>sr1</filename></entry> + <entry>SCSI CD-ROM with the next higher SCSI ID</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> +<row> + <entry><filename>ttyS0</filename></entry> + <entry>Serial port 0, COM1 under MS-DOS</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>ttyS1</filename></entry> + <entry>Serial port 1, COM2 under MS-DOS</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>psaux</filename></entry> + <entry>PS/2 mouse device</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>gpmdata</filename></entry> + <entry>Pseudo device, repeater data from GPM (mouse) daemon</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> +<row> + <entry><filename>cdrom</filename></entry> + <entry>Symbolic link to the CD-ROM drive</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>mouse</filename></entry> + <entry>Symbolic link to the mouse device file</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> +<row> + <entry><filename>null</filename></entry> + <entry>Everything pointed to this device will disappear</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>zero</filename></entry> + <entry>One can endlessly read zeros out of this device</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +</para> + + <sect2> +<title>Setting Up Your Mouse</title> + +<para> + +The mouse can be used in both the Linux console (with gpm) and the X window +environment. The two uses can be made compatible if the gpm repeater is used +to allow the signal to flow to the X server as shown: + +<informalexample><screen> +mouse => /dev/psaux => gpm => /dev/gpmdata -> /dev/mouse => X + /dev/ttyS0 (repeater) (symlink) + /dev/ttyS1 +</screen></informalexample> + +Set the repeater protocol to be raw (in <filename>/etc/gpm.conf</filename>) while +setting X to the original mouse protocol in <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config</filename> +or <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config-4</filename>. + +</para><para> + +This approach to use gpm even in X has advantages when the mouse is +unplugged inadvertently. Simply restarting gpm with + +<informalexample><screen> +# /etc/init.d/gpm restart +</screen></informalexample> + +will re-connect the mouse in software without restarting X. + +</para><para> + +If gpm is disabled or not installed with some reason, make sure to set X to +read directly from the mouse device such as /dev/psaux. For details, refer +to the 3-Button Mouse mini-Howto at +<filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/en-txt/mini/3-Button-Mouse.gz</filename>, +<userinput>man gpm</userinput>, +<filename>/usr/share/doc/gpm/FAQ.gz</filename>, and +<ulink url="&url-xfree86;current/mouse.html">README.mouse</ulink>. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +For PowerPC, in <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config</filename> or +<filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config-4</filename>, set the mouse device to +<userinput>"/dev/input/mice"</userinput>. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Modern kernels give you the capability to emulate a three-button mouse +when your mouse only has one button. Just add the following lines to +<filename>/etc/sysctl.conf</filename> file. + +<informalexample><screen> +# 3-button mouse emulation +# turn on emulation +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button_emulation = 1 +# Send middle mouse button signal with the F11 key +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button2_keycode = 87 +# Send right mouse button signal with the F12 key +/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button3_keycode = 88 +# For different keys, use showkey to tell you what the code is. +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="tasksel-size-list"> + <title>Disk Space Needed for Tasks</title> + +<!-- Note for d-i and manual maintainers + Sizes of tasks should be determined by running "tasksel new" on a system + that been fully installed without selecting any tasks. By selecting a + task together with the "manual selection" option, aptitude will be started + and show the sizes for the task. After deselecting the packages to be + installed, quit aptitude and repeat for other tasks. + Space requirements need to be determined from tasksel as tasksel will not + install recommended packages while selecting a task from aptitude will. +--> + +<para> + +The base installation for i386 using the default 2.4 kernel, +including all standard packages, requires 573MB of disk space. + +</para><para> + +The following table lists sizes reported by aptitude for the tasks listed +in tasksel. Note that some tasks have overlapping constituents, so the +total installed size for two tasks together may be less than the total +obtained by adding up the numbers. + +</para><para> + +Note that you will need to add the sizes listed in the table to the size +of the base installation when determining the size of partitions. +Most of the size listed as <quote>Installed size</quote> will end up in +<filename>/usr</filename>; the size listed as <quote>Download size</quote> +is (temporarily) required in <filename>/var</filename>. + +</para><para> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>Task</entry> + <entry>Installed size (MB)</entry> + <entry>Download size (MB)</entry> + <entry>Space needed to install (MB)</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry>Desktop</entry> + <entry>1392</entry> + <entry>460</entry> + <entry>1852</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>Web server</entry> + <entry>36</entry> + <entry>12</entry> + <entry>48</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>Print server</entry> + <entry>168</entry> + <entry>58</entry> + <entry>226</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>DNS server</entry> + <entry>2</entry> + <entry>1</entry> + <entry>3</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>File server</entry> + <entry>47</entry> + <entry>24</entry> + <entry>71</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>Mail server</entry> + <entry>10</entry> + <entry>3</entry> + <entry>13</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>SQL database</entry> + <entry>66</entry> + <entry>21</entry> + <entry>87</entry> +</row> + +</tbody> +</tgroup></informaltable> + +<note><para> + +The <emphasis>Desktop</emphasis> task will install both the Gnome and KDE +desktop environments. + +</para></note> + +</para><para> + +If you install in a language other than English, <command>tasksel</command> +may automatically install a <firstterm>localization task</firstterm>, if one +is available for your language. Space requirements differ per language; +you should allow up to 200MB in total for download and installation. + +</para> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/appendix/gpl.xml b/en/appendix/gpl.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..19f5fec68 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/gpl.xml @@ -0,0 +1,512 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<appendix id="appendix-gpl"><title>GNU General Public License</title> + +<para> + +Version 2, June 1991 + +</para><para> + +Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +— +51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. +</para><para> + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + +</para> + + <sect1><title>Preamble</title> +<para> + +The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom +to share and change it. By contrast, the gnu General Public License +is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit +to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered +by the gnu Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it +to your programs, too. + +</para><para> + +When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge +for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can +get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces +of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these +things. + +</para><para> + +To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the +rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for +you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + +</para><para> + +For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + +</para><para> + +We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, +and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to +copy, distribute and/or modify the software. + +</para><para> + +Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, +we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the +original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect +on the original authors' reputations. + +</para><para> + +Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making +the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that +any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed +at all. + +</para><para> + +The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + +</para> + </sect1> + + <sect1><title>GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE</title> +<para> + +TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + +</para> + +<itemizedlist><listitem><para> + +This License applies to any program or other work which contains a +notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +</para><para> + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the +Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on +the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any +warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this +License along with the Program. + +</para><para> + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a +fee. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + +</para><para> + +a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices +stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + +</para><para> + +b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in +whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part +thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties +under the terms of this License. + +</para><para> + +c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when +run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use +in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement +including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is +no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that +users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and +telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if +the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an +announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print +an announcement.) + +</para><para> + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote +it. + +</para><para> + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +</para><para> + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the +Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a +volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other +work under the scope of this License. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the +following: + +</para><para> + +a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable +source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 +and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; +or, + +</para><para> + +b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, +to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of +physically performing source distribution, a complete +machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be +distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium +customarily used for software interchange; or, + +</para><para> + +c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to +distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed +only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the +program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in +accord with Subsection b above.) + +</para><para> + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +</para><para> + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this +License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from +you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so +long as such parties remain in full compliance. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject +to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted +herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third +parties to this License. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do +not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under +this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a +consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, +if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of +the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly +through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this +License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the +Program. + +</para><para> + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended +to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +</para><para> + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is +willing to distribute software through any other system and a +licensee cannot impose that choice. + +</para><para> + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new +versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new +versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may +differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is +given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a +version number of this License which applies to it and "any later +version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number +of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the +Free Software Foundation. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the +author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by +the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; +we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by +the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our +free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software +generally. + +</para><para> + +NO WARRANTY + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +because the program is licensed free of charge, there is no +warranty for the program, to the extent permitted by applicable law. +except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or +other parties provide the program "as is" without warranty of any +kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the +implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular +purpose. the entire risk as to the quality and performance of the +program is with you. should the program prove defective, you assume +the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +in no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in +writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify +and/or redistribute the program as permitted above, be liable to you +for damages, including any general, special, incidental or +consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the +program (including but not limited to loss of data or data being +rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a +failure of the program to operate with any other programs), even if +such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of +such damages. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> +<para> + +END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +</para> + </sect1> + + <sect1><title>How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs</title> +<para> + +If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make +it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under +these terms. + +</para><para> + +To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + +</para><para> + +one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it +does. + +</para><para> + +Copyright (C) year name of author + +</para><para> + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +it under the terms of the gnu General Public License as published by +the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at +your option) any later version. + +</para><para> + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +without any warranty; without even the implied warranty of +merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. See the gnu +General Public License for more details. + +</para><para> + +You should have received a copy of the gnu General Public License +along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, +MA 02110-1301, USA. + +</para><para> + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper +mail. + +</para><para> + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like +this when it starts in an interactive mode: + +</para><para> + +Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author + +</para><para> + +Gnomovision comes with absolutely no warranty; for details type `show +w'. + +</para><para> + +This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under +certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + +</para><para> + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the +appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the +commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and +`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items — whatever +suits your program. + +</para><para> + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or +your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the +program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + +</para><para> + +Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the +program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by +James Hacker. + +</para><para> + +signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 + +</para><para> + +Ty Coon, President of Vice + +</para><para> + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your +program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine +library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking +proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want +to do, use the gnu Library General Public License instead of this +License. + +</para> + </sect1> +</appendix> diff --git a/en/appendix/plip.xml b/en/appendix/plip.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0946d0ae0 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/plip.xml @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="plip" arch="i386"> + <title>Installing &debian; over Parallel Line IP (PLIP)</title> + +<para> + +This section explains how to install &debian; on a computer without +Ethernet card, but with just a remote gateway computer attached via +a Null-Modem cable (also called Null-Printer cable). The gateway +computer should be connected to a network that has a Debian mirror +on it (e.g. to the Internet). + +</para><para> + +In the example in this appendix we will set up a PLIP connection using +a gateway connected to the Internet over a dial-up connection (ppp0). +We will use IP addresses 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2 for the PLIP +interfaces on the target system and the source system respectively +(these addresses should be unused within your network address space). + +</para><para> + +The PLIP connection set up during the installation will also be available +after the reboot into the installed system (see <xref linkend="boot-new"/>). + +</para><para> + +Before you start, you will need to check the BIOS configuration (IO base +address and IRQ) for the parallel ports of both the source and target +systems. The most common values are <literal>io=0x378</literal>, +<literal>irq=7</literal>. + +</para> + + <sect2> + <title>Requirements</title> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +A target computer, called <emphasis>target</emphasis>, where Debian will be +installed. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +System installation media; see <xref linkend="installation-media"/>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Another computer connected to the Internet, called <emphasis>source</emphasis>, +that will function as the gateway. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +A DB-25 Null-Modem cable. See the +<ulink url="&url-plip-install-howto;">PLIP-Install-HOWTO</ulink> for more +information on this cable and instructions how to make your own. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Setting up source</title> +<para> + +The following shell script is a simple example of how to configure the +source computer as a gateway to the Internet using ppp0. + +<informalexample><screen> +#!/bin/sh + +# We remove running modules from kernel to avoid conflicts and to +# reconfigure them manually. +modprobe -r lp parport_pc +modprobe parport_pc io=<replaceable>0x378</replaceable> irq=<replaceable>7</replaceable> +modprobe plip + +# Configure the plip interface (plip0 for me, see dmesg | grep plip) +ifconfig <replaceable>plip0 192.168.0.2</replaceable> pointopoint <replaceable>192.168.0.1</replaceable> netmask 255.255.255.255 up + +# Configure gateway +modprobe iptable_nat +iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -o <replaceable>ppp0</replaceable> -j MASQUERADE +echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Installing target</title> +<para> + +Boot the installation media. The installation needs to be run in +expert mode; enter <userinput>expert</userinput> at the boot prompt. +Below are the answers that should be given during various stages of +the installation. + +</para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<guimenuitem>Load installer components</guimenuitem> + +</para><para> + +Select the <userinput>plip-modules</userinput> option from the list; this +will make the PLIP drivers available to the installation system. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<guimenuitem>Detect network hardware</guimenuitem> + +</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> + +If target <emphasis>does</emphasis> have a network card, a list of driver +modules for detected cards will be shown. If you want to force &d-i; to +use plip instead, you have to deselect all listed driver modules. +Obviously, if target doesn't have a network card, the installer will not +show this list. + + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Prompt for module parameters: Yes + + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Because no network card was detected/selected earlier, the installer will +ask you to select a network driver module from a list. +Select the <userinput>plip</userinput> module. + + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Additional parameters for module parport_pc: +<userinput><replaceable>io=0x378 irq=7</replaceable></userinput> + + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Additional parameters for module plip: leave empty + + </para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<guimenuitem>Configure the network</guimenuitem> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> + +Auto-configure network with DHCP: No + + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +IP address: <userinput><replaceable>192.168.0.1</replaceable></userinput> + + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Point-to-point address: +<userinput><replaceable>192.168.0.2</replaceable></userinput> + + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Name server addresses: you can enter the same addresses used on +source (see <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>) + + </para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/appendix/random-bits.xml b/en/appendix/random-bits.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a67594eb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/appendix/random-bits.xml @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<appendix id="random-bits"><title>Random Bits</title> + +&example-preseed.xml; +&files.xml; +&chroot-install.xml; +&plip.xml; + +</appendix> diff --git a/en/bookinfo.xml b/en/bookinfo.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e96adc46 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/bookinfo.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<bookinfo id="debian_installation_guide"> +<title>&debian; Installation Guide</title> + +<abstract> +<para> +This document contains installation instructions for the &debian; +&release; system (codename <quote>&releasename;</quote>), +for the &arch-title; (<quote>&architecture;</quote>) +architecture. It also contains pointers to more information and +information on how to make the most of your new Debian system. +</para> + +<para> +<warning condition="not-checked"><para> +This installation guide is based on an earlier manual written for +the old Debian installation system (the <quote>boot-floppies</quote>), and has +been updated to document the new Debian installer. However, for +&architecture;, the manual has not been fully updated and fact checked +for the new installer. There may remain parts of the manual that are +incomplete or outdated or that still document the boot-floppies +installer. A newer version of this manual, possibly better documenting +this architecture, may be found on the Internet at the +<ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; home page</ulink>. You may also be able +to find additional translations there. +</para></warning> + +<note condition="checked"><para> +Although this installation guide for &architecture; is mostly up-to-date, +we plan to make some changes and reorganize parts of the manual after the +official release of &releasename;. A newer version of this manual may be +found on the Internet at the <ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; home page</ulink>. +You may also be able to find additional translations there. +</para></note> +</para> +</abstract> + +<copyright> + <year>2004</year> + <year>2005</year> + <holder>the Debian Installer team</holder> +</copyright> + +<legalnotice> +<para> + +This manual is free software; you may redistribute it and/or modify it +under the terms of the GNU General Public License. Please refer to the +license in <xref linkend="appendix-gpl"/>. + +</para> +</legalnotice> +</bookinfo> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/alpha.xml b/en/boot-installer/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b8bd6f7f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,441 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="alpha" id="alpha-firmware"> + <title>Alpha Console Firmware</title> +<para> + +Console firmware is stored in a flash ROM and started when an Alpha +system is powered up or reset. There are two different console +specifications used on Alpha systems, and hence two classes of console +firmware available: + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + + <emphasis>SRM console</emphasis>, based on the Alpha Console Subsystem + specification, which provides an operating environment for OpenVMS, Tru64 + UNIX, and Linux operating systems. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + + <emphasis>ARC, AlphaBIOS, or ARCSBIOS console</emphasis>, based on the + Advanced RISC Computing (ARC) specification, which provides an operating + environment for Windows NT. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +From the user's perspective, the most important difference between SRM +and ARC is that the choice of console constrains the possible +disk-partitioning scheme for the hard disk which you wish to boot off +of. + +</para><para> + +ARC requires that you use an MS-DOS partition table (as created by +<command>cfdisk</command>) for the boot disk. Therefore MS-DOS partition +tables are the <quote>native</quote> partition format when booting from +ARC. In fact, since AlphaBIOS contains a disk partitioning utility, you may +prefer to partition your disks from the firmware menus before +installing Linux. + +</para><para> + +Conversely, SRM is <emphasis>incompatible</emphasis><footnote> + +<para> +Specifically, the bootsector format required by the Console Subsystem +Specification conflicts with the placement of the DOS partition table. +</para> + +</footnote> with MS-DOS partition tables. Since Tru64 Unix uses the BSD +disklabel format, this is the <quote>native</quote> partition format for +SRM installations. + +</para><para> + +GNU/Linux is the only operating system on Alpha that can be booted from +both console types, but &debian; &release; only supports booting on +SRM-based systems. If you have an Alpha for which no version of SRM is +available, if you will be dual-booting the system with Windows NT, or if +your boot device requires ARC console support for BIOS initialization, +you will not be able to use the &debian; &release; installer. You can +still run &debian; &release; on such systems by using other install +media; for instance, you can install Debian woody with MILO and upgrade. + +</para><para> + +Because <command>MILO</command> is not available for any of the Alpha +systems currently in production (as of February 2000), and because it +is no longer necessary to buy an OpenVMS or Tru64 Unix license to have +SRM firmware on your older Alpha, it is recommended that you use SRM +when possible. + +</para><para> + +The following table summarizes available and supported system +type/console combinations (see <xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/> for the +system type names). The word <quote>ARC</quote> below denotes any of the +ARC-compliant consoles. + +</para><para> + +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>System Type</entry> + <entry>Console Type Supported</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry>alcor</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>avanti</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>book1</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>cabriolet</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>dp264</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>eb164</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>eb64p</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>eb66</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>eb66p</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>jensen</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>lx164</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>miata</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>mikasa</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>mikasa-p</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>nautilus</entry> + <entry>ARC (see motherboard manual) or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>noname</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>noritake</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>noritake-p</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>pc164</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>rawhide</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>ruffian</entry> + <entry>ARC only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>sable</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>sable-g</entry> + <entry>SRM only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>sx164</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>takara</entry> + <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>xl</entry> + <entry>ARC only</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>xlt</entry> + <entry>ARC only</entry> +</row> + +</tbody> +</tgroup> +</informaltable> + +</para><para> + +Generally, none of these consoles can boot Linux directly, so the +assistance of an intermediary bootloader is required. For the SRM +console, <command>aboot</command>, a small, platform-independent +bootloader, is used. See the (unfortunately outdated) <ulink +url="&url-srm-howto;">SRM HOWTO</ulink> for more information on +<command>aboot</command>. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +The following paragraphs are from the woody install manual, and are +included here for reference; they may be useful to someone at a later +date when Debian supports MILO-based installs again. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +Generally, none of these consoles can boot Linux directly, so the +assistance of an intermediary bootloader is required. There are two +mainstream Linux loaders: <command>MILO</command> and <command>aboot</command>. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +<command>MILO</command> is itself a console, which replaces ARC or SRM in +memory. <command>MILO</command> can be booted from both ARC and SRM and is +the only way to bootstrap Linux from the ARC console. +<command>MILO</command> is platform-specific (a different <command>MILO</command> +is needed for each system type) and exist only for those systems, for +which ARC support is shown in the table above. See also the +(unfortunately outdated) <ulink url="&url-milo-howto;">MILO HOWTO</ulink>. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +<command>aboot</command> is a small, platform-independent bootloader, which +runs from SRM only. See the (also unfortunately outdated) <ulink +url="&url-srm-howto;">SRM HOWTO</ulink> for more information on +<command>aboot</command>. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +Thus, three scenarios are generally possible, depending on the +system's console firmware and whether or not <command>MILO</command> is +available: + +<informalexample><screen> +SRM -> aboot +SRM -> MILO +ARC -> MILO +</screen></informalexample> + +Because <command>MILO</command> is not available for any of the Alpha +systems currently in production (as of February 2000), and because it +is no longer necessary to buy an OpenVMS or Tru64 Unix license to have +SRM firmware on your older Alpha, it is recommended that you use SRM and +<command>aboot</command> on new installations of GNU/Linux, unless you wish +to dual-boot with Windows NT. + +</para><para> + +The majority of AlphaServers and all current server and workstation +products contain both SRM and AlphaBIOS in their firmware. For +<quote>half-flash</quote> machines such as the various evaluation boards, +it is possible to switch from one version to another by reflashing the +firmware. Also, once SRM is installed, it is possible to run +ARC/AlphaBIOS from a floppy disk (using the <command>arc</command> +command). For the reasons mentioned above, we recommend switching to +SRM before installing &debian;. + +</para><para> + +As on other architectures, you should install the newest available +revision of the firmware<footnote> + +<para> +Except on Jensen, where Linux is not supported on firmware versions +newer than 1.7 — see <ulink url="&url-jensen-howto;"></ulink> +for more information. +</para> + +</footnote> before installing &debian;. +For Alpha, firmware updates can be obtained from +<ulink url="&url-alpha-firmware;">Alpha Firmware Updates</ulink>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> +<para> + +In SRM, Ethernet interfaces are named with the <userinput>ewa</userinput> +prefix, and will be listed in the output of the <userinput>show dev</userinput> command, +like this (edited slightly): + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> show dev +ewa0.0.0.9.0 EWA0 08-00-2B-86-98-65 +ewb0.0.0.11.0 EWB0 08-00-2B-86-98-54 +ewc0.0.0.2002.0 EWC0 00-06-2B-01-32-B0 +</screen></informalexample> + +You first need to set the boot protocol: + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> set ewa0_protocol bootp +</screen></informalexample> + +Then check the medium type is correct: + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> set ewa0_mode <replaceable>mode</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +You can get a listing of valid modes with <userinput>>>>set ewa0_mode</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +Then, to boot from the first Ethernet interface, you would type: + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> boot ewa0 -flags "" +</screen></informalexample> + +This will boot using the default kernel parameters as included in the +netboot image. + +</para><para> + +If you wish to use a serial console, you <emphasis>must</emphasis> +pass the <userinput>console=</userinput> parameter to the kernel. +This can be done using the <userinput>-flags</userinput> argument to +the SRM <userinput>boot</userinput> command. The serial ports are +named the same as their corresponding files in +<userinput>/dev</userinput>. Also, when specifying additional kernel +parameters, you must repeat certain default options that are needed by +the &d-i; images. For example, to boot from <userinput>ewa0</userinput> +and use a console on the first serial port, you would type: + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> boot ewa0 -flags "root=/dev/ram ramdisk_size=16384 console=ttyS0" +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Booting from CD-ROM with the SRM Console</title> +<para> + +Type + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> boot xxxx -flags 0 +</screen></informalexample> + +where <replaceable>xxxx</replaceable> is your CD-ROM drive in SRM notation. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="FIXME"> + <title>Booting from CD-ROM with the ARC or AlphaBIOS Console</title> +<para> + +To boot a CD-ROM from the ARC console, find your sub-architecture code +name (see <xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/>), then enter +<filename>\milo\linload.exe</filename> as the boot loader and +<filename>\milo\<replaceable>subarch</replaceable></filename> (where +<replaceable>subarch</replaceable> is the proper subarchitecture name) +as the OS Path in the `OS Selection Setup' menu. Ruffians make an +exception: You need to use <filename>\milo\ldmilo.exe</filename> as +boot loader. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> + <title>Booting from Floppies with the SRM Console</title> +<para> + +At the SRM prompt (<prompt>>>></prompt>), issue the following +command: + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> boot dva0 -flags 0 +</screen></informalexample> + +possibly replacing <filename>dva0</filename> with the actual device +name. Usually, <filename>dva0</filename> is the floppy; type + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> show dev +</screen></informalexample> + +to see the list of devices (e.g., if you want to boot from a CD). +Note that if you are booting via MILO, <command>-flags</command> argument +is ignored, so you can just type <command>boot dva0</command>. +If everything works OK, you will eventually see the Linux kernel boot. + +</para><para> + +If you want to specify kernel parameters when booting via +<command>aboot</command>, use the following command: + +<informalexample><screen> +>>> boot dva0 -file linux.bin.gz -flags "root=/dev/fd0 load_ramdisk=1 arguments" +</screen></informalexample> + +(typed on one line), substituting, if necessary, the actual SRM boot +device name for <filename>dva0</filename>, the Linux boot device name for +<filename>fd0</filename>, and the desired kernel parameters for +<filename>arguments</filename>. + +</para><para> + +If you want to specify kernel parameters when booting via +<command>MILO</command>, you will have to interrupt bootstrap once you get +into MILO. See <xref linkend="booting-from-milo"/>. +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> + <title>Booting from Floppies with the ARC or AlphaBIOS Console</title> + +<para> + +In the OS Selection menu, set <command>linload.exe</command> as the boot +loader, and <command>milo</command> as the OS Path. Bootstrap using the +newly created entry. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="FIXME" id="booting-from-milo"><title>Booting with MILO</title> +<para> + +MILO contained on the bootstrap media is configured to proceed straight +to Linux automatically. Should you wish to intervene, all you need is to +press space during MILO countdown. + +</para><para> + +If you want to specify all the bits explicitly (for example, to supply +additional parameters), you can use a command like this: + +<informalexample><screen> +MILO> boot fd0:linux.bin.gz root=/dev/fd0 load_ramdisk=1 <!-- arguments --> +</screen></informalexample> + +If you are booting from something other than a floppy, substitute +<filename>fd0</filename> in the above example with the appropriate device name +in Linux notation. The <command>help</command> command would give you a brief +MILO command reference. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/arm.xml b/en/boot-installer/arm.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b506be4e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/arm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="arm" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting from TFTP</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + + <sect3 arch="arm"><title>Booting from TFTP on NetWinder</title> + +<para> + +NetWinders have two network interfaces: The 10Mbps NE2000-compatible +card is <filename>eth0</filename> and the 100Mbps Tulip card is +<filename>eth1</filename>. + +</para><note><para> + +You need NeTTrom 2.2.1 or later to boot the +installation system. NeTTrom 2.3.3 is recommended: get these files +from +<ulink url="ftp://ftp.netwinder.org/pub/netwinder/firmware/"></ulink>: +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>nettrom-2.3-3.armv4l.rpm</filename> + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>nettrom-2.3.3.bin</filename> + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>nettrom-2.3.3.bin.md5sum</filename> + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para></note><para> + +After rebooting and interrupting the boot process during the countdown, you +must first configure the network either with a static address: + +<informalexample><screen> + NeTTrom command-> setenv eth0_ip 192.168.0.10/24 +</screen></informalexample> + +where 24 is the number of set bits in the netmask, or a dynamic address: + +<informalexample><screen> + NeTTrom command-> boot diskless +</screen></informalexample> + +You may also need to configure the <userinput>route1</userinput> +settings if the TFTP +server is not on the local subnet. The rest of the config is pretty +standard (the save-all step is optional): + +<informalexample><screen> + NeTTrom command-> setenv kerntftpserver 192.168.0.1 + NeTTrom command-> setenv kerntftpfile boot.img + NeTTrom command-> save-all + NeTTrom command-> setenv netconfig_eth0 flash + NeTTrom command-> setenv kernconfig tftp + NeTTrom command-> setenv rootdev /dev/ram + NeTTrom command-> setenv cmdappend root=/dev/ram +</screen></informalexample> + +Only the last four of these interfere with normal disk booting, so it is +safe to issue <command>save-all</command> right before them, which will +store the network settings in case you need to boot from the network +again. + +If you want to use the serial console to install your NetWinder, you also +need the following setting: + +<informalexample><screen> + NeTTrom command-> setenv cmdappend root=/dev/ram console=ttyS0,115200 +</screen></informalexample> + +Use the <command>printenv</command> command to review your +environment settings. Finally, if your <envar>cmdappend</envar> +NeTTrom variable has the <option>noinitrd</option> option, you must +remove it so the downloaded kernel can boot with its attached ramdisk. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm"><title>Booting from TFTP on CATS</title> + +<para> + +On CATS machines, use <command>boot de0:</command> or similar at the +Cyclone prompt. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + + + <sect2 arch="arm"><title>Booting from CD-ROM</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + +<para> + +To boot a CD-ROM from the Cyclone console prompt, use the command +<command>boot cd0:cats.bin</command> + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml b/en/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b064e9b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<chapter id="boot-installer"><title>Booting the Installation System</title> + +<!-- Include only archs that are documented to avoid build-errors --> +<!-- The arch="..." condition can be deleted when al archs are present --> + <sect1 arch="alpha;arm;i386;ia64;m68k;mips;s390;powerpc;sparc"> + <title>Booting the Installer on &arch-title;</title> + +<!-- This info is so architecture dependent, that I have turned the --> +<!-- structure inside out for this chapter. Each arch has a document. --> +<!-- Note: archs hppa and mipsel are currently missing --> + +&boot-installer-alpha.xml; +&boot-installer-arm.xml; +<!-- &boot-installer-hppa.xml; --> +&boot-installer-i386.xml; +&boot-installer-ia64.xml; +&boot-installer-m68k.xml; +&boot-installer-mips.xml; +<!-- &boot-installer-mipsel.xml; --> +&boot-installer-s390.xml; +&boot-installer-powerpc.xml; +&boot-installer-sparc.xml; + + </sect1> + +&boot-installer-parameters.xml; +&boot-installer-trouble.xml; + +</chapter> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/hppa.xml b/en/boot-installer/hppa.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3bf892313 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/hppa.xml @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="hppa"> + <title></title> +<para> + +<!-- Placeholder document; please write and include in + boot-installer.xml and build/templates/docstruct.ent --> + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/i386.xml b/en/boot-installer/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..709ea73a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,379 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="i386"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + +<!-- We'll comment the following section until we know exact layout --> +<!-- +CD #1 of official Debian CD-ROM sets for &arch-title; will present a +<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt on most hardware. Press +<keycap>F3</keycap> to see the list of kernel options available +from which to boot. Just type your chosen flavor name (idepci, +vanilla, compact, bf24) at the <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt +followed by &enterkey;. + +</para><para> + +If your hardware doesn't support booting of multiple images, put one +of the other CDs in the drive. It appears that most SCSI CD-ROM drives +do not support <command>isolinux</command> multiple image booting, so users +with SCSI CD-ROMs should try either CD2 (vanilla) or CD3 (compact), +or CD5 (bf2.4). + +</para><para> + +CD's 2 through 5 will each boot a +different ``flavor'' depending on which CD-ROM is +inserted. See <xref linkend="kernel-choice"/> for a discussion of the +different flavors. Here's how the flavors are laid out on the +different CD-ROMs: + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term>CD 1</term><listitem><para> + +Allows a selection of kernel images to boot from (the idepci flavor is +the default if no selection is made). + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term>CD 2</term><listitem><para> + +Boots the <quote>vanilla</quote> flavor. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term>CD 3</term><listitem><para> + +Boots the <quote>compact</quote> flavor. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term>CD 4</term><listitem><para> + +Boots the <quote>idepci</quote> flavor. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term>CD 5</term><listitem><para> + +Boots the <quote>bf2.4</quote> flavor. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> + + </variablelist> + +</para><para> + +--> + + </sect2> + +<!-- FIXME the documented procedure does not exactly work, commented out + until fixes + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="install-from-dos"> + <title>Booting from a DOS partition</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-hd.xml; + +<para> + +Boot into DOS (not Windows) without any drivers being loaded. To do +this, you have to press <keycap>F8</keycap> at exactly the right +moment (and optionally select the <quote>safe mode command prompt only</quote> +option). Enter the subdirectory for the flavor you chose, e.g., + +<informalexample><screen> +cd c:\install +</screen></informalexample>. + +Next, execute <command>install.bat</command>. +The kernel will load and launch the installer system. + +</para><para> + +Please note, there is currently a loadlin problem (#142421) which +precludes <filename>install.bat</filename> from being used with the +bf2.4 flavor. The symptom of the problem is an +<computeroutput>invalid compressed format</computeroutput> error. + +</para> + </sect2> + +END FIXME --> + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="boot-initrd"> + <title>Booting from Linux Using <command>LILO</command> or + <command>GRUB</command></title> + +<para> +To boot the installer from hard disk, you must first download +and place the needed files as described in <xref linkend="boot-drive-files"/>. +</para> + +<para> +If you intend to use the hard drive only for booting and then +download everything over the network, you should download the +<filename>netboot/debian-installer/i386/initrd.gz</filename> file and its +corresponding kernel. This will allow you to repartition the hard disk +from which you boot the installer, although you should do so with care. +</para> + +<para> +Alternatively, if you intend to keep an existing partition on the hard +drive unchanged during the install, you can download the +<filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename> file and its kernel, as well as +copy a CD iso to the drive (make sure the file is named ending in +<literal>.iso</literal>). The installer can then boot from the drive +and install from the CD image, without needing the network. +</para> + +<para> +For <command>LILO</command>, you will need to configure two +essential things in <filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename>: +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +to load the <filename>initrd.gz</filename> installer at boot time; + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +have the <filename>vmlinuz</filename> kernel use a RAM disk as +its root partition. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +Here is a <filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> example: + +</para><para> + +<informalexample><screen> +image=/boot/newinstall/vmlinuz + label=newinstall + initrd=/boot/newinstall/initrd.gz + root=/dev/ram0 + append="<phrase condition="sarge">devfs=mount,dall </phrase>ramdisk_size=12000" +</screen></informalexample> + +For more details, refer to the +<citerefentry><refentrytitle>initrd</refentrytitle> +<manvolnum>4</manvolnum></citerefentry> and +<citerefentry><refentrytitle>lilo.conf</refentrytitle> +<manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> man pages. Now run +<userinput>lilo</userinput> and reboot. + +</para><para> + +The procedure for <command>GRUB</command> is quite similar. Locate your +<filename>menu.lst</filename> in the <filename>/boot/grub/</filename> +directory (sometimes in the <filename>/boot/boot/grub/</filename>), +add the following lines: + +<informalexample><screen> +title New Install +kernel (hd0,0)/boot/newinstall/vmlinuz root=/dev/ram0 ramdisk_size=12000 +initrd (hd0,0)/boot/newinstall/initrd.gz +</screen></informalexample> + +and reboot. <phrase condition="sarge">If the boot fails, you can try adding +<userinput>devfs=mount,dall</userinput> to the <quote>kernel</quote> line. +</phrase> + +</para><para> + +Note that the value of the <userinput>ramdisk_size</userinput> may need to be +adjusted for the size of the initrd image. +From here on, there should be no difference between <command>GRUB</command> +or <command>LILO</command>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="usb-boot"> + <title>Booting from USB Memory Stick</title> +<para> + +Let's assume you have prepared everything from <xref +linkend="boot-dev-select"/> and <xref linkend="boot-usb-files"/>. Now +just plug your USB stick into some free USB connector and reboot the +computer. The system should boot up, and you should be presented with +the <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Here you can enter optional boot +arguments, or just hit &enterkey;. + +</para><para> + +In case your computer doesn't support booting from USB memory devices, +you can still use a single floppy to do the initial boot and then +switch to USB. Boot your system as described in <xref linkend="floppy-boot"/>; +the kernel on the boot floppy should detect your USB stick automatically. +When it asks for the root floppy, simply press &enterkey;. You should see +&d-i; starting. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="floppy-boot"> + <title>Booting from Floppies</title> +<para> + +You will have already downloaded the floppy images you needed and +created floppies from the images in <xref linkend="create-floppy"/>. +<!-- missing-doc FIXME If you need to, you can also modify the boot floppy; see +<xref linkend="rescue-replace-kernel"/>. --> + +</para><para> + +To boot from the installer boot floppy, place it in the primary floppy +drive, shut down the system as you normally would, then turn it back +on. + +</para><para> + +For installing from an LS-120 drive (ATAPI version) with a set of +floppies, you need to specify the virtual location for the floppy +device. This is done with the <emphasis>root=</emphasis> boot +argument, giving the device that the ide-floppy driver maps the device +to. For example, if your LS-120 drive is connected as the first IDE +device (master) on the second cable, you enter +<userinput>linux root=/dev/hdc</userinput> at the boot prompt. +Installation from LS-120 is only supported by 2.4 and later kernels. + +</para><para> + +Note that on some machines, <keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap> +<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Delete</keycap></keycombo> does not +properly reset the machine, so a <quote>hard</quote> reboot is recommended. If +you are installing from an existing operating system (e.g., from a DOS +box) you don't have a choice. Otherwise, please do a hard reboot when +booting. + +</para><para> + +The floppy disk will be accessed, and you should then see a screen +that introduces the boot floppy and ends with the <prompt>boot:</prompt> +prompt. + +</para><para> + +Once you press &enterkey;, you should see the message +<computeroutput>Loading...</computeroutput>, followed by +<computeroutput>Uncompressing Linux...</computeroutput>, and +then a screenfull or so of information about the hardware in your +system. More information on this phase of the boot process can be +found below in <xref linkend="kernel-msgs"/>. + +</para><para> + +After booting from the boot floppy, the root floppy is +requested. Insert the root floppy and press &enterkey;, and the +contents are loaded into memory. The installer program +<command>debian-installer</command> is automatically launched. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + +<para> + +There are various ways to do a TFTP boot on i386. + +</para> + + <sect3><title>NIC or Motherboard that support PXE</title> +<para> + +It could be that your Network Interface Card or Motherboard provides +PXE boot functionality. +This is a <trademark class="trade">Intel</trademark> re-implemention +of TFTP boot. If so you may be able to configure your BIOS to boot from the +network. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>NIC with Network BootROM</title> +<para> + +It could be that your Network Interface Card provides +TFTP boot functionality. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +Let us (<email>&email-debian-boot-list;</email>) know how did you manage it. +Please refer to this document. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Etherboot</title> +<para> + +The <ulink url="http://www.etherboot.org">etherboot project</ulink> +provides bootdiskettes and even bootroms that do a TFTPboot. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="i386"><title>The Boot Prompt</title> +<para> + +When the installer boots, you should be presented with a friendly graphical +screen showing the Debian logo and the boot prompt: + +<informalexample><screen> +Press F1 for help, or ENTER to boot: +</screen></informalexample> + +At the boot prompt +you can either just press &enterkey; to boot the installer with +default options or enter a specific boot method and, optionally, boot +parameters. + +</para><para> + +Information on available boot methods and on boot parameters which might +be useful can be found by pressing <keycap>F2</keycap> through +<phrase condition="sarge"><keycap>F7</keycap></phrase><phrase +condition="etch"><keycap>F8</keycap></phrase>. If you add any parameters to +the boot command line, be sure to type the boot method (the default is +<userinput>linux</userinput>) and a space before the first parameter (e.g., +<userinput>linux debconf/priority=medium</userinput>). + +<note><para> + +If you are installing the system via a remote management device that +provides a text interface to the VGA console, you may not be able to +see the initial graphical splash screen upon booting the installer; +you may even not see the boot prompt. Examples of these devices include +the text console of Compaq's <quote>integrated Lights Out</quote> (iLO) +and HP's <quote>Integrated Remote Assistant</quote> (IRA). +You can blindly press F1<footnote> + +<para> + +In some cases these devices will require special escape sequences to +enact this keypress, for example the IRA uses <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> +<keycap>F</keycap> </keycombo>, <keycap>1</keycap>. + +</para> + +</footnote> to bypass this screen and view the help text. Once you are +past the splash screen and at the help text your keystrokes will be echoed +at the prompt as expected. To prevent the installer from using the +framebuffer for the rest of the installation, you will also want to add +<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput> to the boot prompt, +as described in the help text. + +</para></note> +</para> + + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/ia64.xml b/en/boot-installer/ia64.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3fa028406 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/ia64.xml @@ -0,0 +1,464 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="ia64"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + + <note> + <title>CD Contents</title> + +<para> + +There are three basic variations of Debian Install CDs. +The <emphasis>Business Card</emphasis> CD has a minimal installation +that will fit on the small form factor CD media. +It requires a network connection in order to install the rest of the +base installation and make a usable system. +The <emphasis>Network Install</emphasis> CD has all of the packages +for a base install but requires a network connection to a Debian +mirror site in order to install the +extra packages one would want for a complete system . +The set of Debian CDs can install a complete system from the wide +range of packages without needing access to the network. +</para> + </note> + +<para> + +The IA-64 architecture uses the next generation Extensible Firmware Interface +(EFI) from Intel. +Unlike the traditional x86 BIOS which knows little about the boot +device other than the partition table and Master Boot Record (MBR), +EFI can read and write files from FAT16 or FAT32 formatted disk +partitions. +This simplifies the often arcane process of starting a system. +The system boot loader and the EFI firmware that supports it have +a full filesystem to store the files necessary for booting the +machine. +This means that the system disk on an IA-64 system has an additional +disk partition dedicated to EFI instead of the simple MBR or boot +block on more conventional systems. + +</para><para> + +The Debian Installer CD contains a small EFI partition where the +<command>ELILO</command> bootloader, its configuration file, the installer's +kernel, and initial filesystem (initrd) are located. +The running system also contains an EFI partition where the necessary +files for booting the system reside. +These files are readable from the EFI Shell as described below. + +</para><para> + +Most of the details of how <command>ELILO</command> actually loads and +starts a system are transparent to the system installer. +However, the installer must set up an EFI partition prior to installing +the base system. Otherwise, the installation of <command>ELILO</command> +will fail, rendering the system un-bootable. +The EFI partition is allocated and formatted in the partitioning step +of the installation prior to loading any packages on the system disk. +The partitioning task also verifies that a suitable EFI partition is +present before allowing the installation to proceed. + +</para><para> + +The EFI Boot Manager is presented as the last step of the firmware +initialization. +It displays a menu list from which the user can select +an option. +Depending on the model of system and what other software has been +loaded on the system, this menu may be different from one system +to another. +There should be at least two menu items displayed, +<command>Boot Option Maintenance Menu</command> and +<command>EFI Shell (Built-in)</command>. +Using the first option is preferred, however, if that +option is not available or the CD for some reason does not +boot with it, use the second option. + +</para> + + <warning> + <title>IMPORTANT</title> +<para> +The EFI Boot Manager will select a default boot action, typically +the first menu choice, within a pre-set number of seconds. +This is indicated by a countdown at the bottom of the screen. +Once the timer expires and the systems starts the default action, +you may have to reboot the machine in order to continue the installation. +If the default action is the EFI Shell, you can return to the Boot Manager +by running <command>exit</command> at the shell prompt. +</para> + </warning> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="bootable-cd"> + <title>Option 1: Booting from the Boot Option Maintenance Menu</title> +<para> + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> + +<listitem><para> +Insert the CD in the DVD/CD drive and reboot the machine. +The firmware will display the EFI Boot Manager page and menu after +it completes its system initialization. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +Select <command>Boot Maintenance Menu</command> from the menu +with the arrow keys and press <command>ENTER</command>. +This will display a new menu. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +Select <command>Boot From a File</command> from the menu +with the arrow keys and press <command>ENTER</command>. +This will display a list of devices probed by the firmware. +You should see two menu lines containing either the label +<command>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command> or +<command>Removable Media Boot</command>. +If you examine the rest of the menu line, you will notice that +the device and controller information should be the same. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +You can choose either of the entries that refer to the CD/DVD +drive. +Select your choice with the arrow keys and press <command>ENTER</command>. +If you choose <command>Removable Media Boot</command> the machine +will immediately start the boot load sequence. +If you choose <command>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command> instead, it +will display a directory listing of the bootable portion of the +CD, requiring you to proceed to the next (additional) step. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +You will only need this step if you chose +<command>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command>. +The directory listing will also show +<command>[Treat like Removable Media Boot]</command> on the next to +the last line. +Select this line with the arrow keys and press <command>ENTER</command>. +This will start the boot load sequence. +</para></listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +These steps start the Debian boot loader which will display a +menu page for you to select a boot kernel and options. +Proceed to selecting the boot kernel and options. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-with-efi"> + <title>Option 2: Booting from the EFI Shell</title> +<para> + +If, for some reason, option 1 is not successful, reboot the machine +and when the EFI Boot Manager screen appears there should be +one option called <command>EFI Shell [Built-in]</command>. +Boot the Debian Installer CD with the following steps: + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> + +<listitem><para> +Insert the CD in the DVD/CD drive and reboot the machine. +The firmware will display the EFI Boot Manager page and menu after +it completes system initialization. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +Select <command>EFI Shell</command> from the menu with the arrow keys +and press <command>ENTER</command>. +The EFI Shell will scan all of the bootable devices and display +them to the console before displaying its command prompt. +The recognized bootable partitions on devices will show a device name of +<filename>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:</filename>. +All other recognized partitions will be named +<filename>blk<replaceable>n</replaceable>:</filename>. +If you inserted the CD just before entering the shell, this may +take a few extra seconds as it initializes the CD drive. +</para> +</listitem> + +<listitem><para> +Examine the output from the shell looking for the CDROM drive. +It is most likely the <filename>fs0:</filename> device although +other devices with bootable partitions will also show up as +<filename>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable></filename>. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +Enter <command>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:</command> and press +<command>ENTER</command> to select that +device where <replaceable>n</replaceable> is the partition number for the +CDROM. The shell will now display the partition number as its prompt. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +Enter <command>elilo</command> and press <command>ENTER</command>. +This will start the boot load sequence. +</para></listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +As with option 1, these steps start the Debian boot loader which will +display a menu page for you to select a boot kernel and options. +You can also enter the shorter +<command>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:elilo</command> command at +the shell prompt. +Proceed to selecting the boot kernel and options. + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="serial-console"> + <title>Installing using a Serial Console</title> + +<para> + +You may choose to perform an install using a monitor and keyboard +or using a serial connection. To use a monitor/keyboard setup, +select an option containing the string [VGA console]. To install +over a serial connection, choose an option containing the string +[<replaceable>BAUD</replaceable> baud serial console], where +<replaceable>BAUD</replaceable> is the speed of your serial console. +Menu items for the most typical baud rate settings on the ttyS0 +device are preconfigured. + +</para><para> + +In most circumstances, you will want the installer to use the same +baud rate as your connection to the EFI console. If you aren't +sure what this setting is, you can obtain it using the command +<command>baud</command> at the EFI shell. + +</para><para> + +If there is not an option available that is configured for the serial +device or baud rate you would like to use, you may override the console setting +for one of the existing menu options. For example, to use a +57600 baud console over the ttyS1 device, enter +<command>console=ttyS1,57600n8</command> into +the <classname>Boot:</classname> text window. + +</para> + +<note><para> +Most IA-64 boxes ship with a default console setting of 9600 baud. +This setting is rather slow, and the normal installation process +will take a significant time to draw each screen. You should consider +either increasing the baud rate used for performing the installation, +or performing a Text Mode installation. See the <classname>Params</classname> +help menu for instructions on starting the installer in Text Mode. +</para></note> + +<warning><para> +If you select the wrong console type, you +will be able to select the kernel and enter parameters but both +the display and your input will go dead as soon as the kernel starts, +requiring you to reboot before you can begin the installation. +</para></warning> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="kernel-option-menu"> + <title>Selecting the Boot Kernel and Options</title> + +<para> + +The boot loader will display a form with a menu list and a text +window with a <classname>Boot:</classname> prompt. +The arrow keys select an item from the menu and any text typed +at the keyboard will appear in the text window. +There are also help screens which can be displayed by pressing +the appropriate function key. +The <classname>General</classname> help screen explains the menu +choices and the <classname>Params</classname> screen explains +the common command line options. + +</para><para> + +Consult the <classname>General</classname> help screen for the +description of the kernels and install modes most appropriate +for your installation. +You should also consult <xref linkend="boot-parms"/> below for any additional +parameters that you may want to set in the <classname>Boot:</classname> +text window. +The kernel version you choose selects the kernel version that will be +used for both the installation process and the installed system. +If you encounter kernel problems with the installation, you may also +have those same problems with the system you install. +The following two steps will select and start the install: + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> + +<listitem><para> +Select the kernel version and installation mode most +appropriate to your needs with the arrow keys. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +Enter any boot parameters by typing at the keyboard. +The text will be displayed directly in the text window. +This is where kernel parameters (such as serial console +settings) are specified. +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> +Press <command>ENTER</command>. This will load and start the +kernel. +The kernel will display its usual initialization messages followed +by the first screen of the Debian Installer. +</para></listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +Proceed to the next chapter to continue the installation where you will +set up the language locale, network, and disk partitions. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> + +<para> +Booting an IA64 system from the network is similar to a CD boot. +The only difference is how the installation kernel is loaded. +The EFI Boot Manager can load and start programs from a server on +the network. +Once the installation kernel is loaded and starts, the system install +will proceed thru the same steps as the CD install with the exception +that the packages of the base install will be loaded from the network +rather than the CD drive. + +</para> + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + +<para> + +Network booting an ia64 system requires two architecture-specific actions. +On the boot server, DHCP and TFTP must be configured to deliver +<command>elilo</command>. +On the client a new boot option must be defined in the EFI boot manager +to enable loading over a network. + +</para> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp-server"> + <title>Configuring the Server</title> +<para> + +A suitable TFTP entry for network booting an ia64 system looks something +like this: + +<informalexample><screen> +host mcmuffin { + hardware ethernet 00:30:6e:1e:0e:83; + fixed-address 10.0.0.21; + filename "debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi"; +} +</screen></informalexample> + +Note that the goal is to get <command>elilo.efi</command> running on +the client. + +</para><para> + +Extract the <filename>netboot.tar.gz</filename> file into the directory used +as the root for your tftp server. Typical tftp root directories include +<filename>/var/lib/tftp</filename> and <filename>/tftpboot</filename>. +This will create a <filename>debian-installer</filename> directory +tree containing the boot files for an IA-64 system. + +</para><para> + +<informalexample><screen> +# cd /var/lib/tftp +# tar xvfz /home/user/netboot.tar.gz +./ +./debian-installer/ +./debian-installer/ia64/ +[...] +</screen></informalexample> + +The <filename>netboot.tar.gz</filename> contains an +<filename>elilo.conf</filename> file that should work for most configurations. +However, should you need to make changes to this file, you can find it in the +<filename>debian-installer/ia64/</filename> directory. + +It is possible to have different config files for different clients by naming +them using the client's IP address in hex with the suffix +<filename>.conf</filename> instead of <filename>elilo.conf</filename>. +See documentation provided in the <classname>elilo</classname> package +for details. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp-client"> + <title>Configuring the Client</title> +<para> + +To configure the client to support TFTP booting, start by booting to +EFI and entering the <guimenu>Boot Option Maintenance Menu</guimenu>. + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Add a boot option. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +You should see one or more lines with the text +<guimenuitem>Load File [Acpi()/.../Mac()]</guimenuitem>. If more +than one of these entries exist, choose the one containing the +MAC address of the interface from which you'll be booting. +Use the arrow keys to highlight your choice, then press enter. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Name the entry <userinput>Netboot</userinput> or something similar, +save, and exit back to the boot options menu. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +You should see the new boot option you just created, and selecting it +should initiate a DHCP query, leading to a TFTP load of +<filename>elilo.efi</filename> from the server. + +</para><para> + +The boot loader will display its prompt after it has downloaded and +processed its configuration file. +At this point, the installation proceeds with the same steps as a +CD install. Select a boot option as in above and when the kernel +has completed installing itself from the network, it will start the +Debian Installer. + +</para><para> + +Proceed to the next chapter to continue the installation where +you will set up the language locale, network, and the disk partitions. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml b/en/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d32a37e9a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<para> + +The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. +If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off +the CD, great! Simply +<phrase arch="i386"> +configure your system for booting off a CD as described in +<xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/>, +</phrase> +insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. + +</para><para> + +Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be +inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the +standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, +revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation +methods which may work for you. + +</para><para> + +Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the +Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. +Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's +time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional +packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. + +</para><para> + +If you have problems booting, see <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. + +</para> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml b/en/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3e00f1f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<para> + +Booting from an existing operating system is often a convenient +option; for some systems it is the only supported method of +installation. + +</para><para> + +To boot the installer from hard disk, you will have already completed +downloading and placing the needed files in +<xref linkend="boot-drive-files"/>. + +</para> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/intro-net.xml b/en/boot-installer/intro-net.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5594fef3 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/intro-net.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<para> + +Booting from the network requires that you have a network +connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). + +</para><para arch="hppa"> + +Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server +instead of a BOOTP server. + +</para><para> + +The installation method to support network booting is described in <xref +linkend="install-tftp"/>. + +</para>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/en/boot-installer/m68k.xml b/en/boot-installer/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1bf0f0201 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,371 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Choosing an Installation Method</title> + +<para> + +Some &arch-title; subarchs have the option of booting using either a +2.4.x or 2.2.x linux kernel. When such a choice exists, try the 2.4.x +linux kernel. The installer should also require less memory when using +a 2.4.x linux kernel as 2.2.x support requires a fixed-sized ramdisk +and 2.4.x uses tmpfs. + +</para><para condition="etch"> + +If you are using a 2.2.x linux kernel, then you need to use the &ramdisksize; +kernel parameter. + +</para><para> + +</para><para condition="sarge"> + +Also, if you are using a 2.2.x linux kernel, then you must make sure you +are using a ramdisk built to accommodate it, see the +<ulink url="&disturl;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/MANIFEST">MANIFEST</ulink>. +In general, this means you need to use the initrd22.gz ramdisk from the respective +directory. + +</para><para> + +Make sure <userinput>root=/dev/ram</userinput> is one of your kernel +parameters. + +</para><para> + +If you're having trouble, check +<ulink url="&url-m68k-cts-faq;">cts's &arch-title; debian-installer FAQ</ulink>. + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-amiga"/></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-atari"/></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-bvme6000"/></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-mac"/></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-mvme"/></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-q40"/></para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-amiga"><title>Amiga</title> +<para> + +The only method of installation available to amiga is the hard drive +(see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). +<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> + +</para><para> + +Amiga does not currently work with bogl, so if +you are seeing bogl errors, you need to include the kernel parameter +<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput>. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-atari"><title>Atari</title> +<para> + +The installer for atari may be started from either the hard +drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>) or from floppies +(see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>). +<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> + +</para><para> + +Atari does not currently work with bogl, so if +you are seeing bogl errors, you need to include the kernel parameter +<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput>. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-bvme6000"><title>BVME6000</title> +<para> + +The installer for BVME6000 may be started from a cdrom +(see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-cdrom"/>), floppies +(see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>), or the net +(see <xref linkend="boot-tftp"/>). + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-mac"><title>Macintosh</title> +<para> + +The only method of installation available to mac is from +the hard drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). +<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> +Macs do not have a working 2.4.x kernel. + +</para><para> + +If your hardware uses a 53c9x-based scsi bus, then you may need to +include the kernel parameter <userinput>mac53c9x=1,0</userinput>. +Hardware with two such scsi buses, such as the Quadra 950, will need +<userinput>mac53c9x=2,0</userinput> instead. Alternatively, the +parameter can be specified as <userinput>mac53c9x=-1,0</userinput> +which will leave autodetection on, but which will disable SCSI +disconnects. Note that specifying this parameter is only necessary +if you have more than one hard disk; otherwise, the system will run +faster if you do not specify it. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-mvme"><title>MVME147 and MVME16x</title> +<para> + +The installer for MVME147 and MVME16x may be started from +either floppies (see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>) +or the net (see <xref linkend="boot-tftp"/>). +<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boot-q40"><title>Q40/Q60</title> +<para> + +The only method of installation available to Q40/Q60 is +from the hard drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). +<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> + +</para> + </sect3> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="m68k-boot-hd"><title>Booting from a Hard Disk</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-hd.xml; + +<para> + +At least six different ramdisks may be used to boot from the hard +drive, three different types each with and without support for a +2.2.x linux kernel (see +<ulink url="&disturl;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/MANIFEST">MANIFEST</ulink> +for details). + +</para><para> + +The three different types of ramdisks are <filename>cdrom</filename>, +<filename>hd-media</filename>, and <filename>nativehd</filename>. These +ramdisks differ only in their source for installation packages. +The <filename>cdrom</filename> ramdisk uses a cdrom to get +debian-installer packages. The <filename>hd-media</filename> ramdisk +uses an iso image file of a cdrom currently residing on a hard disk. +Finally, the <filename>nativehd</filename> ramdisk uses the net to +install packages. + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-amiga"/></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-atari"/></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-mac"/></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-q40"/></para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + + <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-amiga"><title>Booting from AmigaOS</title> +<para> + +In the <command>Workbench</command>, start the Linux installation +process by double-clicking on the <guiicon>StartInstall</guiicon> icon +in the <filename>debian</filename> directory. + +</para><para> + +You may have to press the &enterkey; key twice after the Amiga +installer program has output some debugging information into a window. +After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few seconds' +delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, displaying +all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages may scroll +by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple of +seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so you +can continue down at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. + +</para> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-atari"><title>Booting from Atari TOS</title> +<para> + +At the GEM desktop, start the Linux installation process by +double-clicking on the <guiicon>bootstra.prg</guiicon> icon in the +<filename>debian</filename> directory and clicking +<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> at the program options dialog box. + +</para><para> + +You may have to press the &enterkey; key after the Atari +bootstrap program has output some debugging information into a +window. After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few +seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, +displaying all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages +may scroll by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple +of seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so +you can continue below at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. + +</para> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-mac"><title>Booting from MacOS</title> +<para> + +You must retain the original Mac system and +boot from it. It is <emphasis>essential</emphasis> that, when booting +MacOS in preparation for booting the Penguin linux loader, you +hold the <keycap>shift</keycap> key down to prevent extensions from +loading. If you don't use MacOS except for loading linux, you can +accomplish the same thing by removing all extensions and control +panels from the Mac's System Folder. Otherwise extensions may be left +running and cause random problems with the running linux kernel. + +</para><para> + +Macs require the <command>Penguin</command> +bootloader. If you do not have the tools to handle +a <command>Stuffit</command> archive, &penguin19.hfs; is an +hfs disk image with <command>Penguin</command> unpacked. +<xref linkend="create-floppy"/> describes how to copy this +image to a floppy. + +</para><para> + +At the MacOS desktop, start the Linux installation process by +double-clicking on the <guiicon>Penguin Prefs</guiicon> icon in +the <filename>Penguin</filename> directory. The +<command>Penguin</command> booter will start up. Go to the +<guimenuitem>Settings</guimenuitem> item in the +<guimenu>File</guimenu> menu, click the +<guilabel>Kernel</guilabel> tab. Select the kernel +(<filename>vmlinuz</filename>) and ramdisk +(<filename>initrd.gz</filename>) images in the +<filename>install</filename> directory by clicking on the corresponding +buttons in the upper right corner, and navigating the file select +dialogs to locate the files. + +</para><para> + +To set the boot parameters in Penguin, choose <guimenu>File</guimenu> -> +<guimenuitem>Settings...</guimenuitem>, then switch to the +<guilabel>Options</guilabel> tab. Boot parameters may be typed in to +the text entry area. If you will always want to use these settings, +select <guimenu>File</guimenu> -> <guimenuitem>Save Settings as +Default</guimenuitem>. + +</para><para> + +Close the <guilabel>Settings</guilabel> +dialog, save the settings and start the bootstrap using the +<guimenuitem>Boot Now</guimenuitem> item in the +<guimenu>File</guimenu> menu. + +</para><para> + +The <command>Penguin</command> booter will output some debugging +information into a window. After this, the screen will go grey, there +will be a few seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text +should come up, displaying all kinds of kernel debugging +information. These messages may scroll by too fast for you to read, +but that's OK. After a couple of seconds, the installation program +should start automatically, so you can continue below at +<xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-q40"><title>Booting from Q40/Q60</title> + +<para> + +FIXME + +</para><para> + +The installation program should start automatically, so you can +continue below at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. + +</para> + + </sect3> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="m68k-boot-cdrom"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> +<para> + +Currently, the only &arch-title; subarchitecture that +supports CD-ROM booting is the BVME6000. + +</para> + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + +<para> + +After booting the VMEbus systems you will be presented with the LILO +<prompt>Boot:</prompt> prompt. At that prompt enter one of the +following to boot Linux and begin installation proper of the Debian +software using vt102 terminal emulation: + +<!-- Because the &enterkey; definition uses <keycap>, --> +<!-- we use <screen> instead of <userinput> in this list --> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +type <screen>i6000 &enterkey;</screen> to install a BVME4000/6000 + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +type <screen>i162 &enterkey;</screen> to install an MVME162 + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +type <screen>i167 &enterkey;</screen> to install an MVME166/167 + +</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</para><para> + +You may additionally append the string +<screen>TERM=vt100</screen> to use vt100 terminal emulation, +e.g., <screen>i6000 TERM=vt100 &enterkey;</screen>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="boot-from-floppies"> + <title>Booting from Floppies</title> +<para> + +For most &arch-title; architectures, booting from a local filesystem is the +recommended method. + +</para><para> + +Booting from the boot floppy is supported only for Atari and VME +(with a SCSI floppy drive on VME) at this time. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/mips.xml b/en/boot-installer/mips.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f03084b73 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/mips.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="mips" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> + + <sect3> + <title>SGI Indys TFTP Booting</title> +<para> + +After entering the command monitor use + +<informalexample><screen> +bootp(): +</screen></informalexample> + +on SGI Indys to boot linux and to begin installation of the Debian +Software. In order to make this +work you may have to unset the <envar>netaddr</envar> environment +variable. Type + +<informalexample><screen> +unsetenv netaddr +</screen></informalexample> + +in the command monitor to do this. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title>Broadcom BCM91250A TFTP Booting</title> +<para> + +On the Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board, you have to load the SiByl boot +loader via TFTP which will then load and start the Debian installer. In +most cases, you will first obtain an IP address via DHCP but it is also +possible to configure a static address. In order to use DHCP, you can +enter the following command on the CFE prompt: + +<informalexample><screen> +ifconfig eth0 -auto +</screen></informalexample> + +Once you have obtained an IP address, you can load SiByl with the following +command: + +<informalexample><screen> +boot 192.168.1.1:/boot/sibyl +</screen></informalexample> + +You need to substitute the IP address listed in this example with either +the name or the IP address of your TFTP server. Once you issue this +command, the installer will be loaded automatically. + +</para> +</sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="mips"><title>Boot Parameters</title> + + <sect3> + <title>SGI Indys TFTP Booting</title> +<para> + +On SGI Indys you can append boot parameters to the +<command>bootp():</command> command in the command monitor. + +</para><para> + +Following the <command>bootp():</command> command you can give the +path and name of the file to boot if you did not give an explicit name +via your bootp/dhcp server. Example: + +<informalexample><screen> +bootp():/boot/tftpboot.img +</screen></informalexample> + +Further kernel parameters can be passed via <command>append</command>: + +<informalexample><screen> +bootp(): append="root=/dev/sda1" +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title>Broadcom BCM91250A TFTP Booting</title> +<para> + +You cannot pass any boot parameters directly from the CFE prompt. Instead, +you have to edit the <filename>/boot/sibyl.conf</filename> file on the TFTP +server and add your parameters to the <replaceable>extra_args</replaceable> +variable. + +</para> + </sect3> + + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/mipsel.xml b/en/boot-installer/mipsel.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9fd14ed6 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/mipsel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="mipsel"> + <title></title> +<para> + +<!-- Placeholder document; please write and include in + boot-installer.xml and build/templates/docstruct.ent --> + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/parameters.xml b/en/boot-installer/parameters.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90188ad34 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/parameters.xml @@ -0,0 +1,351 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="boot-parms"><title>Boot Parameters</title> +<para> + +Boot parameters are Linux kernel parameters which are generally used +to make sure that peripherals are dealt with properly. For the most +part, the kernel can auto-detect information about your peripherals. +However, in some cases you'll have to help the kernel a bit. + +</para><para> + +If this is the first time you're booting the system, try the default +boot parameters (i.e., don't try setting parameters) and see if it works +correctly. It probably will. If not, you can reboot later and look for +any special parameters that inform the system about your hardware. + +</para><para> + +Information on many boot parameters can be found in the +<ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/BootPrompt-HOWTO.html"> Linux +BootPrompt HOWTO</ulink>, including tips for obscure hardware. This +section contains only a sketch of the most salient parameters. Some +common gotchas are included below in +<xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. + +</para><para> + +When the kernel boots, a message + +<informalexample><screen> +Memory:<replaceable>avail</replaceable>k/<replaceable>total</replaceable>k available +</screen></informalexample> + +should be emitted early in the process. +<replaceable>total</replaceable> should match the total amount of RAM, +in kilobytes. If this doesn't match the actual amount of RAM you have +installed, you need to use the +<userinput>mem=<replaceable>ram</replaceable></userinput> parameter, +where <replaceable>ram</replaceable> is set to the amount of memory, +suffixed with <quote>k</quote> for kilobytes, or <quote>m</quote> for +megabytes. For example, both <userinput>mem=65536k</userinput> and +<userinput>mem=64m</userinput> mean 64MB of RAM. + +</para><para condition="supports-serial-console"> + +If you are booting with a serial console, generally the kernel will +autodetect +this<phrase arch="mipsel"> (although not on DECstations)</phrase>. +If you have a videocard (framebuffer) and a keyboard also attached to +the computer which you wish to boot via serial console, you may have +to pass the +<userinput>console=<replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput> +argument to the kernel, where <replaceable>device</replaceable> is +your serial device, which is usually something like +<filename>ttyS0</filename>. + +</para><para arch="sparc"> + +For &arch-title; the serial devices are <filename>ttya</filename> or +<filename>ttyb</filename>. +Alternatively, set the <envar>input-device</envar> and +<envar>output-device</envar> OpenPROM variables to +<filename>ttya</filename>. + +</para> + + + <sect2 id="installer-args"><title>Debian Installer Parameters</title> +<para> + +The installation system recognizes a few additional boot parameters<footnote> + +<para> + +Note that the kernel accepts a maximum of 8 command line options and +8 environment options (including any options added by default for the +installer). If these numbers are exceeded, 2.4 kernels will drop any +excess options and 2.6 kernels will panic. +<phrase condition="etch">With kernel 2.6.9 or newer, you can use 32 +command line options and 32 environment options.</phrase> + +</para> + +</footnote> which may be useful. + +</para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term>debconf/priority</term> +<listitem><para> + +This parameter sets the lowest priority of messages to be displayed. + +</para><para> + +The default installation uses <userinput>debconf/priority=high</userinput>. +This means that both high and critical priority messages are shown, but medium +and low priority messages are skipped. +If problems are encountered, the installer adjusts the priority as needed. + +</para><para> + +If you add <userinput>debconf/priority=medium</userinput> as boot parameter, you +will be shown the installation menu and gain more control over the installation. +When <userinput>debconf/priority=low</userinput> is used, all messages are shown +(this is equivalent to the <emphasis>expert</emphasis> boot method). +With <userinput>debconf/priority=critical</userinput>, the installation system +will display only critical messages and try to do the right thing without fuss. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + + +<varlistentry> +<term>DEBIAN_FRONTEND</term> +<listitem><para> + +This boot parameter controls the type of user interface used for the +installer. The current possible parameter settings are: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem> +<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=noninteractive</userinput></para> +</listitem><listitem> +<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=text</userinput></para> +</listitem><listitem> +<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=newt</userinput></para> +</listitem><listitem> +<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=slang</userinput></para> +</listitem><listitem> +<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=ncurses</userinput></para> +</listitem><listitem> +<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=bogl</userinput></para> +</listitem><listitem> +<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=gtk</userinput></para> +</listitem><listitem> +<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=corba</userinput></para> +</listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +The default front end is <userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=newt</userinput>. +<userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=text</userinput> may be preferable for +serial console installs. Generally only the +<userinput>newt</userinput> frontend is available on default install +media, so this is not very useful right now. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + + +<varlistentry> +<term>BOOT_DEBUG</term> +<listitem><para> + +Setting this boot parameter to 2 will cause the installer's boot process +to be verbosely logged. Setting it to 3 makes debug shells +available at strategic points in the boot process. (Exit the shells to +continue the boot process.) + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term><userinput>BOOT_DEBUG=0</userinput></term> +<listitem><para>This is the default.</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term><userinput>BOOT_DEBUG=1</userinput></term> +<listitem><para>More verbose than usual.</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term><userinput>BOOT_DEBUG=2</userinput></term> +<listitem><para>Lots of debugging information.</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term><userinput>BOOT_DEBUG=3</userinput></term> +<listitem><para> + +Shells are run at various points in the boot process to allow detailed +debugging. Exit the shell to continue the boot. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + + +<varlistentry> +<term>INSTALL_MEDIA_DEV</term> +<listitem><para> + +The value of the parameter is the path to the device to load the +Debian installer from. For example, +<userinput>INSTALL_MEDIA_DEV=/dev/floppy/0</userinput> + +</para><para> + +The boot floppy, which normally scans all floppies and USB storage +devices it can to find the root floppy, can be overridden by this +parameter to only look at the one device. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>debian-installer/framebuffer</term> +<listitem><para> + +Some architectures use the kernel framebuffer to offer installation in +a number of languages. If framebuffer causes a problem on your system +you can disable the feature by the parameter +<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput>. Problem +symptoms are error messages about bterm or bogl, a blank screen, or +a freeze within a few minutes after starting the install. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +The <userinput>video=vga16:off</userinput> argument may also be used +to disable the framebuffer. Such problems have been reported on a Dell +Inspiron with Mobile Radeon card. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +Such problems have been reported on the Amiga 1200 and SE/30. + +</para><para arch="hppa"> + +Such problems have been reported on hppa. + +</para><note arch="sparc"><para> + +Because of display problems on some systems, framebuffer support is +<emphasis>disabled by default</emphasis> for &arch-title;. This can result +in ugly display on systems that do properly support the framebuffer, like +those with ATI graphical cards. +If you see display problems in the installer, you can try booting with +parameter <userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=true</userinput>. + +</para></note></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>debian-installer/probe/usb</term> +<listitem><para> + +Set to <userinput>false</userinput> to prevent probing for USB on +boot, if that causes problems. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>netcfg/disable_dhcp</term> +<listitem><para> + +By default, the &d-i; automatically probes for network configuration +via DHCP. If the probe succeeds, you won't have a chance to review and +change the obtained settings. You can get to the manual network setup +only in case the DHCP probe fails. + +</para><para> + +If you have a DHCP server on your local network, but want to avoid it +because e.g. it gives wrong answers, you can use the parameter +<userinput>netcfg/disable_dhcp=true</userinput> to prevent configuring +the network with DHCP and to enter the information manually. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>hw-detect/start_pcmcia</term> +<listitem><para> + +Set to <userinput>false</userinput> to prevent starting PCMCIA +services, if that causes problems. Some laptops are well known for +this misbehavior. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>preseed/url</term> +<listitem><para> + +Specify the url to a preconfiguration file to download and use in +automating the install. See <xref linkend="automatic-install"/>. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>preseed/file</term> +<listitem><para> + +Specify the path to a preconfiguration file to load to +automating the install. See <xref linkend="automatic-install"/>. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="etch"> +<term>cdrom-detect/eject</term> +<listitem><para> + +By default, before rebooting, &d-i; automatically ejects the optical +media used during the installation. This can be unnecessary if the system +does not automatically boot off the CD. In some cases it may even be +undesirable, for example if the optical drive cannot reinsert the media +itself and the user is not there to do it manually. Many slot loading, +slim-line, and caddy style drives cannot reload media automatically. + +</para><para> + +Set to <userinput>false</userinput> to disable automatic ejection, and +be aware that you may need to ensure that the system does not +automatically boot from the optical drive after the initial +installation. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>ramdisk_size</term> +<listitem><para> + +If you are using a 2.2.x kernel, you may need to set &ramdisksize;. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="etch"> +<term>rescue/enable</term> +<listitem><para> + +Set to <userinput>true</userinput> to enter rescue mode rather than +performing a normal installation. See <xref linkend="rescue"/>. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + </sect2> + </sect1> + diff --git a/en/boot-installer/powerpc.xml b/en/boot-installer/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d7219d08 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="boot-cd"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + +<para> + +Currently, the only &arch-title; subarchitectures that support CD-ROM +booting are PReP and New World PowerMacs. On PowerMacs, hold the +<keycap>c</keycap> key, or else the combination of +<keycap>Command</keycap>, <keycap>Option</keycap>, +<keycap>Shift</keycap>, and <keycap>Delete</keycap> +keys together while booting to boot from the CD-ROM. + +</para><para> + +OldWorld PowerMacs will not boot a Debian CD, because OldWorld +computers relied on a Mac OS ROM CD boot driver to be present on the CD, +and a free-software version of this driver is not available. All +OldWorld systems have floppy drives, so use the floppy drive to launch +the installer, and then point the installer to the CD for the needed +files. + +</para><para> + +If your system doesn't boot directly from CD-ROM, you can still use +the CD-ROM to install the system. On NewWorlds, you can also use an +OpenFirmware command to boot from the CD-ROM manually. Follow the +instructions in <xref linkend="boot-newworld"/> for booting from +the hard disk, except use the path to <command>yaboot</command> on the +CD at the OF prompt, such as + +<informalexample><screen> +0 > boot cd:,\install\yaboot +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="install-drive"> + <title>Booting from Hard Disk</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-hd.xml; + + <sect3><title>Booting CHRP from OpenFirmware</title> + +<para> + + <emphasis>Not yet written.</emphasis> + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Booting OldWorld PowerMacs from MacOS</title> +<para> + +If you set up BootX in <xref linkend="files-oldworld"/>, you can +use it to boot into the installation system. Double click the +<guiicon>BootX</guiicon> application icon. Click on the +<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button and select <guilabel>Use +Specified RAM Disk</guilabel>. This will give you the +chance to select the <filename>ramdisk.image.gz</filename> file. You +may need to select the <guilabel>No Video Driver</guilabel> checkbox, +depending on your hardware. Then click the +<guibutton>Linux</guibutton> button to shut down MacOS and launch the +installer. + +</para> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 id="boot-newworld"> + <title>Booting NewWorld Macs from OpenFirmware</title> +<para> + +You will have already placed the <filename>vmlinux</filename>, +<filename>initrd.gz</filename>, <filename>yaboot</filename>, and +<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> files at the root level of your HFS +partition in <xref linkend="files-newworld"/>. +Restart the computer, and immediately (during the chime) hold down the +<keycap>Option</keycap>, <keycap>Command (cloverleaf/Apple)</keycap>, +<keycap>o</keycap>, and <keycap>f</keycap> keys all together. After +a few seconds you will be presented with the Open Firmware prompt. +At the prompt, type + +<informalexample><screen> +0 > boot hd:<replaceable>x</replaceable>,yaboot +</screen></informalexample> + +replacing <replaceable>x</replaceable> with the partition number of +the HFS partition where the +kernel and yaboot files were placed, followed by a &enterkey;. On some +machines, you may need to use <userinput>ide0:</userinput> instead of +<userinput>hd:</userinput>. In a few more seconds you will see a +yaboot prompt + +<informalexample><screen> +boot: +</screen></informalexample> + +At yaboot's <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt, type either +<userinput>install</userinput> or <userinput>install video=ofonly</userinput> +followed by a &enterkey;. The +<userinput>video=ofonly</userinput> argument is for maximum +compatibility; you can try it if <userinput>install</userinput> +doesn't work. The Debian installation program should start. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="usb-boot"> + <title>Booting from USB memory stick</title> +<para> + +Currently, NewWorld PowerMac systems are known to support USB booting. + +</para> + +<para> + +Make sure you have prepared everything from <xref +linkend="boot-usb-files"/>. To boot a Macintosh system from a USB stick, +you will need to use the Open Firmware prompt, since Open Firmware does +not search USB storage devices by default. +<!-- TODO: although it could be made to; watch this space --> +To get to the prompt, hold down +<keycombo><keycap>Command</keycap> <keycap>Option</keycap> +<keycap>o</keycap> <keycap>f</keycap></keycombo> all together while +booting (see <xref linkend="invoking-openfirmware"/>). + +</para><para> + +You will need to work out where the USB storage device appears in the +device tree, since at the moment <command>ofpath</command> cannot work +that out automatically. Type <userinput>dev / ls</userinput> and +<userinput>devalias</userinput> at the Open Firmware prompt to get a +list of all known devices and device aliases. On the author's system +with various types of USB stick, paths such as +<filename>usb0/disk</filename>, <filename>usb0/hub/disk</filename>, +<filename>/pci@f2000000/usb@1b,1/disk@1</filename>, and +<filename>/pci@f2000000/usb@1b,1/hub@1/disk@1</filename> work. + +</para><para> + +Having worked out the device path, use a command like this to boot the +installer: + +<informalexample><screen> +boot <replaceable>usb0/disk</replaceable>:<replaceable>2</replaceable>,\\:tbxi +</screen></informalexample> + +The <replaceable>2</replaceable> matches the Apple_HFS or +Apple_Bootstrap partition onto which you copied the boot image earlier, +and the <userinput>,\\:tbxi</userinput> part instructs Open Firmware to +boot from the file with an HFS file type of "tbxi" (i.e. +<command>yaboot</command>) in the directory previously blessed with +<command>hattrib -b</command>. + +</para><para> + +The system should now boot up, and you should be presented with the +<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Here you can enter optional boot +arguments, or just hit &enterkey;. + +</para><warning><para> + +This boot method is new, and may be difficult to get to work on some +NewWorld systems. If you have problems, please file an installation +report, as explained in <xref linkend="submit-bug"/>. + +</para></warning> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + +<para> + +Currently, PReP and New World PowerMac systems support netbooting. + +</para><para> + +On machines with Open Firmware, such as NewWorld Power Macs, enter the +boot monitor (see <xref linkend="invoking-openfirmware"/>) and +use the command <command>boot enet:0</command>. PReP and CHRP boxes +may have different ways of addressing the network. On a PReP machine, +you should try +<userinput>boot <replaceable>server_ipaddr</replaceable>,<replaceable>file</replaceable>,<replaceable>client_ipaddr</replaceable></userinput>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc"> + <title>Booting from Floppies</title> +<para> + +Booting from floppies is supported for &arch-title;, although it is +generally only applicable for OldWorld systems. NewWorld systems are +not equipped with floppy drives, and attached USB floppy drives are +not supported for booting. + +</para><para> + +You will have already downloaded the floppy images you needed and +created floppies from the images in <xref linkend="create-floppy"/>. + +</para><para> + +To boot from the <filename>boot-floppy-hfs.img</filename> floppy, +place it in floppy drive after shutting the system down, and before +pressing the power-on button. + +</para><note><para> +For those not familiar with Macintosh +floppy operations: a floppy placed in the machine prior to boot will +be the first priority for the system to boot from. A floppy without a +valid boot system will be ejected, and the machine will then check for +bootable hard disk partitions. + +</para></note><para> + +After booting, the <filename>root.bin</filename> floppy is +requested. Insert the root floppy and press &enterkey;. The installer +program is automatically launched after the root system has been +loaded into memory. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>PowerPC Boot Parameters</title> +<para> + +Many older Apple monitors used a 640x480 67Hz mode. If your video +appears skewed on an older Apple monitor, try appending the boot +argument <userinput>video=atyfb:vmode:6</userinput> , which will +select that mode for most Mach64 and Rage video hardware. For Rage 128 +hardware, this changes to +<userinput>video=aty128fb:vmode:6</userinput> . + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/s390.xml b/en/boot-installer/s390.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0fd68dce4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/s390.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="s390"><title>s390 Limitations</title> +<para> + +In order to run the installation system a working network setup and +ssh session is needed on S/390. + +</para><para> + +The booting process starts with a network setup that prompts you for +several network parameters. If the setup is successful, you will login +to the system by starting a ssh session which will launch the +standard installation system. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="s390"><title>s390 Boot Parameters</title> +<para> + +On S/390 you can append boot parameters in the parm file. This file can +either be in ASCII or EBCDIC format. Please read +<ulink url="&url-s390-devices;">Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink> +for more information about S/390-specific boot parameters. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/sparc.xml b/en/boot-installer/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22295dac4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; + +<para> + +On machines with OpenBoot, simply enter the boot monitor on the +machine which is being installed (see +<xref linkend="invoking-openboot"/>). +Use the command <userinput>boot net</userinput> to boot from a TFTP +and RARP server, or try <userinput>boot net:bootp</userinput> or +<userinput>boot net:dhcp</userinput> to boot from a TFTP and BOOTP +or DHCP server. Some older OpenBoot revisions require using +the device name, such as <userinput>boot le()</userinput>; these +probably don't support BOOTP nor DHCP. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> + +&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; + +<para> + +Most OpenBoot versions support the <userinput>boot cdrom</userinput> +command which is simply an alias to boot from the SCSI device on ID 6 +(or the secondary master for IDE based systems). You may have to use +the actual device name for older OpenBoot versions that don't support +this special command. Note that some problems have been reported on Sun4m +(e.g., Sparc 10s and Sparc 20s) systems booting from CD-ROM. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> + <title>Booting from Floppies</title> +<para> + +To boot from floppy on a Sparc, use + +<informalexample><screen> +Stop-A -> OpenBoot: "boot floppy" +</screen></informalexample> + +Be warned that the newer Sun4u (ultra) architecture does not support +floppy booting. A typical error message is <computeroutput>Bad magic +number in disk label - Can't open disk label package</computeroutput>. +Furthermore, a number of Sun4c models (such as the IPX) do not support +the compressed images found on the disks, so also are not supported. + +</para><para> + +Several Sparcs (e.g. Ultra 10) have an OBP bug that prevents them from +booting (instead of not supporting booting at all). The appropriate +OBP update can be downloaded as product ID 106121 from +<ulink url="http://sunsolve.sun.com"></ulink>. + +</para><para> + +If you are booting from the floppy, and you see messages such as + +<informalexample><screen> +Fatal error: Cannot read partition +Illegal or malformed device name +</screen></informalexample> + +then it is possible that floppy booting is simply not supported on +your machine. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>IDPROM Messages</title> +<para> + +If you cannot boot because you get messages about a problem with +<quote>IDPROM</quote>, then it's possible that your NVRAM battery, which +holds configuration information for you firmware, has run out. See the +<ulink url="&url-sun-nvram-faq;">Sun NVRAM FAQ</ulink> for more +information. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-installer/trouble.xml b/en/boot-installer/trouble.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0553914b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-installer/trouble.xml @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="boot-troubleshooting"> + <title>Troubleshooting the Installation Process</title> +<para> +</para> + + <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="unreliable-floppies"> + <title>Floppy Disk Reliability</title> + +<para> + +The biggest problem for people using floppy disks to install Debian +seems to be floppy disk reliability. + +</para><para> + +The boot floppy is the floppy with the worst problems, because it +is read by the hardware directly, before Linux boots. Often, the +hardware doesn't read as reliably as the Linux floppy disk driver, and +may just stop without printing an error message if it reads incorrect +data. There can also be failures in the Driver Floppies most of which +indicate themselves with a flood of messages about disk I/O errors. + +</para><para> + +If you are having the installation stall at a particular floppy, the +first thing you should do is re-download the floppy disk image and +write it to a <emphasis>different</emphasis> floppy. Simply +reformatting the old +floppy may not be sufficient, even if it appears that the floppy was +reformatted and written with no errors. It is sometimes useful to try +writing the floppy on a different system. + +</para><para> + +One user reports he had to write the images to floppy +<emphasis>three</emphasis> times before one worked, and then +everything was fine with the third floppy. + +</para><para> + +Other users have reported that simply rebooting a few times with the +same floppy in the floppy drive can lead to a successful boot. This is +all due to buggy hardware or firmware floppy drivers. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Boot Configuration</title> + +<para> + +If you have problems and the kernel hangs during the boot process, +doesn't recognize peripherals you actually have, or drives are not +recognized properly, the first thing to check is the boot parameters, +as discussed in <xref linkend="boot-parms"/>. + +</para><para> + +If you are booting with your own kernel instead of the one supplied +with the installer, be sure that <userinput>CONFIG_DEVFS</userinput> is set in +your kernel. The installer requires +<userinput>CONFIG_DEVFS</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +Often, problems can be solved by removing add-ons and peripherals, and +then trying booting again. <phrase arch="i386">Internal modems, sound +cards, and Plug-n-Play devices can be especially problematic.</phrase> + +</para><para> + +If you have a large amount of memory installed in your machine, more +than 512M, and the installer hangs when booting the kernel, you may +need to include a boot argument to limit the amount of memory the +kernel sees, such as <userinput>mem=512m</userinput>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="i386-boot-problems"> + <title>Common &arch-title; Installation Problems</title> +<para> + +There are some common installation problems that can be solved or avoided by +passing certain boot parameters to the installer. + +</para><para> + +Some systems have floppies with <quote>inverted DCLs</quote>. If you receive +errors reading from the floppy, even when you know the floppy is good, +try the parameter <userinput>floppy=thinkpad</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +On some systems, such as the IBM PS/1 or ValuePoint (which have ST-506 +disk drivers), the IDE drive may not be properly recognized. Again, +try it first without the parameters and see if the IDE drive is +recognized properly. If not, determine your drive geometry +(cylinders, heads, and sectors), and use the parameter +<userinput>hd=<replaceable>cylinders</replaceable>,<replaceable>heads</replaceable>,<replaceable>sectors</replaceable></userinput>. + +</para><para> + +If you have a very old machine, and the kernel hangs after saying +<computeroutput>Checking 'hlt' instruction...</computeroutput>, then +you should try the <userinput>no-hlt</userinput> boot argument, which +disables this test. + +</para><para> + +If your screen begins to show a weird picture while the kernel boots, +eg. pure white, pure black or colored pixel garbage, your system may +contain a problematic video card which does not switch to the +framebuffer mode properly. Then you can use the boot parameter +<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput> or +<userinput>video=vga16:off</userinput> to disable the framebuffer +console. Only the English +language will be available during the installation due to limited +console features. See <xref linkend="boot-parms"/> for details. + +</para> + + <sect3> + <title>System Freeze During the PCMCIA Configuration Phase</title> +<para> + +Some laptop models produced by Dell are known to crash when PCMCIA device +detection tries to access some hardware addresses. Other laptops may display +similar problems. If you experience such a problem and you don't need PCMCIA +support during the installation, you can disable PCMCIA using the +<userinput>hw-detect/start_pcmcia=false</userinput> boot parameter. You can +then configure PCMCIA after the installation is completed and exclude the +resource range causing the problems. + +</para><para> + +Alternatively, you can boot the installer in expert mode. You will +then be asked to enter the resource range options your hardware +needs. For example, if you have one of the Dell laptops mentioned +above, you should enter <userinput>exclude port +0x800-0x8ff</userinput> here. There is also a list of some common +resource range options in the <ulink +url="http://pcmcia-cs.sourceforge.net/ftp/doc/PCMCIA-HOWTO-1.html#ss1.12">System +resource settings section of the PCMCIA HOWTO</ulink>. Note that you +have to omit the commas, if any, when you enter this value in the +installer. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title>System Freeze while Loading the USB Modules</title> +<para> + +The kernel normally tries to install USB modules and the USB keyboard driver +in order to support some non-standard USB keyboards. However, there are some +broken USB systems where the driver hangs on loading. A possible workaround +may be disabling the USB controller in your mainboard BIOS setup. Another option +is passing the <userinput>debian-installer/probe/usb=false</userinput> parameter +at the boot prompt, which will prevent the modules from being loaded. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="kernel-msgs"> + <title>Interpreting the Kernel Startup Messages</title> + +<para> + +During the boot sequence, you may see many messages in the form +<computeroutput>can't find <replaceable>something</replaceable> +</computeroutput>, or <computeroutput> +<replaceable>something</replaceable> not present</computeroutput>, +<computeroutput>can't initialize <replaceable>something</replaceable> +</computeroutput>, or even <computeroutput>this driver release depends +on <replaceable>something</replaceable> </computeroutput>. +Most of these messages are harmless. You +see them because the kernel for the installation system is built to +run on computers with many different peripheral devices. Obviously, no +one computer will have every possible peripheral device, so the +operating system may emit a few complaints while it looks for +peripherals you don't own. You may also see the system pause for a +while. This happens when it is waiting for a device to respond, and +that device is not present on your system. If you find the time it +takes to boot the system unacceptably long, you can create a +custom kernel later (see <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>). + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 id="problem-report"> + <title>Bug Reporter</title> +<para> + +If you get through the initial boot phase but cannot complete the +install, the bug reporter menu choice may be helpful. It copies system +error logs and configuration information to a user-supplied floppy. +This information may provide clues as to what went wrong and how to +fix it. If you are submitting a bug report you may want to attach +this information to the bug report. + +</para><para> + +Other pertinent installation messages may be found in +<filename>/var/log/</filename> during the +installation, and <filename>/var/log/debian-installer/</filename> +after the computer has been booted into the installed system. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="submit-bug"> + <title>Submitting Installation Reports</title> +<para> + +If you still have problems, please submit an installation report. We also +encourage installation reports to be sent even if the installation is +successful, so that we can get as much information as possible on the largest +number of hardware configurations. Please use this template when filling out +installation reports, and file the report as a bug report against the +<classname>installation-reports</classname> pseudo package, by sending it to +<email>submit@bugs.debian.org</email>. + +<informalexample><screen> +Package: installation-reports + +Debian-installer-version: <Fill in date and from where you got the image> +uname -a: <The result of running uname -a on a shell prompt> +Date: <Date and time of the install> +Method: <How did you install? What did you boot off? If network + install, from where? Proxied?> + +Machine: <Description of machine (eg, IBM Thinkpad R32)> +Processor: +Memory: +Root Device: <IDE? SCSI? Name of device?> +Root Size/partition table: <Feel free to paste the full partition + table, with notes on which partitions are mounted where.> +Output of lspci and lspci -n: + +Base System Installation Checklist: +[O] = OK, [E] = Error (please elaborate below), [ ] = didn't try it + +Initial boot worked: [ ] +Configure network HW: [ ] +Config network: [ ] +Detect CD: [ ] +Load installer modules: [ ] +Detect hard drives: [ ] +Partition hard drives: [ ] +Create file systems: [ ] +Mount partitions: [ ] +Install base system: [ ] +Install boot loader: [ ] +Reboot: [ ] + +Comments/Problems: + +<Description of the install, in prose, and any thoughts, comments + and ideas you had during the initial install.> +</screen></informalexample> + +In the bug report, describe what the problem is, including the last +visible kernel messages in the event of a kernel hang. Describe the +steps that you did which brought the system into the problem state. + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/boot-new/boot-new.xml b/en/boot-new/boot-new.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f045e1f3c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/boot-new.xml @@ -0,0 +1,291 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<chapter id="boot-new"> + <title>Booting Into Your New Debian System</title> + + <sect1 id="base-boot"><title>The Moment of Truth</title> +<para> + +Your system's first boot on its own power is what electrical engineers +call the <quote>smoke test</quote>. + +</para><para> + +If you are booting directly into Debian, and the system doesn't start +up, either use your original installation boot media, or insert the +custom boot floppy if you have one, and reset your system. This way, +you will probably need to add some boot arguments like +<userinput>root=<replaceable>root</replaceable></userinput>, where +<replaceable>root</replaceable> is your root partition, such as +<filename>/dev/sda1</filename>. +<phrase condition="etch"> +Alternatively, see <xref linkend="rescue"/> for instructions on using +the installer's built-in rescue mode. +</phrase> + +</para> + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>BVME 6000 Booting</title> +<para> + +If you have just performed a diskless install on a BVM or Motorola +VMEbus machine: once the system has loaded the +<command>tftplilo</command> program from the TFTP server, from the +<prompt>LILO Boot:</prompt> prompt enter one of: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<userinput>b6000</userinput> followed by &enterkey; +to boot a BVME 4000/6000 + +</para></listitem><listitem><para> + +<userinput>b162</userinput> followed by &enterkey; +to boot an MVME162 + +</para></listitem><listitem><para> + +<userinput>b167</userinput> followed by &enterkey; +to boot an MVME166/167 + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Macintosh Booting</title> + +<para> + +Go to the directory containing the installation files and start up the +<command>Penguin</command> booter, holding down the +<keycap>command</keycap> key. Go to the +<userinput>Settings</userinput> dialogue (<keycombo> +<keycap>command</keycap> <keycap>T</keycap> </keycombo>), and locate +the kernel options line which should look like +<userinput>root=/dev/ram video=font:VGA8x16</userinput> or similar. + +</para><para> + +You need to change the entry to +<userinput>root=/dev/<replaceable>yyyy</replaceable></userinput>. +Replace the <replaceable>yyyy</replaceable> with the Linux name of the +partition onto which you installed the system +(e.g. <filename>/dev/sda1</filename>); you wrote this down earlier. +The <userinput>video=font:VGA8x8</userinput> is recommended especially +for users with tiny screens. The kernel would pick a prettier (6x11) +font but the console driver for this font can hang the machine, so +using 8x16 or 8x8 is safer at this stage. You can change this at any +time. + +</para><para> + +If you don't want to start GNU/Linux immediately each time you start, +uncheck the <userinput>Auto Boot</userinput> option. Save your +settings in the <filename>Prefs</filename> file using the +<userinput>Save Settings As Default</userinput> option. + +</para><para> + +Now select <userinput>Boot Now</userinput> (<keycombo> +<keycap>command</keycap> <keycap>B</keycap> </keycombo>) to start your +freshly installed GNU/Linux instead of the RAMdisk installer system. + +</para><para> + +Debian should boot, and you should see the same messages as +when you first booted the installation system, followed by some new +messages. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>OldWorld PowerMacs</title> +<para> + +If the machine fails to boot after completing the installation, and +stops with a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt, try typing +<userinput>Linux</userinput> followed by &enterkey;. (The default boot +configuration in <filename>quik.conf</filename> is labeled Linux). The +labels defined in <filename>quik.conf</filename> will be displayed if +you press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key at the <prompt>boot:</prompt> +prompt. You can also try booting back into the installer, and editing +the <filename>/target/etc/quik.conf</filename> placed there by the +<guimenuitem>Install Quik on a Hard Disk</guimenuitem> step. Clues +for dealing with <command>quik</command> are available at +<ulink url="&url-powerpc-quik-faq;"></ulink>. + +</para><para> + +To boot back into MacOS without resetting the nvram, type +<userinput>bye</userinput> at the OpenFirmware prompt (assuming MacOS +has not been removed from the machine). To obtain an OpenFirmware +prompt, hold down the <keycombo> <keycap>command</keycap> +<keycap>option</keycap> <keycap>o</keycap> <keycap>f</keycap> +</keycombo> keys while cold booting the machine. If you need to reset +the OpenFirmware nvram changes to the MacOS default in order to boot +back to MacOS, hold down the <keycombo> <keycap>command</keycap> +<keycap>option</keycap> <keycap>p</keycap> <keycap>r</keycap> +</keycombo> keys while cold booting the machine. + +</para><para> + +If you use <command>BootX</command> to boot into the installed system, +just select your desired kernel in the <filename>Linux +Kernels</filename> folder, un-choose the ramdisk option, and add +a root device corresponding to your installation; +e.g. <userinput>/dev/hda8</userinput>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>NewWorld PowerMacs</title> +<para> + +On G4 machines and iBooks, you can hold down the +<keycap>option</keycap> key and get a graphical screen with a button +for each bootable OS, &debian; will be a button with a small penguin +icon. + +</para><para> + +If you kept MacOS and at some point it changes the OpenFirmware +<envar>boot-device</envar> variable you should reset OpenFirmware to +its default configuration. To do this hold down the <keycombo> +<keycap>command</keycap> <keycap>option</keycap> <keycap>p</keycap> +<keycap>r</keycap> </keycombo> keys while cold booting the machine. + +</para><para> + +The labels defined in <filename>yaboot.conf</filename> will be +displayed if you press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key at the +<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. + +</para><para> + +Resetting OpenFirmware on G3 or G4 hardware will cause it to boot +&debian; by default (if you correctly partitioned and placed the +Apple_Bootstrap partition first). If you have &debian; on a SCSI disk +and MacOS on an IDE disk this may not work and you will have to enter +OpenFirmware and set the <envar>boot-device</envar> variable, +<command>ybin</command> normally does this automatically. + +</para><para> + +After you boot &debian; for the first time you can add any additional +options you desire (such as dual boot options) to +<filename>/etc/yaboot.conf</filename> and run <command>ybin</command> +to update your boot partition with the changed configuration. Please +read the <ulink url="&url-powerpc-yaboot-faq;">yaboot HOWTO</ulink> +for more information. + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="base-config"> + <title>Debian Post-Boot (Base) Configuration</title> + +<para> + +After booting, you will be prompted to complete the configuration of +your basic system, and then to select what additional packages you +wish to install. The application which guides you through this +process is called <classname>base-config</classname>. Its concept is +very similar to the &d-i; from the first stage. Indeed, +<classname>base-config</classname> consists of a number of specialized +components, where each component handles one configuration task, +contains <quote>hidden menu in the background</quote> and also uses +the same navigation system. + +</para><para> + +If you wish to re-run the <classname>base-config</classname> at any +point after installation is complete, as root run +<userinput>base-config</userinput>. + +</para> + +&module-bc-timezone.xml; +&module-bc-shadow.xml; +&module-bc-ppp.xml; +&module-bc-apt.xml; +&module-bc-packages.xml; +&module-bc-install.xml; +&module-bc-mta.xml; + + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="login"> + <title>Log In</title> + +<para> + +After you've installed packages, you'll be presented with the login +prompt. Log in using the personal login and password you +selected. Your system is now ready to use. + +</para><para> + +If you are a new user, you may want to explore the documentation which +is already installed on your system as you start to use it. There are +currently several documentation systems, work is proceeding on +integrating the different types of documentation. Here are a few +starting points. + +</para><para> + +Documentation accompanying programs you have installed is in +<filename>/usr/share/doc/</filename>, under a subdirectory named after +the program. For example, the APT User's Guide for using +<command>apt</command> to install other programs on your system, is +located in +<filename>/usr/share/doc/apt/guide.html/index.html</filename>. + +</para><para> + + +In addition, there are some special folders within the +<filename>/usr/share/doc/</filename> hierarchy. Linux HOWTOs are +installed in <emphasis>.gz</emphasis> format, in +<filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/en-txt/</filename>. After installing +<command>dhelp</command> you will find a browse-able index of +documentation in <filename>/usr/share/doc/HTML/index.html</filename>. + +</para><para> + +One easy way to view these documents is to <userinput>cd +/usr/share/doc/</userinput>, and type <userinput>lynx</userinput> +followed by a space and a dot (the dot stands for the current +directory). + +</para><para> + +You can also type <userinput>info +<replaceable>command</replaceable></userinput> or <userinput>man +<replaceable>command</replaceable></userinput> to see documentation on +most commands available at the command prompt. Typing +<userinput>help</userinput> will display help on shell commands. And +typing a command followed by <userinput>--help</userinput> will +usually display a short summary of the command's usage. If a command's +results scroll past the top of the screen, type <userinput>| +more</userinput> after the command to cause the results to pause +before scrolling past the top of the screen. To see a list of all +commands available which begin with a certain letter, type the letter +and then two tabs. + +</para><para> + +For a more complete introduction to Debian and GNU/Linux, see +<filename>/usr/share/doc/debian-guide/html/noframes/index.html</filename>. + +</para> + + </sect1> +</chapter> diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/apt.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/apt.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5419d284b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/apt.xml @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 id="configure-apt"> + <title>Configuring APT</title> + +<para> + +The main means that people use to install packages on their system is +via a program called <command>apt-get</command>, from the +<classname>apt</classname> package.<footnote> + +<para> + +Note that the actual program that installs packages is called +<command>dpkg</command>. However, this package is more of a low-level +tool. <command>apt-get</command> is a higher-level tool as it will +invoke <command>dpkg</command> as appropriate and also because it knows +to install other packages which are required for the package you're +trying to install, as well as how to retrieve the package from your +CD, the network, or wherever. + +</para> +</footnote> +Other front-ends for package management, like <command>aptitude</command>, +<command>synaptic</command> and the older <command>dselect</command> also +use and depend on <command>apt-get</command>. These front-ends are recommended +for new users, since they integrate some additional features (package +searching and status checks) in a nice user interface. + +</para><para> + +APT must be configured so that it knows where to retrieve packages from. +The helper application which assists in this task is called +<command>apt-setup</command>. + +</para><para> + +The next step in your configuration process is to tell APT where other +Debian packages can be found. Note that you can re-run this tool at +any point after installation by running <command>apt-setup</command>, +or by manually editing <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename>. + +</para><para> + +If an official CD-ROM is in the drive at this point, then that CD-ROM +should automatically be configured as an apt source without prompting. +You will notice this because you will see the CD-ROM being scanned. + +</para><para> + +For users without an official CD-ROM, you will be offered an array of +choices for how Debian packages are accessed: FTP, HTTP, CD-ROM, or +a local file system. + +</para><para> + +You should know that it's perfectly acceptable to have a number of +different APT sources, even for the same Debian archive. +<command>apt-get</command> will automatically pick the package with +the highest version number given all the available versions. Or, for +instance, if you have both an HTTP and a CD-ROM APT source, +<command>apt-get</command> should automatically use the local CD-ROM +when possible, and only resort to HTTP if a newer version is available +there. However, it is not a good idea to add unnecessary APT sources, +since this will tend to slow down the process of checking the network +archives for new versions. + +</para> + + <sect3 id="configure-apt-net"> + <title>Configuring Network Package Sources</title> + +<para> + +If you plan on installing the rest of your system via the network, the +most common option is to select the <userinput>http</userinput> +source. The <userinput>ftp</userinput> source is also acceptable, but +tends to be somewhat slower making connections. + +</para><para> + +The next step during the configuration of network package sources is +to tell <command>apt-setup</command> which country you live in. This +configures which of the official Debian Internet mirrors you will +connect to. Depending on which country you select, you will be presented +with a list of possible servers. It's generally fine to pick the one at +the top of the list, but any of them should work. Note however that the +mirror list provided by the installation was generated when this version +of Debian was released and some mirrors may no longer be available. + +</para><para> + +After you have selected a mirror, you will be asked if a proxy server +should be used. A proxy server is a server that will forward all your +HTTP and/or FTP requests to the Internet and is most often used to regulate +and optimize access to the Internet on corporate networks. In some networks +only the proxy server is allowed access to the Internet, in which case you +will have to enter the name of the proxy server. You may also have to +include an user name and password. Most home users will not need to specify +a proxy server, although some ISPs may provide proxy servers for their +users. + +</para><para> + +After you select a mirror, your new network package source will be tested. +If all goes well, you will be prompted whether you want to add another +package source. If you have any problems using the package source you selected, +try using a different mirror (either from your country list or from the +global list), or try using a different network package source. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/install.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30f9a81d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 id="debconf"> + <title>Prompts During Software Installation</title> + +<para> + +Each package you selected with <command>tasksel</command> or +<command>aptitude</command> is +downloaded, unpacked and then installed in turn by the +<command>apt-get</command> and <command>dpkg</command> programs. If +a particular program needs more information from the user, it will +prompt you during this process. You might also want to keep an eye on +the output during the process, to watch for any installation errors +(although you will be asked to acknowledge errors which prevented +a package's installation). + +</para> + + <sect3 arch="powerpc" id="xserver"> + <title>Settings for the X Server</title> + +<para> + +On iMacs, and some older Macintoshes as well, the X Server software +doesn't calculate appropriate video settings. You will need to choose +the <guimenuitem>Advanced</guimenuitem> option during configuration of the +video settings. For the monitor's horizontal sync range, enter 59–63. +You can leave the default for vertical refresh range. + +</para><para> + +The mouse device should be set to +<userinput>/dev/input/mice</userinput>. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/mta.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/mta.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c9ba2f28 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/mta.xml @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 id="base-config-mta"> + <title>Configuring Your Mail Transport Agent</title> + +<para> + +Today, email is a very important part of many people's life, so it's +no surprise Debian lets you configure your mail system right as a part +of the installation process. The standard mail transport agent in +Debian is <command>exim4</command>, which is relatively small, +flexible, and easy to learn. + +</para><para> + +You may ask if this is needed even if your computer is not connected +to any network. The short answer is: Yes. The longer explanation: Some +system utilities (like <command>cron</command>, +<command>quota</command>, <command>aide</command>, …) may send +you important notices via email. + +</para><para> + +So on the first screen you will be presented with several common mail +scenarios. Choose the one that most closely resembles your needs: + +</para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term>internet site</term> +<listitem><para> + +Your system is connected to a network and your mail is sent and +received directly using SMTP. On the following screens you will be +asked a few basic questions, like your machine's mail name, or a list of +domains for which you accept or relay mail. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>mail sent by smarthost</term> +<listitem><para> + +In this scenario is your outgoing mail forwarded to another machine, +called a <quote>smarthost</quote>, which does the actual job for +you. Smarthost also usually stores incoming mail addressed to your +computer, so you don't need to be permanently online. That also means +you have to download your mail from the smarthost via programs like +fetchmail. This option is suitable for dial-up users. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>local delivery only</term> +<listitem><para> + +Your system is not on a network and mail is sent or received only +between local users. Even if you don't plan to send any messages, this +option is highly recommended, because some system utilities may send +you various alerts from time to time (e.g. beloved <quote>Disk quota +exceeded</quote>). This option is also convenient for new users, +because it doesn't ask any further questions. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>no configuration at this time</term> +<listitem><para> + +Choose this if you are absolutely convinced you know what you are +doing. This will leave you with an unconfigured mail system — +until you configure it, you won't be able to send or receive any mail +and you may miss some important messages from your system utilities. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +<para> + +If none of these scenarios suits your needs, or if you need a finer +setup, you will need to edit configuration files under the +<filename>/etc/exim4</filename> directory after the installation is +complete. More information about <command>exim4</command> may be found +under <filename>/usr/share/doc/exim4</filename>. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/packages.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/packages.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1a4ce454 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/packages.xml @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 id="install-packages"> + <title>Package Installation</title> + +<para> + +Next you will be offered a number of pre-rolled software +configurations offered by Debian. You could always choose, package by +package, what you want to install on your new machine. This is the +purpose of the <command>aptitude</command> program, described below. +But this can be a long task with around &num-of-distrib-pkgs; packages +available in Debian! + +</para><para> + +So, you have the ability to choose <emphasis>tasks</emphasis> first, +and then add on more individual packages later. These tasks loosely +represent a number of different jobs or things you want to do with +your computer, such as <quote>desktop environment</quote>, +<quote>web server</quote>, or <quote>print server</quote><footnote> + +<para> + +You should know that to present this list, +<command>base-config</command> is merely invoking the +<command>tasksel</command> program. For manual package +selection, the +<command>aptitude</command> program is being run. Any of these can be +run at any time after installation to install (or remove) more +packages. If you are looking for a specific single package, after +installation is complete, simply run <userinput>aptitude install +<replaceable>package</replaceable></userinput>, where +<replaceable>package</replaceable> is the name of the package you are +looking for. + +</para> + +</footnote>. <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/> lists the space +requirements for the available tasks. + +</para><para> + +Once you've selected your tasks, select +<guibutton>Ok</guibutton>. At this point, +<command>aptitude</command> will install the packages you've +selected. + +<note><para> + +Even if you did not select any tasks at all, any standard, +important, or required priority packages that are not yet present on +your system will be installed. This functionality is the same as +running <userinput>tasksel -ris</userinput> at the command line, and +currently involves +a download of about 37M of archives. You will be shown the number of +packages to be installed, and how many kilobytes of packages, if any, +need to be downloaded. + +</para></note> + +</para><para> + +If you do want to choose what to install on a package by package basis, +select the <quote>manual package selection</quote> option in +<command>tasksel</command>. If you select one or more tasks alongside +this option, <command>aptitude</command> will be called with the +<command>--visual-preview</command> option. This means you will be able to review<footnote> + +<para> + +You can also change the default selections. If you would like to select any +additional package, use <menuchoice> <guimenu>View</guimenu> +<guimenuitem>New Package View</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + +</para> + +</footnote> the packages that are to be installed. If you do not select any +tasks, the normal <command>aptitude</command> screen will be displayed. After +making your selections you should press <quote><userinput>g</userinput></quote> +to start the download and installation of packages. + +<note><para> + +If you choose <quote>manual package selection</quote> +<emphasis>without</emphasis> selecting any tasks, no packages will be installed +by default. This means you can use this option if you want to install a minimal +system, but also that the responsibility for selecting any packages not +installed as part of the base system (before the reboot) that might be required +for your system lies with you. + +</para></note> + +</para><para> + +Of the &num-of-distrib-pkgs; packages available in Debian, only +a small minority are covered by tasks offered in the Task Installer. +To see information on more packages, either use <userinput>apt-cache +search <replaceable>search-string</replaceable></userinput> for some +given search string (see the <citerefentry> +<refentrytitle>apt-cache</refentrytitle> <manvolnum>8</manvolnum> +</citerefentry> man page), or run +<command>aptitude</command> as described below. + +</para> + + <sect3 id="aptitude"> + <title>Advanced Package Selection with <command>aptitude</command></title> + +<para> + +<command>Aptitude</command> is a modern program for managing +packages. <command>aptitude</command> allows you to +select individual packages, set of packages matching given criteria +(for advanced users), or whole tasks. + +</para><para> + +The most basic keybindings are: + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>Key</entry><entry>Action</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry><keycap>Up</keycap>, <keycap>Down</keycap></entry> + <entry>Move selection up or down.</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>&enterkey;</entry> + <entry>Open/collapse/activate item.</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><keycap>+</keycap></entry> + <entry>Mark package for installation.</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><keycap>-</keycap></entry> + <entry>Mark package for removal.</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><keycap>d</keycap></entry> + <entry>Show package dependencies.</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><keycap>g</keycap></entry> + <entry>Actually download/install/remove packages.</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><keycap>q</keycap></entry> + <entry>Quit current view.</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><keycap>F10</keycap></entry> + <entry>Activate menu.</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +For more commands see the online help under the <keycap>?</keycap> key. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/ppp.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/ppp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd805fa28 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/ppp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="not-s390" id="PPP"> + <title>Setting Up PPP</title> + +<para> + +If no network was configured during the first stage of the installation, +you will next be asked whether you wish to install the rest of the system +using PPP. PPP is a protocol used to establish dialup connections with modems. +If you configure the modem at this point, the installation system will be able +to download additional packages or security updates from the Internet during +the next steps of the installation. +If you don't have a modem in your computer or if you prefer to configure +your modem after the installation, you can skip this step. + +</para><para> + +In order to configure your PPP connection, you will need some information +from your Internet Service Provider (ISP), including phone number, username, +password and DNS servers (optional). Some ISPs provide installation guidelines +for Linux distributions. You can use that information even if they don't +specifically target Debian since most of the configuration parameters +(and software) is similar amongst Linux distributions. + +</para><para> + +If you do choose to configure PPP at this point, a program named +<command>pppconfig</command> will be run. This program helps you +configure your PPP connection. <emphasis>Make sure, when it asks you +for the name of your dialup connection, that you name it +<userinput>provider</userinput>.</emphasis> + +</para><para> + +Hopefully, the <command>pppconfig</command> program will walk you +through a trouble-free PPP connection setup. However, if it does not +work for you, see below for detailed instructions. + +</para><para> + +In order to setup PPP, you'll need to know the basics of file viewing +and editing in GNU/Linux. To view files, you should use +<command>more</command>, and <command>zmore</command> for compressed +files with a <userinput>.gz</userinput> extension. For example, to +view <filename>README.debian.gz</filename>, type <userinput>zmore +README.debian.gz</userinput>. The base system comes with an editor +named <command>nano</command>, which is very simple to use, but does +not have a lot of features. You will probably want to install more +full-featured editors and viewers later, such as +<command>jed</command>, <command>nvi</command>, +<command>less</command>, and <command>emacs</command>. + +</para><para> + +Edit <filename>/etc/ppp/peers/provider</filename> and replace +<userinput>/dev/modem</userinput> with +<userinput>/dev/ttyS<replaceable>#</replaceable></userinput> where +<replaceable>#</replaceable> stands for the number of your serial +port. In Linux, serial ports are counted from 0; your first serial +port <phrase arch="i386">(i.e., <userinput>COM1</userinput>)</phrase> +is <filename>/dev/ttyS0</filename> under Linux. + +<phrase arch="powerpc;m68k">On Macintoshes with serial ports, the +modem port is <filename>/dev/ttyS0</filename> and the printer port is +<filename>/dev/ttyS1</filename>.</phrase> + +The next step is to edit +<filename>/etc/chatscripts/provider</filename> and insert your +provider's phone number, your user-name and password. Please do not +delete the <quote>\q</quote> that precedes the password. It hides the +password from appearing in your log files. + +</para><para> + +Many providers use PAP or CHAP for login sequence instead of text mode +authentication. Others use both. If your provider requires PAP or +CHAP, you'll need to follow a different procedure. Comment out +everything below the dialing string (the one that starts with +<quote>ATDT</quote>) in +<filename>/etc/chatscripts/provider</filename>, modify +<filename>/etc/ppp/peers/provider</filename> as described above, and +add <userinput>user <replaceable>name</replaceable></userinput> where +<replaceable>name</replaceable> stands for your user-name for the +provider you are trying to connect to. Next, edit +<filename>/etc/ppp/pap-secrets</filename> or +<filename>/etc/ppp/chap-secrets</filename> and enter your password +there. + +</para><para> + +You will also need to edit <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename> and +add your provider's name server (DNS) IP addresses. The lines in +<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename> are in the following format: +<userinput>nameserver +<replaceable>xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</replaceable></userinput> where the +<replaceable>x</replaceable>s stand for numbers in your IP +address. Optionally, you could add the +<userinput>usepeerdns</userinput> option to the +<filename>/etc/ppp/peers/provider</filename> file, which will enable +automatic choosing of appropriate DNS servers, using settings the +remote host usually provides. + +</para><para> + +Unless your provider has a login sequence different from the majority +of ISPs, you are done! Start the PPP connection by typing +<command>pon</command> as root, and monitor the process using +<command>plog</command> command. To disconnect, use +<command>poff</command>, again, as root. + +</para><para> + +Read <filename>/usr/share/doc/ppp/README.Debian.gz</filename> file for +more information on using PPP on Debian. + +</para><para> + +For static SLIP connections, you will need to add the +<userinput>slattach</userinput> command (from the +<classname>net-tools</classname> package) into +<filename>/etc/init.d/network</filename>. Dynamic SLIP will require +the <classname>gnudip</classname> package. + +</para> + + <sect3 id="PPPOE"> + <title>Setting Up PPP over Ethernet (PPPOE)</title> + +<para> + +PPPOE is a protocol related to PPP used for some broadband connections. +There is currently no support in base configuration to help you set +this up. However, the necessary software has been installed, which means +you can configure PPPOE manually at this stage of the installation by +switching to VT2 and running <command>pppoeconf</command>. + +</para> + + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/shadow.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/shadow.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cfcc4daa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/shadow.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 id="base-config-users"> + <title>Setting Up Users And Passwords</title> + + <sect3 id="base-config-root"> + <title>Set the Root Password</title> + +<para> + +The <emphasis>root</emphasis> account is also called the +<emphasis>super-user</emphasis>; it is a login that bypasses all +security protection on your system. The root account should only be +used to perform system administration, and only used for as short +a time as possible. + +</para><para> + +Any password you create should contain at least 6 characters, and +should contain both upper- and lower-case characters, as well as +punctuation characters. Take extra care when setting your root +password, since it is such a powerful account. Avoid dictionary +words or use of any personal information which could be guessed. + +</para><para> + +If anyone ever tells you they need your root password, be extremely +wary. You should normally never give your root password out, unless you +are administering a machine with more than one system administrator. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="make-normal-user"> + <title>Create an Ordinary User</title> + +<para> + +The system will ask you whether you wish to create an ordinary user +account at this point. This account should be your main personal +log-in. You should <emphasis>not</emphasis> use the root account for +daily use or as your personal login. + +</para><para> + +Why not? Well, one reason to avoid using root's privileges is that it +is very easy to do irreparable damage as root. Another reason is that +you might be tricked into running a <emphasis>Trojan-horse</emphasis> +program — that is a program that takes advantage of your +super-user powers to compromise the security of your system behind +your back. Any good book on Unix system administration will cover this +topic in more detail — consider reading one if it is new to you. + +</para><para> + +You will first be prompted for the user's full name. Then you'll be asked +for a name for the user account; generally your first name or something +similar will suffice and indeed will be the default. Finally, you will be +prompted for a password for this account. + +</para><para> + +If at any point after installation you would like to create another +account, use the <command>adduser</command> command. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/boot-new/modules/timezone.xml b/en/boot-new/modules/timezone.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30d9dce0a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/boot-new/modules/timezone.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 id="base-config-tz"> + <title>Configuring Your Time Zone</title> + +<para> + +After a welcome screen, you will be prompted to configure your time zone. +First select whether the hardware clock of your system is set to local +time or Greenwich Mean Time (GMT or UTC). The time displayed in the dialog +may help you decide on the correct option. +<phrase arch="m68k;powerpc">Macintosh hardware clocks are normally +set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of +GMT.</phrase> +<phrase arch="i386">Systems that (also) run Dos or Windows are normally +set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of +GMT.</phrase> + +</para><para> + +Depending on the location selected at the beginning of the installation +process, you will next be shown either a single timezone or a list of +timezones relevant for that location. If a single timezone is shown, choose +<guibutton>Yes</guibutton> to confirm or choose <guibutton>No</guibutton> +to select from the full list of timezones. If a list is shown, select your +timezone from the list, or select Other for the full list. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/hardware/hardware-supported.xml b/en/hardware/hardware-supported.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd9712a3a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/hardware-supported.xml @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="hardware-supported"> + <title>Supported Hardware</title> + +<para> + +Debian does not impose hardware requirements beyond the requirements +of the Linux kernel and the GNU tool-sets. Therefore, any +architecture or platform to which the Linux kernel, libc, +<command>gcc</command>, etc. have been ported, and for which a Debian +port exists, can run Debian. Please refer to the Ports pages at +<ulink url="&url-ports;"></ulink> for +more details on &arch-title; architecture systems which have been +tested with Debian. + +</para><para> + +Rather than attempting to describe all the different hardware +configurations which are supported for &arch-title;, this section +contains general information and pointers to where additional +information can be found. + +</para> + + <sect2><title>Supported Architectures</title> + +<para> + +Debian &release; supports eleven major architectures and several +variations of each architecture known as <quote>flavors</quote>. + +</para><para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="4"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>Architecture</entry><entry>Debian Designation</entry> + <entry>Subarchitecture</entry><entry>Flavor</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry morerows="2">Intel x86-based</entry> + <entry morerows="2">i386</entry> + <entry morerows="2"></entry> + <entry>vanilla</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>speakup</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>linux26</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="5">Motorola 680x0</entry> + <entry morerows="5">m68k</entry> + <entry>Atari</entry> + <entry>atari</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Amiga</entry> + <entry>amiga</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>68k Macintosh</entry> + <entry>mac</entry> +</row><row> + <entry morerows="2">VME</entry> + <entry>bvme6000</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>mvme147</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>mvme16x</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>DEC Alpha</entry> + <entry>alpha</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry></entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1">Sun SPARC</entry> + <entry morerows="1">sparc</entry> + <entry morerows="1"></entry> + <entry>sun4cdm</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>sun4u</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3">ARM and StrongARM</entry> + <entry morerows="3">arm</entry> + <entry morerows="3"></entry> + <entry>netwinder</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>riscpc</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>shark</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>lart</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3">IBM/Motorola PowerPC</entry> + <entry morerows="3">powerpc</entry> + <entry>CHRP</entry> + <entry>chrp</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PowerMac</entry> + <entry>pmac</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PReP</entry> + <entry>prep</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>APUS</entry> + <entry>apus</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1">HP PA-RISC</entry> + <entry morerows="1">hppa</entry> + <entry>PA-RISC 1.1</entry> + <entry>32</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PA-RISC 2.0</entry> + <entry>64</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>Intel ia64-based</entry> + <entry>ia64</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry></entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="2">MIPS (big endian)</entry> + <entry morerows="2">mips</entry> + <entry morerows="1">SGI Indy/Indigo 2</entry> + <entry>r4k-ip22</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>r5k-ip22</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM)</entry> + <entry>sb1-swarm-bn</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3">MIPS (little endian)</entry> + <entry morerows="3">mipsel</entry> + <entry>Cobalt</entry> + <entry>cobalt</entry> +</row><row> + <entry morerows="1">DECstation</entry> + <entry>r4k-kn04</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM)</entry> + <entry>sb1-swarm-bn</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1">IBM S/390</entry> + <entry morerows="1">s390</entry> + <entry>IPL from VM-reader and DASD</entry> + <entry>generic</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>IPL from tape</entry> + <entry>tape</entry> +</row> + +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +</para><para> + +This document covers installation for the +<emphasis>&arch-title;</emphasis> architecture. If you are looking +for information on any of the other Debian-supported architectures +take a look at the +<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/ports/">Debian-Ports</ulink> pages. + +</para><para condition="new-arch"> + +This is the first official release of &debian; for the &arch-title; +architecture. We feel that it has proven itself sufficiently to be +released. However, because it has not had the exposure (and hence +testing by users) that some other architectures have had, you may +encounter a few bugs. Use our +<ulink url="&url-bts;">Bug Tracking System</ulink> to report any +problems; make sure to mention the fact that the bug is on the +&arch-title; platform. It can be necessary to use the +<ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;">debian-&architecture; mailing list</ulink> +as well. + +</para> + + </sect2> + +<!-- supported cpu docs --> +&supported-alpha.xml; +&supported-arm.xml; +&supported-hppa.xml; +&supported-i386.xml; +&supported-ia64.xml; <!-- FIXME: currently missing --> +&supported-m68k.xml; +&supported-mips.xml; +&supported-mipsel.xml; +&supported-powerpc.xml; +&supported-s390.xml; +&supported-sparc.xml; + + <sect2 id="gfx" arch="not-s390"><title>Graphics Card</title> + +<para arch="i386"> + +You should be using a VGA-compatible display interface for the console +terminal. Nearly every modern display card is compatible with +VGA. Ancient standards such CGA, MDA, or HGA should also work, +assuming you do not require X11 support. Note that X11 is not used +during the installation process described in this document. + +</para><para> + +Debian's support for graphical interfaces is determined by the +underlying support found in XFree86's X11 system. Most AGP, PCI and +PCIe video cards work under XFree86. Details on supported graphics +buses, cards, monitors, and pointing devices can be found at +<ulink url="&url-xfree86;"></ulink>. Debian &release; ships +with XFree86 version &x11ver;. + +</para><para arch="mips"> + +The XFree86 X11 window system is only supported on the SGI Indy. The +Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board has standard 3.3v PCI slots and supports +VGA emulation or Linux framebuffer on a selected range of graphics cards. +A <ulink url="&url-bcm91250a-hardware;">compatibility listing</ulink> for +the BCM91250A is available. + +</para><para arch="mipsel"> + +The XFree86 X11 window system is supported on some DECstation models. The +Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board has standard 3.3v PCI slots and supports +VGA emulation or Linux framebuffer on a selected range of graphics cards. +A <ulink url="&url-bcm91250a-hardware;">compatibility listing</ulink> for +the BCM91250A is available. + +</para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="laptops"><title>Laptops</title> +<para> + +Laptops are also supported. Laptops are often specialized or contain +proprietary hardware. To see if your particular laptop works well +with GNU/Linux, see the +<ulink url="&url-x86-laptop;">Linux Laptop pages</ulink> + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 condition="defaults-smp"> +<title>Multiple Processors</title> + +<para> + +Multi-processor support — also called <quote>symmetric multi-processing</quote> +or SMP — is supported for this architecture. The standard Debian +&release; kernel image was compiled with SMP support. This should not +prevent installation, since the SMP kernel should boot on non-SMP systems; +the kernel will simply cause a bit more overhead. + +</para><para> + +In order to optimize the kernel for single CPU systems, you'll have to +replace the standard Debian kernel. You can find a discussion of how +to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this time +(kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you disable SMP is to deselect +<quote>&smp-config-option;</quote> in the <quote>&smp-config-section;</quote> +section of the kernel config. + +</para> + + </sect2> + + + <sect2 condition="supports-smp"> + <title>Multiple Processors</title> +<para> + +Multi-processor support — also called <quote>symmetric +multi-processing</quote> or SMP — is supported for this architecture. +However, the standard Debian &release; kernel image does not support +SMP. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, +non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use +the first CPU. + +</para><para> + +In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you'll have to +replace the standard Debian kernel. You can find a discussion of how +to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this time +(kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select +<quote>&smp-config-option;</quote> in the <quote>&smp-config-section;</quote> +section of the kernel config. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="supports-smp-sometimes"> + <title>Multiple Processors</title> +<para> + +Multi-processor support — also called <quote>symmetric +multi-processing</quote> or SMP — is supported for this architecture, +and is supported by a precompiled Debian kernel image. Depending on your +install media, this SMP-capable kernel may or may not be installed by +default. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, +non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use +the first CPU. + +</para><para> + +In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you should check to see +if a kernel package that supports SMP is installed, and if not, choose an +appropriate kernel package. + +You can also build your own customized kernel to support SMP. You can find +a discussion of how to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this +time (kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select +<quote>&smp-config-option;</quote> in the <quote>&smp-config-section;</quote> +section of the kernel config. + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/hardware/hardware.xml b/en/hardware/hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a953e04d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<chapter id="hardware-req"> + <title>System Requirements</title> + +<para> + +This section contains information about what hardware you need to get +started with Debian. You will also find links to further information +about hardware supported by GNU and Linux. + +</para> + +&hardware-supported.xml; +&installation-media.xml; +&supported-peripherals.xml; +&memory-disk-requirements.xml; +&network-cards.xml; + +</chapter> diff --git a/en/hardware/installation-media.xml b/en/hardware/installation-media.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f9344ec5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/installation-media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,311 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="installation-media"> + <title>Installation Media</title> + +<para> + +This section will help you determine which different media types you can use to +install Debian. For example, if you have a floppy disk drive on your machine, +it can be used to install Debian. There is a whole chapter devoted media, +<xref linkend="install-methods"/>, which lists the advantages and +disadvantages of each media type. You may want to refer back to this page once +you reach that section. + +</para> + + <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot"><title>Floppies</title> +<para> + +In some cases, you'll have to do your first boot from floppy disks. +Generally, all you will need is a +high-density (1440 kilobytes) 3.5 inch floppy drive. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +For CHRP, floppy support is currently broken. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>CD-ROM/DVD-ROM</title> + +<note><para> + +Whenever you see <quote>CD-ROM</quote> in this manual, it applies to both +CD-ROMs and DVD-ROMs, because both technologies are really +the same from the operating system's point of view, except for some very +old nonstandard CD-ROM drives which are neither SCSI nor IDE/ATAPI. + +</para></note><para> + +CD-ROM based installation is supported for some architectures. +On machines which support bootable CD-ROMs, you should be able to do a +completely +<phrase arch="not-s390">floppy-less</phrase> +<phrase arch="s390">tape-less</phrase> +installation. Even if your system doesn't +support booting from a CD-ROM, you can use the CD-ROM in conjunction +with the other techniques to install your system, once you've booted +up by other means; see <xref linkend="boot-installer"/>. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +Both SCSI and IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported. In addition, all +non-standard CD interfaces supported by Linux are supported by the +boot disks (such as Mitsumi and Matsushita drives). However, these +models might require special boot parameters or other massaging to get +them to work, and booting off these non-standard interfaces is +unlikely. The <ulink url="&url-cd-howto;">Linux CD-ROM HOWTO</ulink> +contains in-depth information on using CD-ROMs with Linux. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +USB CD-ROM drives are also supported, as are FireWire devices that +are supported by the ohci1394 and sbp2 drivers. + +</para><para arch="alpha"> + +Both SCSI and IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on &arch-title;, as long +as the controller is supported by the SRM console. This rules out many +add-on controller cards, but most integrated IDE and SCSI chips and +controller cards that were provided by the manufacturer can be expected +to work. To find out whether your device is supported from the SRM +console, see the <ulink url="&url-srm-howto;">SRM HOWTO</ulink>. + +</para><para arch="arm"> + +IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on all ARM machines. +On RiscPCs, SCSI CD-ROMs are also supported. + +</para><para arch="mips"> + +On SGI machines, booting from CD-ROM requires a SCSI CD-ROM drive +capable of working with a logical blocksize of 512 bytes. Many of the +SCSI CD-DROM drives sold for the PC market do not have this +capability. If your CD-ROM drive has a jumper labeled +<quote>Unix/PC</quote> or <quote>512/2048</quote>, place it in the +<quote>Unix</quote> or <quote>512</quote> position. +To start the install, simply choose the <quote>System installation</quote> +entry in the firmware. The Broadcom BCM91250A supports standard IDE devices, +including CD-ROM drives, but CD images for this platform are currently not +provided because the firmware doesn't recognize CD drives. + +</para><para arch="mipsel"> + +On DECstations, booting from CD-ROM requires a SCSI CD-ROM drive +capable of working with a logical blocksize of 512 bytes. Many of the +SCSI CD-DROM drives sold for the PC market do not have this capability. +If your CD-ROM drive has a jumper labeled <quote>Unix/PC</quote> or +<quote>512/2048</quote>, place it in the <quote>Unix</quote> or +<quote>512</quote> position. + +</para><para arch="mipsel"> + +CD 1 contains the installer for the r3k-kn02 subarchitecture +(the R3000-based DECstations 5000/1xx and 5000/240 as well as +the R3000-based Personal DECstation models), CD 2 the +installer for the r4k-kn04 subarchitecture (the R4x00-based +DECstations 5000/150 and 5000/260 as well as the Personal DECstation +5000/50). + +</para><para arch="mipsel"> + +To boot from CD, issue the command <userinput>boot +<replaceable>#</replaceable>/rz<replaceable>id</replaceable></userinput> +on the firmware prompt, where <replaceable>#</replaceable> is the +number of the TurboChannel device from which to boot (3 on most +DECstations) and <replaceable>id</replaceable> is the SCSI ID of the +CD-ROM drive. If you need to pass additional parameters, they can +optionally be appended with the following syntax: + +</para><para arch="mipsel"> + +<userinput>boot +<replaceable>#</replaceable>/rz<replaceable>id</replaceable> +param1=value1 param2=value2 ...</userinput> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Hard Disk</title> + +<para> + +Booting the installation system directly from a hard disk is another option +for many architectures. This will require some other operating system +to load the installer onto the hard disk. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +In fact, installation from your local disk is the preferred +installation technique for most &architecture; machines. + +</para><para arch="sparc"> + +Although the &arch-title; does not allow booting from SunOS +(Solaris), you can install from a SunOS partition (UFS slices). + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="bootable-usb"><title>USB Memory Stick</title> + +<para> + +Many Debian boxes need their floppy and/or CD-ROM drives only for +setting up the system and for rescue purposes. If you operate some +servers, you will probably already have thought about omitting those +drives and using an USB memory stick for installing and (when +necessary) for recovering the system. This is also useful for small +systems which have no room for unnecessary drives. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Network</title> + +<para condition="supports-tftp"> + +You can also <emphasis>boot</emphasis> your system over the network. +<phrase arch="mips">This is the preferred installation technique for +Mips.</phrase> + +</para><para condition="supports-nfsroot"> + +Diskless installation, using network booting from a local area network +and NFS-mounting of all local filesystems, is another option. + +</para><para> + +After the operating system kernel is installed, you can install the +rest of your system via any sort of network connection (including +PPP after installation of the base system), via FTP or HTTP. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Un*x or GNU system</title> + +<para> + +If you are running another Unix-like system, you could use it to install +&debian; without using the &d-i; described in the rest of the +manual. This kind of install may be useful for users with otherwise +unsupported hardware or on hosts which can't afford downtime. If you +are interested in this technique, skip to the <xref +linkend="linux-upgrade"/>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Supported Storage Systems</title> + +<para> + +The Debian boot disks contain a kernel which is built to maximize the +number of systems it runs on. Unfortunately, this makes for a larger +kernel, which includes many drivers that won't be used for your +machine (see <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/> to learn how to +build your own kernel). Support for the widest possible range of +devices is desirable in general, to ensure that Debian can be +installed on the widest array of hardware. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +Generally, the Debian installation system includes support for floppies, +IDE drives, IDE floppies, parallel port IDE devices, SCSI controllers and +drives, USB, and FireWire. The file systems supported include FAT, +Win-32 FAT extensions (VFAT), and NTFS, among others. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +The disk interfaces that emulate the <quote>AT</quote> hard disk interface +which are often called MFM, RLL, IDE, or ATA are supported. Very old 8 bit +hard disk controllers used in the IBM XT computer are supported only +as a module. SCSI disk controllers from many different manufacturers +are supported. See the +<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink> +for more details. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +Pretty much all storage systems supported by the Linux kernel are +supported by the Debian installation system. Note that the current +Linux kernel does not support floppies on the Macintosh at all, and +the Debian installation system doesn't support floppies for Amigas. +Also supported on the Atari is the Macintosh HFS system, and AFFS as a +module. Macs support the Atari (FAT) file system. Amigas support the +FAT file system, and HFS as a module. + +</para><para arch="sparc"> + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. The following SCSI drivers are supported in the default +kernel: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Sparc ESP + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +PTI Qlogic,ISP + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Adaptec AIC7xxx + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +NCR and Symbios 53C8XX + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +IDE systems (such as the UltraSPARC 5) are also supported. See +<ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;">Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ</ulink> +for more information on SPARC hardware supported by the Linux kernel. + +</para><para arch="alpha"> + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. This includes both SCSI and IDE disks. Note, however, +that on many systems, the SRM console is unable to boot from IDE drives, +and the Jensen is unable to boot from floppies. (see +<ulink url="&url-jensen-howto;"></ulink> +for more information on booting the Jensen) + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support +floppies on CHRP systems at all. + +</para><para arch="hppa"> + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support +the floppy drive. + +</para><para arch="mips"> + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. + +</para><para arch="s390"> + +Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by +the boot system. This means that FBA and ECKD DASDs are supported with +the old Linux disk layout (ldl) and the new common S/390 disk layout (cdl). + +</para> + + </sect2> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml b/en/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c2428471 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="memory-disk-requirements"> + <title>Memory and Disk Space Requirements</title> + +<para> + +You must have at least &minimum-memory; of memory and &minimum-fs-size; of hard disk +space. For a minimal console-based system (all standard packages), +250MB is required. If you want to install a reasonable amount of +software, including the X Window System, and some development programs +and libraries, you'll need at least 400MB. For a more or less complete +desktop system, you'll need a few gigabytes. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +On the Amiga the size of FastRAM is relevant towards the total memory +requirements. Also, using Zorro cards with 16-bit RAM is not +supported; you'll need 32-bit RAM. The <command>amiboot</command> +program can be used to disable 16-bit RAM; see the +<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink>. Recent kernels should +disable 16-bit RAM automatically. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +On the Atari, both ST-RAM and Fast RAM (TT-RAM) are used by Linux. +Many users have reported problems running the kernel itself in Fast +RAM, so the Atari bootstrap will place the kernel in ST-RAM. The +minimum requirement for ST-RAM is 2 MB. You will need an additional +12 MB or more of TT-RAM. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +On the Macintosh, care should be taken on machines with RAM-based +video (RBV). The RAM segment at physical address 0 is used as screen +memory, making the default load position for the kernel unavailable. +The alternate RAM segment used for kernel and RAMdisk must be at least +4 MB. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +<emphasis condition="FIXME">FIXME: is this still true?</emphasis> + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/hardware/network-cards.xml b/en/hardware/network-cards.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cadc760c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/network-cards.xml @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="network-cards"> + <title>Network Connectivity Hardware</title> + +<para arch="i386"> + +<!-- last updated for kernel-image_2.0.36-2 --> + +Most PCI and many older ISA network cards are supported. +Some network interface cards are not supported by most Debian +installation disks, such as AX.25 cards and protocols; +NI16510 EtherBlaster cards; Schneider & Koch G16 cards; +and the Zenith Z-Note built-in network card. Microchannel (MCA) network +cards are not supported by the standard installation system, but see +<ulink url="&url-linux-mca;">Linux on MCA</ulink> for some (old) +instructions. +FDDI networks are also not supported by the installation disks, both +cards and protocols. + +<!-- missing-doc FIXME You can create a custom kernel which supports an +otherwise unsupported card and then substitute in the installer (see +<xref linkend="rescue-replace-kernel"/>). --> + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +As for ISDN, the D-channel protocol for the (old) German 1TR6 is not +supported; Spellcaster BRI ISDN boards are also not supported by the +&d-i;. + +</para> + +<para arch="m68k"> + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. Again, see +<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;"></ulink> for complete details. + +</para> + +<para arch="sparc"> + +The following network interface cards (NICs) are supported from the bootable +kernel directly: + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> + +Sun LANCE + + +</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Sun Happy Meal + + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para arch="sparc"> + +The following network interface cards are supported as modules. They +can be enabled once the drivers are installed during the setup. +However, due to the magic of OpenPROM, you still should be able to +boot from these devices: + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> + +Sun BigMAC + + +</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Sun QuadEthernet + +</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +MyriCOM Gigabit Ethernet + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para arch="alpha"> + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + +</para><para arch="hppa"> + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + +</para><para arch="ia64"> + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + +</para><para arch="mips"> + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should +also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module. + +</para><para arch="mipsel"> + +Due to kernel limitations only the onboard network interfaces on +DECstations are supported, TurboChannel option network cards currently +do not work. + +</para><para arch="s390"> + +Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel are +also be supported by the boot disks. All network drivers are compiled +as modules so you need to load one first during the initial network +setup. The list of supported network devices is: + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> + +Channel to Channel (CTC) and ESCON connection (real or emulated) + +</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +OSA-2 Token Ring/Ethernet and OSA-Express Fast Ethernet (non-QDIO) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Inter-User Communication Vehicle (IUCV) — available for VM guests only + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +OSA-Express in QDIO mode, HiperSockets and Guest-LANs + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + +<para arch="arm"> + +The following network interface cards are supported directly by the +boot disks on NetWinder and CATS machines: + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> + + PCI-based NE2000 + + +</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + + DECchip Tulip + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para arch="arm"> + +The following network interface cards are supported directly by the +boot disks on RiscPCs: + +<itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> + + Ether1 + +</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + + Ether3 + +</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + + EtherH + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para arch="arm"> + +If your card is mentioned in the lists above, the complete installation +can be carried out from the network with no need for CD-ROMs or floppy +disks. + +</para><para arch="arm"> + +Any other network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel +should also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your +network driver as a module; this means that you will have to install +the operating system kernel and modules using some other media. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml b/en/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2afb2ee2a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="supported-peripherals"> + <title>Peripherals and Other Hardware</title> +<para arch="not-s390"> + +Linux supports a large variety of hardware devices such as mice, +printers, scanners, PCMCIA and USB devices. However, most of these +devices are not required while installing the system. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +USB hardware generally works fine, only some +USB keyboards may require additional configuration +(see <xref linkend="usb-keyboard-config"/>). + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +Again, see the +<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink> +to determine whether your specific hardware is supported by Linux. + +</para><para arch="s390"> + +Package installations from XPRAM and tape are not supported by this +system. All packages that you want to install need to be available on a +DASD or over the network using NFS, HTTP or FTP. + +</para><para arch="mips"> + +The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board offers standard 3.3v 32 bit and 64 +bit PCI slots as well as USB connectors. + +</para><para arch="mipsel"> + +The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board offers standard 3.3v 32 bit and 64 +bit PCI slots as well as USB connectors. The Cobalt RaQ has no support for +additional devices but the Qube has one PCI slot. + +</para> +</sect1> + + <sect1 arch="not-s390"><title>Purchasing Hardware Specifically for GNU/Linux</title> + +<para> + +There are several vendors, who ship systems with Debian or other +distributions of GNU/Linux +<ulink url="&url-pre-installed;">pre-installed</ulink>. You might pay more +for the privilege, but it does buy a level of peace of mind, since you can +be sure that the hardware is well-supported by GNU/Linux. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +Unfortunately, it's quite rare to find any vendor shipping +new &arch-title; machines at all. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +If you do have to buy a machine with Windows bundled, carefully read +the software license that comes with Windows; you may be able to +reject the license and obtain a rebate from your vendor. Searching +the Internet for <quote>windows refund</quote> may get you some useful +information to help with that. + +</para><para> + +Whether or not you are purchasing a system with Linux bundled, or even +a used system, it is still important to check that your hardware is +supported by the Linux kernel. Check if your hardware is listed in +the references found above. Let your salesperson (if any) know that +you're shopping for a Linux system. Support Linux-friendly hardware +vendors. + +</para> + + <sect2><title>Avoid Proprietary or Closed Hardware</title> +<para> + +Some hardware manufacturers simply won't tell us how to write drivers +for their hardware. Others won't allow us access to the documentation +without a non-disclosure agreement that would prevent us from +releasing the Linux source code. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +Another example is the proprietary hardware in the older +Macintosh line. In fact, no specifications or documentation have ever +been released for any Macintosh hardware, most notably the ADB +controller (used by the mouse and keyboard), the floppy controller, +and all acceleration and CLUT manipulation of the video hardware +(though we do now support CLUT manipulation on nearly all internal +video chips). In a nutshell, this explains why the Macintosh Linux +port lags behind other Linux ports. + +</para><para> + +Since we haven't been granted access to the documentation on these +devices, they simply won't work under Linux. You can help by asking +the manufacturers of such hardware to release the documentation. If +enough people ask, they will realize that the free software community +is an important market. + +</para> +</sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="i386"><title>Windows-specific Hardware</title> +<para> + +A disturbing trend is the proliferation of Windows-specific modems and +printers. In some cases these are specially designed to be operated by +the Microsoft Windows operating system and bear the legend <quote>WinModem</quote> +or <quote>Made especially for Windows-based computers</quote>. This +is generally done by removing the embedded processors of the hardware +and shifting the work they do over to a Windows driver that is run by +your computer's main CPU. This strategy makes the hardware less +expensive, but the savings are often <emphasis>not</emphasis> passed on to the +user and this hardware may even be more expensive than equivalent +devices that retain their embedded intelligence. + +</para><para> + +You should avoid Windows-specific hardware for two reasons. The first +is that the manufacturers do not generally make the resources +available to write a Linux driver. Generally, the hardware and +software interface to the device is proprietary, and documentation is +not available without a non-disclosure agreement, if it is available +at all. This precludes its being used for free software, since free +software writers disclose the source code of their programs. The +second reason is that when devices like these have had their embedded +processors removed, the operating system must perform the work of the +embedded processors, often at <emphasis>real-time</emphasis> priority, +and thus the CPU is not available to run your programs while it is +driving these devices. Since the typical Windows user does not +multi-process as intensively as a Linux user, the manufacturers hope +that the Windows user simply won't notice the burden this hardware +places on their CPU. However, any multi-processing operating system, +even Windows 2000 or XP, suffers from degraded performance when +peripheral manufacturers skimp on the embedded processing power of +their hardware. + +</para><para> + +You can help this situation by encouraging these manufacturers to +release the documentation and other resources necessary for us to +program their hardware, but the best strategy is simply to avoid this +sort of hardware until it is listed as working in the +<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink>. + +</para> +</sect2> + + + <sect2 id="Parity-RAM"> + <title>Fake or <quote>Virtual</quote> Parity RAM</title> +<para> + +If you ask for Parity RAM in a computer store, you'll probably get +<emphasis>virtual parity</emphasis> memory modules instead of +<emphasis>true parity</emphasis> ones. Virtual parity SIMMs can often +(but not always) be distinguished because they only have one more chip +than an equivalent non-parity SIMM, and that one extra chip is smaller +than all the others. Virtual-parity SIMMs work exactly like non-parity +memory. They can't tell you when you have a single-bit RAM error the +way true-parity SIMMs do in a motherboard that implements +parity. Don't ever pay more for a virtual-parity SIMM than a +non-parity one. Do expect to pay a little more for true-parity SIMMs, +because you are actually buying one extra bit of memory for every 8 +bits. + +</para><para> + +If you want complete information on &arch-title; RAM issues, and what +is the best RAM to buy, see the +<ulink url="&url-pc-hw-faq;">PC Hardware FAQ</ulink>. + +</para><para arch="alpha"> + +Most, if not all, Alpha systems require true-parity RAM. + +</para> + + </sect2> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/alpha.xml b/en/hardware/supported/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3504e7f84 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,457 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha" id="alpha-cpus"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para> + +Complete information regarding supported DEC Alphas can be found at +<ulink url="&url-alpha-howto;">Linux Alpha HOWTO</ulink>. The +purpose of this section is to describe the systems supported +by the boot disks. + +</para><para> + +Alpha machines are subdivided into different system types because there +are a number of generations of motherboard and supporting chipsets. +Different systems (<quote>sub-architectures</quote>) often have radically +different engineering and capabilities. Therefore, the process of +installing and, more to the point, booting, can vary from system to system. + +</para><para> + +The following table lists the system types supported by the Debian +installation system. The table also indicates the <emphasis>code +name</emphasis> for these system types. You'll need to know this code +name when you actually begin the installation process: + +</para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="4"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<colspec colname="c3"/> +<colspec colname="c4"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Hardware Type</entry> + <entry>Aliases</entry><entry>MILO image</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry morerows="3">ALCOR</entry> + <entry>AlphaStation 500 5/266.300</entry> + <entry>Maverick</entry> + <entry>alcor</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 500 5/333...500</entry> + <entry>Bret</entry> + <entry>alcor</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 600/266...300</entry> + <entry>Alcor</entry> + <entry>alcor</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 600/300...433</entry> + <entry>XLT</entry> + <entry>xlt</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>BOOK1</entry> + <entry>AlphaBook1 (laptop)</entry> + <entry>Alphabook1/Burns</entry> + <entry>book1</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="7">AVANTI</entry> + <entry>AlphaStation 200 4/100...166</entry> + <entry>Mustang</entry> + <entry>avanti</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 200 4/233</entry> + <entry>Mustang+</entry> + <entry>avanti</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 205 4/133...333</entry> + <entry>LX3</entry> + <entry>avanti</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 250 4/300</entry> + <entry>M3+</entry> + <entry>avanti</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 255 4/133...333</entry> + <entry>LX3+</entry> + <entry>avanti</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 300 4/266</entry> + <entry>Melmac</entry> + <entry>avanti</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 400 4/166</entry> + <entry>Chinet</entry> + <entry>avanti</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 400 4/233...300</entry> + <entry>Avanti</entry> + <entry>avanti</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3">EB164</entry> + <entry>AlphaPC164</entry> + <entry>PC164</entry> + <entry>pc164</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaPC164-LX</entry> + <entry>LX164</entry> + <entry>lx164</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaPC164-SX</entry> + <entry>SX164</entry> + <entry>sx164</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>EB164</entry> + <entry>EB164</entry> + <entry>eb164</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="2">EB64+</entry> + <entry>AlphaPC64</entry> + <entry>Cabriolet</entry> + <entry>cabriolet</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaPCI64</entry> + <entry>Cabriolet</entry> + <entry>cabriolet</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>EB64+</entry> + <entry>EB64+</entry> + <entry>eb64p</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1">EB66</entry> + <entry>EB66</entry> + <entry>EB66</entry> + <entry>eb66</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>EB66+</entry> + <entry>EB66+</entry> + <entry>eb66p</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="2">JENSEN</entry> + <entry>DEC 2000 Model 300(S)</entry> + <entry>Jensen</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DEC 2000 Model 500</entry> + <entry>Culzen</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DECpc 150</entry> + <entry>Jensen</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="7">MIATA</entry> + <entry>Personal WorkStation 433a</entry> + <entry>Miata</entry> + <entry>miata</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal WorkStation 433au</entry> + <entry>Miata</entry> + <entry>miata</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal WorkStation 466au</entry> + <entry>Miata</entry> + <entry>miata</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal WorkStation 500a</entry> + <entry>Miata</entry> + <entry>miata</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal WorkStation 500au</entry> + <entry>Miata</entry> + <entry>miata</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal WorkStation 550au</entry> + <entry>Miata</entry> + <entry>miata</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal WorkStation 600a</entry> + <entry>Miata</entry> + <entry>miata</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal WorkStation 600au</entry> + <entry>Miata</entry> + <entry>miata</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3">MIKASA</entry> + <entry>AlphaServer 1000 4/200</entry> + <entry>Mikasa</entry> + <entry>mikasa</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 1000 4/233..266</entry> + <entry>Mikasa+</entry> + <entry>mikasa</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 1000 5/300</entry> + <entry>Mikasa-Pinnacle</entry> + <entry>mikasa</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 1000 5/300</entry> + <entry>Mikasa-Primo</entry> + <entry>mikasa</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1">NAUTILUS</entry> + <entry>UP1000</entry> + <entry>Nautilus</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>UP1100</entry> + <entry>Galaxy-Train/Nautilus Jr.</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1">NONAME</entry> + <entry>AXPpci33</entry> + <entry>Noname</entry> + <entry>noname</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>UDB</entry> + <entry>Multia</entry> + <entry>noname</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="6">NORITAKE</entry> + <entry>AlphaServer 1000A 4/233...266</entry> + <entry>Noritake</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 1000A 5/300</entry> + <entry>Noritake-Pinnacle</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 1000A 5/333...500</entry> + <entry>Noritake-Primo</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 800 5/333...500</entry> + <entry>Corelle</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaStation 600 A</entry> + <entry>Alcor-Primo</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Digital Server 3300</entry> + <entry>Corelle</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Digital Server 3300R</entry> + <entry>Corelle</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>PLATFORM 2000</entry> + <entry>P2K</entry> + <entry>P2K</entry> + <entry>p2k</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="4">RAWHIDE</entry> + <entry>AlphaServer 1200 5/xxx</entry> + <entry>Tincup/DaVinci</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 4000 5/xxx</entry> + <entry>Wrangler/Durango</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 4100 5/xxx</entry> + <entry>Dodge</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Digital Server 5300</entry> + <entry>Tincup/DaVinci</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Digital Server 7300</entry> + <entry>Dodge</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="5">RUFFIAN</entry> + <entry>DeskStation AlphaPC164-UX</entry> + <entry>Ruffian</entry> + <entry>ruffian</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DeskStation RPL164-2</entry> + <entry>Ruffian</entry> + <entry>ruffian</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DeskStation RPL164-4</entry> + <entry>Ruffian</entry> + <entry>ruffian</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DeskStation RPX164-2</entry> + <entry>Ruffian</entry> + <entry>ruffian</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DeskStation RPX164-4</entry> + <entry>Ruffian</entry> + <entry>ruffian</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Samsung AlphaPC164-BX</entry> + <entry>Ruffian</entry> + <entry>ruffian</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3">SABLE</entry> + <entry>AlphaServer 2000 4/xxx</entry> + <entry>Demi-Sable</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 2000 5/xxx</entry> + <entry>Demi-Gamma-Sable</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 2100 4/xxx</entry> + <entry>Sable</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer 2100 5/xxx</entry> + <entry>Gamma-Sable</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>TAKARA</entry> + <entry>21164 PICMG SBC</entry> + <entry>Takara</entry> + <entry>takara</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3">TITAN</entry> + <entry>AlphaServer DS15</entry> + <entry>HyperBrick2</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer DS25</entry> + <entry>Granite</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer ES45</entry> + <entry>Privateer</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>UNKNOWN</entry> + <entry>Yukon</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="12">TSUNAMI</entry> + <entry>AlphaServer DS10</entry> + <entry>Webbrick</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer DS10L</entry> + <entry>Slate</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer DS20</entry> + <entry>Catamaran/Goldrush</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer DS20E</entry> + <entry>Goldrack</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer DS20L</entry> + <entry>Shark</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer ES40</entry> + <entry>Clipper</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DP264</entry> + <entry>DP264</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>SMARTengine 21264 PCI/ISA SBC</entry> + <entry>Eiger</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>UNKNOWN</entry> + <entry>Warhol</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>UNKNOWN</entry> + <entry>Windjammer</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>UP2000</entry> + <entry>Swordfish</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>XP1000</entry> + <entry>Monet/Brisbane</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>XP900</entry> + <entry>Webbrick</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1">WILDFIRE</entry> + <entry>AlphaServer GS160</entry> + <entry>Wildfire</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>AlphaServer GS320</entry> + <entry>Wildfire</entry> + <entry>N/A</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>XL</entry> + <entry>XL-233...266</entry> + <entry>XL</entry> + <entry>xl</entry> +</row> + +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +<para> + +It is believed that Debian &releasename; supports installing on all +alpha sub-architectures with the exception of the ARC-only Ruffian and +XL sub-architectures and the Titan subarchitecture, which requires a +change to the kernel compile options. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/arm.xml b/en/hardware/supported/arm.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dcd55b6ca --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/arm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="arm"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> + +<para> + +Each distinct ARM architecture requires its own kernel. Because of +this the standard Debian distribution only supports installation on +a number of the most common systems. The Debian userland however may be used by <emphasis>any</emphasis> ARM CPU including xscale. + +</para> + +<para> + +Most ARM CPUs may be run in either endian mode (big or little). However, +almost every current system implementation uses little-endian mode. +Debian currently only supports little-endian ARM systems. + +</para> + +<para> + +The commonly supported systems are + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term>Netwinder</term> +<listitem><para> + +This is actually the name for the group of machines +based upon the StrongARM 110 CPU and Intel 21285 Northbridge. It +comprises of machines like: Netwinder (possibly one of the most common ARM +boxes), CATS (also known as the EB110ATX), EBSA 285 and Compaq +personal server (cps, aka skiff). + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>Bast</term> +<listitem><para> + +This is a modern ARM 920 board with a 266MHz Samsung +processor. It has integrated IDE, USB, Serial, Parallel, audio, video, +flash and two ethernet ports. This system has a good bootloader which +is also found on the CATS and Riscstation systems. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>RiscPC</term> +<listitem><para> + +This machine is the oldest supported hardware: it was released +in 1994. It has RISC OS in ROM, Linux can be booted from that OS using +linloader. The RiscPC has a modular CPU card and typically has a 30MHz +610, 40MHz 710 or 233MHz Strongarm 110 CPU fitted. The mainboard has +integrated IDE, SVGA video, parallel port, single serial port, PS/2 +keyboard and proprietary mouse port. The proprietary module expansion +bus allows for up to eight expansion cards to be fitted depending on +configuration, several of these modules have Linux drivers. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>Riscstation</term> +<listitem><para> + +This is an inexpensive 56MHz 7500FE based machine with +integrated video, IDE, PS/2 keyboard and mouse and two serial +ports. Its lack of processing power was made up for by its price. It +may be found in two configurations one with RISC OS and one with a +simple bootloader. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>LART</term> +<listitem><para> + +This is a modular open hardware platform intended to be built +by enthusiasts. To be useful to install Debian it requires its KSB +expansion board. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/hppa.xml b/en/hardware/supported/hppa.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a85eb5a7f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/hppa.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="hppa"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para> + +The are two major support <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> flavors: +PA-RISC 1.1 and PA-RISC 2.0. The PA-RISC 1.1 architecture is targeted +at 32-bit processors whereas the 2.0 architecture is targeted to +the 64-bit processors. Some systems are able to run either kernel. +In both cases, the userland is 32-bit. There is the possibility of +a 64-bit userland in the future. + +</para> + </sect2> + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/i386.xml b/en/hardware/supported/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c1a709bf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="i386"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para> + +Complete information concerning supported peripherals can be found at +<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink>. +This section merely outlines the basics. + +</para> + + <sect3><title>CPU</title> +<para> + +Nearly all x86-based processors are supported; this includes AMD and +VIA (former Cyrix) processors as well. Also the new processors like +Athlon XP and Intel P4 Xeon are supported. However, Linux will +<emphasis>not</emphasis> run on 286 or earlier processors. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="bus"><title>I/O Bus</title> +<para> + +The system bus is the part of the motherboard which allows the CPU to +communicate with peripherals such as storage devices. Your computer +must use the ISA, EISA, PCI, the Microchannel Architecture (MCA, used +in IBM's PS/2 line), or VESA Local Bus (VLB, sometimes called the VL +bus). + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/ia64.xml b/en/hardware/supported/ia64.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53394db87 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/ia64.xml @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/m68k.xml b/en/hardware/supported/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92c8030d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para> + +Complete information concerning supported M68000 based +(<emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis>) systems can be found at the +<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink>. This section merely +outlines the basics. + +</para><para> + +The &architecture; port of Linux runs on any 680x0 with a PMMU (Paged +Memory Management Unit) and a FPU (floating-point unit). This +includes the 68020 with an external 68851 PMMU, the 68030, and better, +and excludes the <quote>EC</quote> line of 680x0 processors. See the +<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink> for complete details. + +</para><para> + +There are four major flavors of supported +<emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> flavors: Amiga, Atari, Macintosh +and VME machines. Amiga and Atari were the first two systems to which +Linux was ported; in keeping, they are also the two most +well-supported Debian ports. The Macintosh line is supported +incompletely, both by Debian and by the Linux kernel; see +<ulink url="&url-m68k-mac;">Linux m68k for Macintosh</ulink> for project +status and supported hardware. The BVM and Motorola single board +VMEbus computers are the most recent addition to the list of machines +supported by Debian. Ports to other &architecture; architectures, +such as the Sun3 architecture and NeXT black box, are underway but not +yet supported by Debian. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/mips.xml b/en/hardware/supported/mips.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a087dc4d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/mips.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="mips"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para> + +Debian on &arch-title; currently supports two subarchitectures: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +SGI IP22: this platform includes the SGI machines Indy, Indigo 2 and +Challenge S. Since these machines are very similar, whenever this document +refers to the SGI Indy, the Indigo 2 and Challenge S are meant as well. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board from +Broadcom based on their SiByte processor family. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found +at the <ulink url="&url-linux-mips;">Linux-MIPS homepage</ulink>. In the +following, only the systems supported by the Debian installer will be +covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please +contact the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;"> +debian-&architecture; mailing list</ulink>. + +</para> + + <sect3><title>CPU</title> +<para> + +On SGI IP22, SGI Indy, Indigo 2 and Challenge S with R4000, R4400, R4600 and R5000 +processors are supported by the Debian installation system on big endian +MIPS. The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board comes with an SB1250 chip with +two SB-1 cores which are supported in SMP mode by this installer. + +</para><para> + +Some MIPS machines can be operated in both big and little endian mode. For +little endian MIPS, please read the documentation for the mipsel +architecture. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml b/en/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa06c45ce --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="mipsel"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para> + +Debian on &arch-title; currently supports three subarchitectures: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +DECstation: various models of the DECstation are supported. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Cobalt Microserver: only MIPS based Cobalt machines are covered here. +This included the Cobalt Qube, RaQ, Qube2 and RaQ2, and the Gateway +Microserver. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board from +Broadcom based on their SiByte processor family. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found +at the <ulink url="&url-linux-mips;">Linux-MIPS homepage</ulink>. In the +following, only the systems supported by the Debian installer will be +covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please +contact the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;"> +debian-&architecture; mailing list</ulink>. + +</para> + + <sect3><title>CPU/Machine types</title> + +<para> + +Currently only DECstations with R3000 and R4000/R4400 CPUs are +supported by the Debian installation system on little endian MIPS. +The Debian installation system works on the following machines: + +</para><para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="4"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>System Type</entry><entry>CPU</entry><entry>Code-name</entry> + <entry>Debian subarchitecture</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry>DECstation 5000/1xx</entry> + <entry>R3000</entry> + <entry>3MIN</entry> + <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DECstation 5000/150</entry> + <entry>R4000</entry> + <entry>3MIN</entry> + <entry>r4k-kn04</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DECstation 5000/200</entry> + <entry>R3000</entry> + <entry>3MAX</entry> + <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DECstation 5000/240</entry> + <entry>R3000</entry> + <entry>3MAX+</entry> + <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>DECstation 5000/260</entry> + <entry>R4400</entry> + <entry>3MAX+</entry> + <entry>r4k-kn04</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal DECstation 5000/xx</entry> + <entry>R3000</entry> + <entry>Maxine</entry> + <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Personal DECstation 5000/50</entry> + <entry>R4000</entry> + <entry>Maxine</entry> + <entry>r4k-kn04</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +</para><para> + +All Cobalt machines are supported which have a serial console (which is +needed for the installation). + +</para><para> + +The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board comes with an SB1250 chip with two +SB-1 cores which are supported in SMP mode by this installer. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Supported console options</title> +<para> + +Serial console is available on all supported DECstations (9600 bps, +8N1). For using serial console, you have to boot the installer image +with the <literal>console=ttyS</literal><replaceable>x</replaceable> kernel +parameter (with <replaceable>x</replaceable> being the number +of the serial port you have your terminal connected to — usually +<literal>2</literal>, but <literal>0</literal> for the Personal DECstations). +On 3MIN and 3MAX+ (DECstation 5000/1xx, 5000/240 and 5000/260) local console +is available with the PMAG-BA and the PMAGB-B graphics options. + +</para><para> + +If you have a Linux system to use as serial terminal, an easy way +is to run <command>cu</command><footnote> + +<para> +In Woody this command was part of the <classname>uucp</classname> package, +but in later releases it is available as a separate package. +</para> + +</footnote> on it. Example: + +<informalexample><screen> +$ cu -l /dev/ttyS1 -s 9600 +</screen></informalexample> + +where the option <literal>-l</literal> (line) sets the serial port to use +and <literal>-s</literal> (speed) sets the speed for the connection (9600 +bits per second). + +</para><para> + +Both Cobalt and Broadcom BCM91250A use 115200 bps. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml b/en/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b5d53aad --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,381 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para> + +There are four major supported <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> +subarchitectures: PMac (Power-Macintosh), PReP, APUS (Amiga Power-UP +System), and CHRP machines. Each subarchitecture has its own boot +methods. In addition, there are four different kernel flavours, +supporting different CPU variants. + +</para><para> + +Ports to other <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> architectures, such +as the Be-Box and MBX architecture, are underway but not yet supported +by Debian. We may have a 64-bit port in the future. + +</para> + + <sect3><title>Kernel Flavours</title> + +<para> + +There are four flavours of the powerpc kernel in Debian, based on the +CPU type: + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term>powerpc</term> +<listitem><para> + +Most systems use this kernel flavour, which supports the PowerPC 601, +603, 604, 740, 750, and 7400 processors. All Apple Power Macintosh +systems up to and including the G4 use one of these processors. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>power3</term> +<listitem><para> + +The POWER3 processor is used in older IBM 64-bit server systems: known +models include the IntelliStation POWER Model 265, the pSeries 610 and +640, and the RS/6000 7044-170, 7043-260, and 7044-270. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>power4</term> +<listitem><para> + +The POWER4 processor is used in more recent IBM 64-bit server systems: +known models include the pSeries 615, 630, 650, 655, 670, and 690. + +</para><para> + +The Apple G5 is also based on the POWER4 architecture, and uses this +kernel flavour. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term>apus</term> +<listitem><para> + +This kernel flavour supports the Amiga Power-UP System. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Power Macintosh (pmac) subarchitecture</title> + +<para> + +Apple (and briefly a few other manufacturers — Power Computing, for +example) makes a series of Macintosh computers based on the PowerPC +processor. For purposes of architecture support, they are categorized +as NuBus, OldWorld PCI, and NewWorld. + +</para><para> + +Macintosh computers using the 680x0 series of processors are not in +the PowerPC family but are instead m68k machines. Those models start +with <quote>Mac II</quote> or have a 3-digit model number such as Centris 650 +or Quadra 950. Apple's pre-iMac PowerPC model numbers have four digits. + +</para><para> + +NuBus systems are not currently supported by debian/powerpc. The +monolithic Linux/PPC kernel architecture does not have support for +these machines; instead, one must use the MkLinux Mach microkernel, +which Debian does not yet support. These include the following: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Power Macintosh 6100, 7100, 8100 + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Performa 5200, 6200, 6300 + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Powerbook 1400, 2300, and 5300 + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Workgroup Server 6150, 8150, 9150 + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +A linux kernel for these machines and limited support is available at +<ulink url="http://nubus-pmac.sourceforge.net/"></ulink> + +</para><para> + +OldWorld systems are most Power Macintoshes with a floppy drive and a +PCI bus. Most 603, 603e, 604, and 604e based Power Macintoshes are +OldWorld machines. The beige colored G3 systems are also OldWorld. + +</para><para> + +The so called NewWorld PowerMacs are any PowerMacs in translucent +colored plastic cases. That includes all iMacs, iBooks, G4 systems, +blue colored G3 systems, and most PowerBooks manufactured in and after +1999. The NewWorld PowerMacs are also known for using the <quote>ROM in +RAM</quote> system for MacOS, and were manufactured from mid-1998 onwards. + +</para><para> + +Specifications for Apple hardware are available at +<ulink url="http://www.info.apple.com/support/applespec.html">AppleSpec</ulink>, +and, for older hardware, +<ulink url="http://www.info.apple.com/support/applespec.legacy/index.html">AppleSpec Legacy</ulink>. + +</para><para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="3"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<colspec colname="c3"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Model Name/Number</entry> + <entry>Generation</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry morerows="22">Apple</entry> + <entry>iMac Bondi Blue, 5 Flavors, Slot Loading</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>iMac Summer 2000, Early 2001</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>iMac G5</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>iBook, iBook SE, iBook Dual USB</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>iBook2</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>iBook G4</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh Blue and White (B&W) G3</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh G4 PCI, AGP, Cube</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh G4 Gigabit Ethernet</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh G4 Digital Audio, Quicksilver</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh G5</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PowerBook G3 FireWire Pismo (2000)</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PowerBook G3 Lombard (1999)</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PowerBook G4 Titanium</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PowerBook G4 Aluminum</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Xserve G5</entry> + <entry>NewWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Performa 4400, 54xx, 5500</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Performa 6360, 6400, 6500</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh 4400, 5400</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh 7200, 7300, 7500, 7600</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh 8200, 8500, 8600</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh 9500, 9600</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh (Beige) G3 Minitower</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power Macintosh (Beige) Desktop, All-in-One</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PowerBook 2400, 3400, 3500</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PowerBook G3 Wallstreet (1998)</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Twentieth Anniversary Macintosh</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Workgroup Server 7250, 7350, 8550, 9650, G3</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="1">Power Computing</entry> + <entry>PowerBase, PowerTower / Pro, PowerWave</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>PowerCenter / Pro, PowerCurve</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>UMAX</entry> + <entry>C500, C600, J700, S900</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>APS</entry> + <entry>APS Tech M*Power 604e/2000</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>Motorola</entry> + <entry>Starmax 3000, 4000, 5000, 5500</entry> + <entry>OldWorld</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>PReP subarchitecture</title> + +<para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Model Name/Number</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry morerows="4">Motorola</entry> + <entry>Firepower, PowerStack Series E, PowerStack II</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>MPC 7xx, 8xx</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>MTX, MTX+</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>MVME2300(SC)/24xx/26xx/27xx/36xx/46xx</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>MCP(N)750</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry morerows="3">IBM RS/6000</entry> + <entry>40P, 43P</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Power 830/850/860 (6070, 6050)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>6030, 7025, 7043</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>p640</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>CHRP subarchitecture</title> + +<para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Model Name/Number</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry>IBM RS/6000</entry> + <entry>B50, 43P-150, 44P</entry> +</row> +<row> + <entry>Genesi</entry> + <entry>Pegasos I, Pegasos II</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +</para> + + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>APUS subarchitecture</title> + +<para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<colspec colname="c1"/> +<colspec colname="c2"/> +<thead> +<row> + <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Model Name/Number</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry>Amiga Power-UP Systems (APUS)</entry> + <entry>A1200, A3000, A4000</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/s390.xml b/en/hardware/supported/s390.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f85977a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/s390.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="s390"><title>S/390 and zSeries machine types</title> +<para> + +Complete information regarding supported S/390 and zSeries machines can +be found in IBM's Redbook +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions</ulink> in +chapter 2.1 or at the +<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/documentation-2.4.shtml">technical details web page</ulink> at +<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/index.shtml">developerWorks</ulink>. +In short, G5, Multiprise 3000, G6 and all zSeries are fully supported; +Multiprise 2000, G3 and G4 machines are supported with IEEE floating +point emulation and thus degraded performance. + +</para> + </sect2> + diff --git a/en/hardware/supported/sparc.xml b/en/hardware/supported/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0086365f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/hardware/supported/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="sparc-cpus"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> +<para> + +Currently the <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> port supports +several types of Sparc systems. The most common identifiers for Sparc +systems are sun4, sun4c, sun4m, sun4d and sun4u. Currently we do not +support very old sun4 hardware. However, the other systems are +supported. Sun4d has been tested the least of these, so expect +possible problems with regard to the kernel stability. Sun4c and +Sun4m, the most common of the older Sparc hardware, includes such +systems as SparcStation 1, 1+, IPC, IPX and the SparcStation LX, 5, +10, and 20, respectively. The UltraSPARC class systems fall under the +sun4u identifier, and are supported using the sun4u set of install +images. Some systems that fall under these supported identifiers are +known to not be supported. Known unsupported systems are the AP1000 +multicomputer and the Tadpole Sparcbook 1. See the +<ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;">Linux for SPARCProcessors FAQ</ulink> +for complete information. + +</para> + + <sect3><title>Memory Configuration</title> +<para> + +Some older Sun workstations, notably the Sun IPX and Sun IPC have +memory banks located at fixed locations in physical memory. Thus if +the banks are not filled gaps will exist in the physical memory space. +The Linux installation requires a contiguous memory block into which +to load the kernel and the initial RAMdisk. If this is not available a +<quote>Data Access Exception</quote> will result. + +</para><para> + +Thus you must configure the memory so that the lowest memory block is +contiguous for at least 8Mb. In the IPX and IPC cited above, memory banks +are mapped in at 16Mb boundaries. In effect this means that you must have +a sufficiently large SIMM in bank zero to hold the kernel and RAMdisk. +In this case 4Mb is <emphasis>not</emphasis> sufficient. + +</para><para> + +Example: +In a Sun IPX you have a 16Mb SIMM and a 4Mb SIMM. There are four +SIMM banks (0,1,2,3). [Bank zero is that furthest away from the SBUS +connectors]. You must therefore install the 16Mb SIMM in bank 0; it is +then recommended to install the 4Mb SIMM in bank 2. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Graphics Configuration</title> +<para> + +Especially in the case of older Sun workstations, it is very common +for there to be an onboard framebuffer which has been superseded (for +example the bwtwo on a sun IPC), and an SBUS card containing a later +probably accelerated buffer is then plugged in to an SBUS slot. +Under Solaris/SunOS this causes no problems because both cards are +initialized. + +</para><para> + +However with Linux this can cause a problem, in that the boot PROM +monitor may display its output on this additional card; however the +linux kernel boot messages may then be directed to the original on +board framebuffer, leaving <emphasis>no</emphasis> error messages on +the screen, with the machine apparently stuck loading the RAMdisk. + +</para><para> + +To avoid this problem, connect the monitor (if required) to the video +card in the lowest numbered SBUS slot (on motherboard card counts +as below external slots). Alternatively it is possible to use a serial +console. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/howto/installation-howto.xml b/en/howto/installation-howto.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9513858ac --- /dev/null +++ b/en/howto/installation-howto.xml @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<appendix id="installation-howto"> +<title>Installation Howto</title> + +<para> + +This document describes how to install &debian; &releasename; for +the &arch-title; (<quote>&architecture;</quote>) with the +new &d-i;. It is a quick walkthrough of the installation process +which should contain all the information you will need for most installs. +When more information can be useful, we will link to more detailed +explanations in the <link linkend="debian_installation_guide">&debian; +Installation Guide</link>. + +</para> + + <sect1 id="howto-preliminaries"> + <title>Preliminaries</title> +<para> + +<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> +The debian-installer is still in a beta state. +</phrase> +If you encounter bugs during your install, please refer to +<xref linkend="submit-bug" /> for instructions +on how to report them. If you have questions which cannot be +answered by this document, please direct them to the debian-boot +mailing list (&email-debian-boot-list;) or ask on IRC (#debian-boot +on the freenode network). + +</para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="howto-getting-images"> + <title>Booting the installer</title> +<para> + +<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> +For some quick links to CD images, check out the <ulink url="&url-d-i;"> +&d-i; home page</ulink>. +</phrase> +The debian-cd team provides builds of CD images using &d-i; on the +<ulink url="&url-debian-cd;">Debian CD page</ulink>. +For more information on where to get CDs, see <xref linkend="official-cdrom" />. + +</para><para> + +Some installation methods require other images than CD images. +<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> +The <ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; home page</ulink> has links to +other images. +</phrase> +<xref linkend="where-files" /> explains how to find images on Debian +mirrors. + +</para><para> + +The subsections below will give the details about which images you should +get for each possible means of installation. + +</para> + + <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-cdrom"> + <title>CDROM</title> + +<para> + +There are two different netinst CD images which can be used to install +&releasename; with the &d-i;. These images are intended to boot from CD +and install additional packages over a network, hence the name 'netinst'. +The difference between the two images is that on the full netinst image +the base packages are included, whereas you have to download these from +the web if you are using the business card image. If you'd rather, you can +get a full size CD image which will not need the network to install. You +only need the first CD of the set. + +</para><para> + +Download whichever type you prefer and burn it to a CD. +<phrase arch="i386">To boot the CD, you may need to change your BIOS +configuration, as explained in <xref linkend="bios-setup" />.</phrase> +<phrase arch="powerpc"> +To boot a PowerMac from CD, press the <keycap>c</keycap> key while booting. See +<xref linkend="boot-cd" /> for other ways to boot from CD. +</phrase> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="howto-getting-images-floppy"> + <title>Floppy</title> +<para> + +If you can't boot from CD, you can download floppy images to install +Debian. You need the <filename>floppy/boot.img</filename>, the +<filename>floppy/root.img</filename> and possibly one of the driver disks. + +</para><para> + +The boot floppy is the one with <filename>boot.img</filename> on it. +This floppy, when booted, will prompt you to insert a second floppy — +use the one with <filename>root.img</filename> on it. + +</para><para> + +If you're planning to install over the network, you will usually need +the <filename>floppy/net-drivers.img</filename>, which contains additional +drivers for many ethernet cards, and support for PCMCIA. + +</para><para> + +If you have a CD, but cannot boot from it, then boot from floppies and use +<filename>floppy/cd-drivers.img</filename> on a driver disk to complete the +install using the CD. + +</para><para> + +Floppy disks are one of the least reliable media around, so be prepared for +lots of bad disks (see <xref linkend="unreliable-floppies" />). Each +<filename>.img</filename> file you downloaded goes on a single floppy; +you can use the dd command to write it to /dev/fd0 or some other means +(see <xref linkend="create-floppy" /> for details). +Since you'll have more than one floppy, it's a good idea to label them. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="bootable-usb" id="howto-getting-images-usb"> + <title>USB memory stick</title> +<para> + +It's also possible to install from removable USB storage devices. For +example a USB keychain can make a handy Debian install medium that you +can take with you anywhere. + +</para><para> + +The easiest way to prepare your USB memory stick is to download +<filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename>, and use gunzip to extract the 128 MB +image from that file. Write this image directly to your memory stick, which +must be at least 128 mb in size. Of course this will destroy anything already +on the memory stick. Then mount the memory stick, which will now have a FAT +filesystem on it. Next, download a Debian netinst CD image, and copy that file +to the memory stick; any filename is ok as long as it ends in +<literal>.iso</literal>. + +</para><para> + +There are other, more flexible ways to set up a memory stick to use the +debian-installer, and it's possible to get it to work with smaller memory +sticks. For details, see <xref linkend="boot-usb-files" />. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +Some BIOSes can boot USB storage directly, and some cannot. You may need to +configure your BIOS to boot from a <quote>removable drive</quote> or even a +<quote>USB-ZIP</quote> to get it to boot from the USB device. If it +doesn't, you can boot from one floppy and use the USB stick for the rest of +the install. For helpful hints and details, see <xref linkend="usb-boot" />. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Booting Macintosh systems from USB storage devices involves manual use +of Open Firmware. For directions, see <xref linkend="usb-boot" />. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-netboot"> + <title>Booting from network</title> +<para> + +It's also possible to boot &d-i; completely from the net. The +various methods to netboot depend on your architecture and netboot setup. +The files in <filename>netboot/</filename> can be used to netboot &d-i;. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +The easiest thing to set up is probably PXE netbooting. Untar the +file <filename>netboot/pxeboot.tar.gz</filename> into +<filename>/var/lib/tftpboot</filename> or +wherever is appropriate for your tftp server. Set up your DHCP server to pass +filename <filename>/pxelinux.0</filename> to clients, and with luck +everything will just work. +For detailed instructions, see <xref linkend="install-tftp" />. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-hard-disk"> + <title>Booting from hard disk</title> +<para> + +It's possible to boot the installer using no removable media, but just an +existing hard disk, which can have a different OS on it. Download +<filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename>, <filename>hd-media/vmlinuz</filename>, +and a Debian CD image to the top-level directory of the hard disk. Make sure +that the CD image has a filename ending in <literal>.iso</literal>. Now +it's just a matter of booting linux with the initrd. +<phrase arch="i386"> +<xref linkend="boot-initrd" /> explains one way to do it. +</phrase> + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="howto-installation"> +<title>Installation</title> +<para> + +Once the installer starts, you will be greeted with an initial screen. Press +&enterkey; to boot, or read the instructions for other boot +methods and parameters (see <xref linkend="boot-parms" />). +<phrase arch="i386"> +<phrase condition="sarge"> +If you want a 2.6 kernel, type <userinput>linux26</userinput> at the +<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. +</phrase> +<phrase condition="etch"> +If you want a 2.4 kernel, type <userinput>install24</userinput> at the +<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. +</phrase> +<footnote><para> + +<phrase condition="sarge"> +The 2.6 kernel is available for most boot methods, but not when booting from +a floppy. +</phrase> +<phrase condition="etch"> +The 2.6 kernel is the default for most boot methods, but is not available +when booting from a floppy. +</phrase> + +</para></footnote> +</phrase> + +</para><para> + +After a while you will be asked to select your language. Use the arrow keys +to pick a language and press &enterkey; to continue. Next you'll be asked to +select your country, with the choices including countries where your +language is spoken. If it's not on the short list, a list of all the +countries in the world is available. + +</para><para> + +You may be asked to confirm your keyboard layout. Choose the default unless +you know better. + +</para><para> + +Now sit back while debian-installer detects some of your hardware, and +loads the rest of itself from CD, floppy, USB, etc. + +</para><para> + +Next the installer will try to detect your network hardware and set up +networking by DHCP. If you are not on a network or do not have DHCP, you +will be given the opportunity to configure the network manually. + +</para><para> + +Now it is time to partition your disks. First you will be given the +opportunity to automatically partition either an entire drive, or free +space on a drive. This is recommended for new users or anyone in a hurry, +but if you do not want to autopartition, choose manual from the menu. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +If you have an existing DOS or Windows partition that you want to preserve, +be very careful with automatic partitioning. If you choose manual partitioning, +you can use the installer to resize existing FAT or NTFS partitions to create +room for the Debian install: simply select the partition and specify its new size. + +</para><para> + +On the next screen you will see your partition table, how the partitions +will be formatted, and where they will be mounted. Select a partition to +modify or delete it. If you did automatic partitioning, you should just be +able to choose <guimenuitem>Finished partitioning</guimenuitem> from the +menu to use what it set up. Remember to assign at least one partition for +swap space and to mount a partition on <filename>/</filename>. +<xref linkend="partitioning" /> has more information about partitioning. + +</para><para> + +Now &d-i; formats your partitions and starts to install the base system, +which can take a while. That is followed by installing a kernel. + +</para><para> + +The last step is to install a boot loader. If the installer detects +other operating systems on your computer, it will add them to the boot menu +and let you know. +<phrase arch="i386">By default GRUB will be installed to the master boot +record of the first harddrive, which is generally a good choice. You'll be +given the opportunity to override that choice and install it elsewhere. +</phrase> + +</para><para> + +&d-i; will now tell you that the installation has +finished. Remove the cdrom or other boot media and hit &enterkey; +to reboot your machine. It should boot up into the next stage of the install +process, which is explained in <xref linkend="boot-new" />. + +</para><para> + +If you need more information on the install process, see +<xref linkend="d-i-intro" />. + +</para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="howto-installation-report"> + <title>Send us an installation report</title> +<para> + +If you successfully managed an installation with &d-i;, +please take time to provide us with a report. There is a template +named <filename>install-report.template</filename> in the +<filename>/root</filename> directory of a freshly +installed system. Please fill it out and file it as a bug against the +package <classname>installation-reports</classname>, as explained in +<xref linkend="submit-bug" />. + +</para><para> + +If you did not reach base-config or ran into other trouble, you +probably found a bug in debian-installer. To improve the installer it +is necessary that we know about them, so please take the time to +report them. You can use an installation report to report problems; +if the install completely fails, see <xref linkend="problem-report" />. + +</para> + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="howto-installation-finally"> + <title>And finally..</title> +<para> + +We hope that your Debian installation is pleasant and that you find Debian +useful. You might want to read <xref linkend="post-install" />. + +</para> + </sect1> +</appendix> diff --git a/en/install-methods/automatic-install.xml b/en/install-methods/automatic-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4000f2aea --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/automatic-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="automatic-install"> + <title>Automatic Installation</title> +<para> + +For installing on multiple computers it's possible to do fully +automatic installations. Debian packages intended for this include +<classname>fai</classname> (which uses an install server), +<classname>replicator</classname>, +<classname>systemimager</classname>, +<classname>autoinstall</classname>, and +the Debian Installer itself. + +</para> + + <sect2 id="preseed"> + <title>Automatic Installation Using the Debian Installer</title> +<para> + +The Debian Installer supports automating installs via preconfiguration +files. A preconfiguration file can be loaded from the network or from +removable media, and used to fill in answers to question asked during the +installation process. + +</para><para> + +Although most dialogs used by &d-i; can be preseeded using this method, +there are some notable exceptions. You can (re)partition an entire disk +or use available free space on a disk; it is not possible to use existing +partitions. You currently cannot use preseeding to set up RAID and LVM. +<phrase condition="sarge">Also, with the exception of network driver modules, +it is not possible to preconfigure kernel module parameters.</phrase> + +</para><para> + +The preconfiguration file is in the format used by the +debconf-set-selections command. A well documented and working example that +you can edit is in <xref linkend="example-preseed"/>. + +</para><para> + +Alternatively, one way to get a complete file listing +all the values that can be preseeded is to do a manual install, +and then use <filename>debconf-get-selections</filename>, +from the <classname>debconf-utils</classname> package, +to dump both the debconf database and the cdebconf +database in /var/log/debian-installer/cdebconf to a single file: + +<informalexample><screen> +$ debconf-get-selections --installer > <replaceable>file</replaceable> +$ debconf-get-selections >> <replaceable>file</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +However, a file generated in this manner will have some items that should +not be preseeded, and the file in <xref linkend="example-preseed"/> is a +better starting place for most users. + +</para><para> + +Once you have a preconfiguration file, you can edit it if necessary, and +place it on a web server, or copy it onto the installer's boot media. Wherever +you place the file, you need to pass a parameter to the installer at boot +time to tell it to use the file. + +</para><para> + +To make the installer use a preconfiguration file downloaded from the +network, add preseed/url=http://url/to/preseed.cfg to the kernel boot +parameters. Of course the preconfiguration will not take effect until the +installer manages to set up the network to download the file, so this is +most useful if the installer can set up the network via DHCP without asking +any questions. You may want to set the installation priority to critical to +avoid any questions while the network is being configured. See +<xref linkend="installer-args"/>. + +</para><para> + +To place a preconfiguration file on a CD, you would need to remaster the +ISO image to include your preconfiguration file. See the manual page for +mkisofs for details. Alternatively, put the preseed file on a floppy, and +use preseed/file=/floppy/preseed.cfg + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +If you'll be booting from a USB memory stick, then you can simply copy your +preconfiguration file onto the memory stick's filesystem, and edit the +syslinux.cfg file to add preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed.cfg to the kernel boot +parameters. + +</para> + + <sect3 condition="etch"> + <title>Using Preseeding to Change Default Values</title> +<para> + +It is also possible to use preseeding to change the default answer for a +question, but still have the question asked. To do this the +<firstterm>seen</firstterm> flag must be reset to <quote>false</quote> after +setting the value for a template. + +<informalexample><screen> +d-i foo/bar string value +d-i foo/bar seen false +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml b/en/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..acde0cb56 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 condition="bootable-disk" id="boot-drive-files"> + <title>Preparing Files for Hard Disk Booting</title> +<para> + +The installer may be booted using boot files placed on an +existing hard drive partition, either launched from another operating +system or by invoking a boot loader directly from the BIOS. + +</para><para> + +A full, <quote>pure network</quote> installation can be achieved using this +technique. This avoids all hassles of removable media, like finding +and burning CD images or struggling with too numerous and +unreliable floppy disks. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +The installer cannot boot from files on an NTFS file system. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +The installer cannot boot from files on an HFS+ file system. MacOS +System 8.1 and above may use HFS+ file systems; NewWorld PowerMacs all +use HFS+. To determine whether your existing file system is HFS+, +select <userinput>Get Info</userinput> for the volume in question. HFS +file systems appear as <userinput>Mac OS Standard</userinput>, while +HFS+ file systems say <userinput>Mac OS Extended</userinput>. You must +have an HFS partition in order to exchange files between MacOS and +Linux, in particular the installation files you download. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Different programs are used for hard disk installation system booting, +depending on whether the system is a <quote>NewWorld</quote> or an +<quote>OldWorld</quote> model. + +</para> + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="files-lilo"> + <title>Hard disk installer booting using <command>LILO</command> or + <command>GRUB</command></title> +<para> + +This section explains how to add to or even replace an existing linux +installation using either <command>LILO</command> or +<command>GRUB</command>. + +</para><para> + +At boot time, both bootloaders support loading in memory not +only the kernel, but also a disk image. This RAM disk can be used as +the root file-system by the kernel. + +</para><para> + +Copy the following files from the Debian archives to a +convenient location on your hard drive, for instance to +<filename>/boot/newinstall/</filename>. + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>vmlinuz</filename> (kernel binary) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>initrd.gz</filename> (ramdisk image) + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para> + +Finally, to configure the bootloader proceed to +<xref linkend="boot-initrd"/>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="files-oldworld"> + <title>Hard Disk Installer Booting for OldWorld Macs</title> +<para> + +The <filename>boot-floppy-hfs</filename> floppy uses +<application>miBoot</application> to launch Linux installation, but +<application>miBoot</application> cannot easily be used for hard disk +booting. <application>BootX</application>, launched from MacOS, +supports booting from files placed on the hard +disk. <application>BootX</application> can also be used to dual-boot +MacOS and Linux after your Debian installation is complete. For the +Performa 6360, it appears that <command>quik</command> cannot make the +hard disk bootable. So <application>BootX</application> is required +on that model. + +</para><para> + +Download and unstuff the <application>BootX</application> +distribution, available from <ulink url="&url-powerpc-bootx;"></ulink>, +or in the +<filename>dists/woody/main/disks-powerpc/current/powermac</filename> +directory on Debian http/ftp mirrors and official Debian CDs. Use +<application>Stuffit Expander</application> to extract it from its +archive. Within the package, there is an empty folder called +<filename>Linux Kernels</filename>. Download +<filename>linux.bin</filename> and +<filename>ramdisk.image.gz</filename> from the +<filename>disks-powerpc/current/powermac</filename> folder, and place +them in the <filename>Linux Kernels</filename> folder. Then place the +<filename>Linux Kernels</filename> folder in the active System Folder. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="files-newworld"> + <title>Hard Disk Installer Booting for NewWorld Macs</title> +<para> + +NewWorld PowerMacs support booting from a network or an ISO9660 +CD-ROM, as well as loading ELF binaries directly from the hard +disk. These machines will boot Linux directly via +<command>yaboot</command>, which supports loading a kernel and RAMdisk +directly from an ext2 partition, as well as dual-booting with +MacOS. Hard disk booting of the installer is particularly appropriate +for newer machines without floppy drives. <command>BootX</command> is +not supported and must not be used on NewWorld PowerMacs. + +</para><para> + +<emphasis>Copy</emphasis> (not move) the following four files which +you downloaded earlier from the Debian archives, onto the root level +of your hard drive (this can be accomplished by +<keycap>option</keycap>-dragging each file to the hard drive icon). + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>vmlinux</filename> + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>initrd.gz</filename> + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>yaboot</filename> + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para> + +Make a note of the partition number of the MacOS partition where you +place these files. If you have the MacOS <command>pdisk</command> +program, you can use the L command to check for the partition +number. You will need this partition number for the command you type +at the Open Firmware prompt when you boot the installer. + +</para><para> + +To boot the installer, proceed to <xref linkend="boot-newworld"/>. + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml b/en/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e80e0f6e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 condition="bootable-usb" id="boot-usb-files"> + <title>Preparing Files for USB Memory Stick Booting</title> + +<para> + +For preparing the USB stick you will need a system where GNU/Linux is +already running and where USB is supported. You should ensure that the +usb-storage kernel module is loaded (<userinput>modprobe +usb-storage</userinput>) and try to find out which SCSI device the USB +stick has been mapped to (in this example +<filename>/dev/sda</filename> is used). To write to your stick, you +will probably have to turn off its write protection switch. + +</para><para> + +Note, that the USB stick should be at least 128 MB in size (smaller +setups are possible if you follow <xref linkend="usb-copy-flexible"/>). + +</para> + + <sect2 id="usb-copy-easy"> + <title>Copying the files — the easy way</title> +<para arch="i386"> + +There is an all-in-one file <filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename> +which contains all the installer files (including the kernel) as well +as <command>SYSLINUX</command> and its configuration file. You only +have to extract it directly to your USB stick: + +<informalexample><screen> +# zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/<replaceable>sda</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +Of course this will destroy anything already on the device, so take +care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +There is an all-in-one file <filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename> +which contains all the installer files (including the kernel) as well +as <command>yaboot</command> and its configuration file. Create a +partition of type "Apple_Bootstrap" on your USB stick using +<command>mac-fdisk</command>'s <userinput>C</userinput> command and +extract the image directly to that: + +<informalexample><screen> +# zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/<replaceable>sda2</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +Of course this will destroy anything already on the device, so take +care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. + +</para><para> + +After that, mount the USB memory stick (<userinput>mount +<replaceable arch="i386">/dev/sda</replaceable> +<replaceable arch="powerpc">/dev/sda2</replaceable> +/mnt</userinput>), which will now have +<phrase arch="i386">a FAT filesystem</phrase> +<phrase arch="powerpc">an HFS filesystem</phrase> +on it, and copy a Debian netinst or businesscard ISO image to it. +Please note that the file name must end in <filename>.iso</filename>. +Unmount the stick (<userinput>umount /mnt</userinput>) and you are done. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="usb-copy-flexible"> + <title>Copying the files — the flexible way</title> +<para> + +If you like more flexibility or just want to know what's going on, you +should use the following method to put the files on your stick. + +</para> + +&usb-setup-i386.xml; +&usb-setup-powerpc.xml; + + <sect3> + <title>Adding an ISO image</title> +<para> + +Now you should put any Debian ISO image (businesscard, netinst or even +a full one) onto your stick (if it fits). The file name of such an +image must end in <filename>.iso</filename>. + +</para><para> + +If you want to install over the network, without using an ISO image, +you will of course skip the previous step. Moreover you will have to +use the initial ramdisk from the <filename>netboot</filename> +directory instead of the one from <filename>hd-media</filename>, +because <filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename> does not have network +support. + +</para><para> + +When you are done, unmount the USB memory stick (<userinput>umount +/mnt</userinput>) and activate its write protection switch. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <!-- TODO: doesn't this section belong later? --> + <sect3 arch="i386"> + <title>Booting the USB stick</title> +<warning><para> + +If your system refuses to boot from the memory stick, the stick may +contain an invalid master boot record (MBR). To fix this, use the +<command>install-mbr</command> command from the package +<classname>mbr</classname>: + +<informalexample><screen> +# install-mbr /dev/<replaceable>sda</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +</para></warning> + </sect3> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/install-methods/create-floppy.xml b/en/install-methods/create-floppy.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..433c91697 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/create-floppy.xml @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="create-floppy"> + <title>Creating Floppies from Disk Images</title> +<para> + +Bootable floppy disks are generally used as a last resort to boot the +installer on hardware that cannot boot from CD or by other means. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Floppy disk booting reportedly fails on Mac USB floppy drives. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +Floppy disk booting is not supported on Amigas or +68k Macs. + +</para><para> + +Disk images are files containing the complete contents of a floppy +disk in <emphasis>raw</emphasis> form. Disk images, such as +<filename>boot.img</filename>, cannot simply be copied to floppy +drives. A special program is used to write the image files to floppy +disk in <emphasis>raw</emphasis> mode. This is required because these +images are raw representations of the disk; it is required to do a +<emphasis>sector copy</emphasis> of the data from the file onto the +floppy. + +</para><para> + +There are different techniques for creating floppies from disk images, +which depend on your platform. This section describes how to create +floppies from disk images on different platforms. + +</para><para> + +No matter which method you use to create your floppies, you should +remember to flip the write-protect tab on the floppies once you have +written them, to ensure they are not damaged unintentionally. + +</para> + + <sect2><title>Writing Disk Images From a Linux or Unix System</title> +<para> + +To write the floppy disk image files to the floppy disks, you will +probably need root access to the system. Place a good, blank floppy +in the floppy drive. Next, use the command + +<informalexample><screen> +$ dd if=<replaceable>filename</replaceable> of=/dev/fd0 bs=1024 conv=sync ; sync +</screen></informalexample> + +where <replaceable>filename</replaceable> is one of the floppy disk image +files (see <xref linkend="downloading-files"/> for what +<replaceable>filename</replaceable> should be). +<filename>/dev/fd0</filename> is a commonly used name of the floppy +disk device, it may be different on your workstation +<phrase arch="sparc">(on Solaris, it is +<filename>/dev/fd/0</filename>)</phrase>. +The command may return to the +prompt before Unix has finished writing the floppy disk, so look for +the disk-in-use light on the floppy drive and be sure that the light +is out and the disk has stopped revolving before you remove it from +the drive. On some systems, you'll have to run a command to eject the +floppy from the drive +<phrase arch="sparc">(on Solaris, use <command>eject</command>, see +the manual page)</phrase>. + +</para><para> + +Some systems attempt to automatically mount a floppy disk when you +place it in the drive. You might have to disable this feature before +the workstation will allow you to write a floppy in <emphasis>raw +mode</emphasis>. Unfortunately, how to accomplish this will vary +based on your operating system. +<phrase arch="sparc"> +On Solaris, you can work around +volume management to get raw access to the floppy. First, make sure +that the floppy is auto-mounted (using <command>volcheck</command> or +the equivalent command in the file manager). Then use a +<command>dd</command> command of the form given above, just replace +<filename>/dev/fd0</filename> with +<filename>/vol/rdsk/<replaceable>floppy_name</replaceable></filename>, +where <replaceable>floppy_name</replaceable> is the name the floppy +disk was given when it was formatted (unnamed floppies default to the +name <filename>unnamed_floppy</filename>). On other systems, ask your +system administrator. +</phrase> + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +If writing a floppy on powerpc Linux, you will need to eject it. The +<command>eject</command> program handles this nicely; you might need +to install it. + +</para> + + </sect2> + +&floppy-i386.xml; <!-- can be used for other arches --> +&floppy-m68k.xml; +&floppy-powerpc.xml; + + </sect1> + diff --git a/en/install-methods/download/alpha.xml b/en/install-methods/download/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..280187987 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/download/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect3 arch="alpha"><title>Alpha Installation Files</title> +<para> + +If you choose to boot from ARC console firmware using +<command>MILO</command>, you will also need to prepare a disk +containing <command>MILO</command> and <command>LINLOAD.EXE</command> +from the provided disk images. See <xref linkend="alpha-firmware"/> +for more information on Alpha +firmware and boot loaders. The floppy images can be found in the +<filename>MILO</filename> directory as +<filename>milo_<replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable>.bin</filename>. + +</para><para> + +Unfortunately, these <command>MILO</command> images could not be +tested and might not work for all subarchitectures. If you find it +doesn't work for you, try copying the appropriate +<command>MILO</command> binary onto the floppy +(<ulink url="&disturlftp;main/disks-alpha/current/MILO/"></ulink>). +Note that those <command>MILO</command>s don't support ext2 <quote>sparse +superblocks</quote>, so you can't use them to load kernels from newly +generated ext2 file systems. As a workaround, you can put your kernel +onto the FAT partition next to the <command>MILO</command>. + +</para><para> + +<command>MILO</command> binaries are platform-specific. See +<xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/> to determine the appropriate +<command>MILO</command> image for your Alpha platform. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/install-methods/download/arm.xml b/en/install-methods/download/arm.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69619a91d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/download/arm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="riscpc-install-files"> + <title>RiscPC Installation Files</title> +<para> + +The RiscPC installer is booted initially from RISC OS. All the +necessary files are provided in one Zip archive, &rpc-install-kit;. +Download this file onto the RISC OS machine, copy the +<filename>linloader.!Boot</filename> components into place, and run +<filename>!dInstall</filename>. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="netwinder-install-files"> + <title>NetWinder Installation Files</title> +<para> + +The easiest way to boot a NetWinder is over the network, using the +supplied TFTP image &netwinder-boot-img;. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="arm" id="cats-install-files"> + <title>CATS Installation Files</title> +<para> + +The only supported boot method for CATS is to use the combined image +&cats-boot-img;. This can be loaded from any device accessible to the +Cyclone bootloader. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/install-methods/download/m68k.xml b/en/install-methods/download/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a89b62076 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/download/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect3 arch="m68k" id="kernel-22"> + <title>Choosing a Kernel</title> + +<para> + +Some m68k subarchs have a choice of kernels to install. In general we +recommend trying the most recent version first. If your subarch or +machine needs to use a 2.2.x kernel, make sure you choose one of the +images that supports 2.2.x kernels (see the <ulink +url="&disturl;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/MANIFEST">MANIFEST</ulink>). + +</para> +<para> + +All of the m68k images for use with 2.2.x kernels, require the kernel +parameter &ramdisksize;. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml b/en/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e4f4e486 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<!-- commented out as it seems out of date and the links are broken + + <sect3 arch="powerpc" id="newworld-install-files"> + <title>NewWorld MacOS Installation Files </title> +<para> + +For floppy-less installation on NewWorld Macs, it may be most +convenient to obtain all the necessary files packaged into one Stuffit +archive from +<ulink url="&url-powerpc-of;"></ulink> (separate instructions are +included in the archive). Otherwise, obtain the normal installation +files listed above. Retrieve the files to an HFS (not HFS+) partition +on your system. You will also need the <filename>yaboot</filename> and +<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> files from the +<ulink url="&downloadable-file;new-powermac/">new-powermac</ulink> or +<ulink url="&downloadable-file;powermac/">powermac</ulink> archive folder. +However, the newest G4 PowerMacs, and those that work without MacOS 9, +need the newest version of <command>yaboot</command>; the one in the +archive will not work. Obtain the newest version from +<ulink url="http://penguinppc.org/projects/yaboot/"></ulink>. + +</para> + </sect3> + +--> diff --git a/en/install-methods/downloading-files.xml b/en/install-methods/downloading-files.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..295697a37 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/downloading-files.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="downloading-files"> + <title>Downloading Files from Debian Mirrors</title> + +<para> + +To find the nearest (and thus probably the fastest) mirror, see the +<ulink url="&url-debian-mirrors;">list of Debian mirrors</ulink>. + +</para><para> + +When downloading files from a Debian mirror, be sure to download the +files in <emphasis>binary</emphasis> mode, not text or automatic +mode. + +</para> + + <sect2 id="where-files"> + <title>Where to Find Installation Images</title> + +<para> +The installation images are located on each Debian mirror in the directory +<ulink url="&url-debian-installer;/images">debian/dists/&releasename;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/</ulink> +— the <ulink url="&url-debian-installer;/images/MANIFEST">MANIFEST</ulink> +lists each image and its purpose. +</para> + +&download-alpha.xml; +&download-arm.xml; +&download-powerpc.xml; +&download-m68k.xml; + + </sect2> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml b/en/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fa2f1cd81 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + +<!-- This is not set off for i386 only, because many people will have --> +<!-- access to a PC in order to make a floppy for other arches. --> + + <sect2><title>Writing Disk Images From DOS, Windows, or OS/2</title> + +<para> + +If you have access to an i386 machine, you can use one of the +following programs to copy images to floppies. + +</para><para> + +The <command>rawrite1</command> and <command>rawrite2</command> programs +can be used under MS-DOS. To use these programs, first make sure that you +are booted into DOS. Trying to use these programs from within a DOS box in +Windows, or double-clicking on these programs from the Windows Explorer is +<emphasis>not</emphasis> expected to work. + +</para><para> + +The <command>rwwrtwin</command> program runs on Windows 95, NT, 98, 2000, +ME, XP and probably later versions. To use it you will need to unpack +diskio.dll in the same directory. + +</para><para> + +These tools can be found on the Official Debian CD-ROMs under the +<filename>/tools</filename> directory. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml b/en/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b9f42e14 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Writing Disk Images on Atari Systems</title> +<para> + +You'll find the &rawwrite.ttp; program in the same directory as the +floppy disk images. Start the program by double clicking on the +program icon, and type in the name of the floppy image file you want +written to the floppy at the TOS program command line dialog box. + +</para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Writing Disk Images on Macintosh Systems</title> +<para> + +There is no MacOS application to write images to floppy disks +(and there would be no point in doing this as you can't use these +floppies to boot the installation system or install kernel and modules +from on Macintosh). However, these files are needed for the +installation of the operating system and modules, later in the +process. + +</para> + + </sect2> diff --git a/en/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml b/en/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a4c272647 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>Writing Disk Images From MacOS</title> +<para> + +An AppleScript, <application>Make Debian Floppy</application>, is +available for burning floppies from the provided disk image files. It +can be downloaded from +<ulink url="ftp://ftp2.sourceforge.net/pub/sourceforge/d/de/debian-imac/MakeDebianFloppy.sit"></ulink>. To +use it, just unstuff it on your desktop, and then drag any floppy +image file to it. You must have Applescript installed and enabled in +your extensions manager. Disk Copy will ask you to confirm that you +wish to erase the floppy and proceed to write the file image to it. + +</para><para> + +You can also use the MacOS utility <command>Disk Copy</command> +directly, or the freeware utility <command>suntar</command>. The +<filename>root.bin</filename> file is an example of a floppy +image. Use one of the following methods to create a floppy from the +floppy image with these utilities. + +</para> + + <sect3> + <title>Writing Disk Images with <command>Disk Copy</command></title> +<para> + +If you are creating the floppy image from files which were originally +on the official &debian; CD, then the Type and Creator are already set +correctly. The following <command>Creator-Changer</command> steps are +only necessary if you downloaded the image files from a Debian mirror. + +</para> +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Obtain +<ulink url="&url-powerpc-creator-changer;">Creator-Changer</ulink> +and use it to open the <filename>root.bin</filename> file. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Change the Creator to <userinput>ddsk</userinput> (Disk Copy), and the +Type to <userinput>DDim</userinput> (binary floppy image). The case is +sensitive for these fields. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<emphasis>Important:</emphasis> In the Finder, use <userinput>Get +Info</userinput> to display the Finder information about the floppy +image, and <quote>X</quote> the <userinput>File Locked</userinput> check box so +that MacOS will be unable to remove the boot blocks if the image is +accidentally mounted. + +</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> + +Obtain <command>Disk Copy</command>; if you have a MacOS system or CD it +will very likely be there already, otherwise try +<ulink url="&url-powerpc-diskcopy;"></ulink>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Run <command>Disk Copy</command>, and select <menuchoice> +<guimenu>Utilities</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Make a Floppy</guimenuitem> +</menuchoice>, then select the +<emphasis>locked</emphasis> image file from the resulting dialog. It +will ask you to insert a floppy, then ask if you really want to erase +it. When done it should eject the floppy. + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + + </sect3> + + <sect3> + <title>Writing Disk Images with <command>suntar</command></title> +<para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Obtain <command>suntar</command> from <ulink url="&url-powerpc-suntar;"> +</ulink>. Start the <command>suntar</command> program and select +<quote>Overwrite Sectors...</quote> from the <userinput>Special</userinput> +menu. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Insert the floppy disk as requested, then hit &enterkey; (start at +sector 0). + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Select the <filename>root.bin</filename> file in the file-opening dialog. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +After the floppy has been created successfully, select <menuchoice> +<guimenu>File</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Eject</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. +If there are any errors writing the floppy, simply toss that floppy and +try another. + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +Before using the floppy you created, <emphasis>set the write protect +tab</emphasis>! Otherwise if you accidentally mount it in MacOS, +MacOS will helpfully ruin it. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/install-methods/install-methods.xml b/en/install-methods/install-methods.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47ff9c1bc --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/install-methods.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<chapter id="install-methods"> + <title>Obtaining System Installation Media</title> + +&official-cdrom.xml; +&downloading-files.xml; +&ipl-tape.xml; +&create-floppy.xml; +&boot-usb-files.xml; +&boot-drive-files.xml; +&install-tftp.xml; +&automatic-install.xml; + +</chapter> diff --git a/en/install-methods/install-tftp.xml b/en/install-methods/install-tftp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bfe2f744 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/install-tftp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,430 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 condition="supports-tftp" id="install-tftp"> + <title>Preparing Files for TFTP Net Booting</title> +<para> + +If your machine is connected to a local area network, you may be able +to boot it over the network from another machine, using TFTP. If you +intend to boot the installation system from another machine, the +boot files will need to be placed in specific locations on that machine, +and the machine configured to support booting of your specific machine. + +</para><para> + +You need to setup a TFTP server, and for many machines, a BOOTP server +<phrase condition="supports-rarp">, or RARP server</phrase> +<phrase condition="supports-dhcp">, or DHCP server</phrase>. + +</para><para> + +<phrase condition="supports-rarp">The Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP) is +one way to tell your client what IP address to use for itself. Another +way is to use the BOOTP protocol. </phrase> + +<phrase condition="supports-bootp">BOOTP is an IP protocol that +informs a computer of its IP address and where on the network to obtain +a boot image. </phrase> + +<phrase arch="m68k"> Yet another alternative exists on VMEbus +systems: the IP address can be manually configured in boot ROM. </phrase> + +<phrase condition="supports-dhcp">The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration +Protocol) is a more flexible, backwards-compatible extension of BOOTP. +Some systems can only be configured via DHCP. </phrase> + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +For PowerPC, if you have a NewWorld Power Macintosh machine, it is a +good idea to use DHCP instead of BOOTP. Some of the latest machines +are unable to boot using BOOTP. + +</para><para arch="alpha"> + +Unlike the Open Firmware found on Sparc and PowerPC machines, the SRM +console will <emphasis>not</emphasis> use RARP to obtain its IP +address, and therefore you must use BOOTP for net booting your +Alpha<footnote> + +<para> +Alpha systems can also be net-booted using the DECNet MOP (Maintenance +Operations Protocol), but this is not covered here. Presumably, your +local OpenVMS operator will be happy to assist you should you have +some burning need to use MOP to boot Linux on your Alpha. +</para> + +</footnote>. You can also enter the IP configuration for network +interfaces directly in the SRM console. + +</para><para arch="hppa"> + +Some older HPPA machines (e.g. 715/75) use RBOOTD rather than BOOTP. +There is an <classname>rbootd</classname> package available in Debian. + +</para><para> + +The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used to serve the boot +image to the client. Theoretically, any server, on any platform, +which implements these protocols, may be used. In the examples in +this section, we shall provide commands for SunOS 4.x, SunOS 5.x +(a.k.a. Solaris), and GNU/Linux. + +<note arch="i386"><para> + +To use the Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP +booting, you will need a TFTP server with <userinput>tsize</userinput> +support. On a &debian; server, the <classname>atftpd</classname> and +<classname>tftpd-hpa</classname> packages qualify; we recommend +<classname>tftpd-hpa</classname>. + +</para></note> + +</para> + +&tftp-rarp.xml; +&tftp-bootp.xml; +&tftp-dhcp.xml; + + <sect2 id="tftpd"> + <title>Enabling the TFTP Server</title> +<para> + +To get the TFTP server ready to go, you should first make sure that +<command>tftpd</command> is enabled. This is usually enabled by having +something like the following line in <filename>/etc/inetd.conf</filename>: + +<informalexample><screen> +tftp dgram udp wait nobody /usr/sbin/tcpd in.tftpd /tftpboot +</screen></informalexample> + +Debian packages will in general set this up correctly by default when they +are installed. + +</para><para> + +Look in that file and remember the directory which is used as the +argument of <command>in.tftpd</command>; you'll need that below. The +<userinput>-l</userinput> argument enables some versions of +<command>in.tftpd</command> to log all requests to the system logs; +this is useful for diagnosing boot errors. If you've had to change +<filename>/etc/inetd.conf</filename>, you'll have to notify the +running <command>inetd</command> process that the file has changed. +On a Debian machine, run <userinput>/etc/init.d/inetd +reload</userinput>; on other machines, +find out the process ID for <command>inetd</command>, and run +<userinput>kill -HUP <replaceable>inetd-pid</replaceable></userinput>. + +</para><para arch="mips"> + +If you intend to install Debian on an SGI machine and your TFTP server is a +GNU/Linux box running Linux 2.4, you'll need to set the following on your +server: + +<informalexample><screen> +# echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_no_pmtu_disc +</screen></informalexample> + +to turn off Path MTU discovery, otherwise the Indy's PROM can't +download the kernel. Furthermore, make sure TFTP packets are sent from +a source port no greater than 32767, or the download will stall after +the first packet. Again, it's Linux 2.4.X tripping this bug in the +PROM, and you can avoid it by setting + +<informalexample><screen> +# echo "2048 32767" > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_port_range +</screen></informalexample> + +to adjust the range of source ports the Linux TFTP server uses. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="tftp-images"> + <title>Move TFTP Images Into Place</title> +<para> + +Next, place the TFTP boot image you need, as found in +<xref linkend="where-files"/>, in the <command>tftpd</command> +boot image directory. Generally, this directory will be +<filename>/tftpboot</filename>. You'll have to make a link from that +file to the file which <command>tftpd</command> will use for booting a +particular client. Unfortunately, the file name is determined by the +TFTP client, and there are no strong standards. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +On NewWorld Power Macintosh machines, you will need to set up the +<command>yaboot</command> boot loader as the TFTP boot image. +<command>Yaboot</command> will then retrieve the kernel and RAMdisk +images via TFTP itself. For net booting, use the +<filename>yaboot-netboot.conf</filename>. Just rename this to +<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> in the TFTP directory. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the +<filename>netboot/netboot.tar.gz</filename> tarball. Simply extract this +tarball into the <command>tftpd</command> boot image directory. Make sure +your dhcp server is configured to pass <filename>/pxelinux.0</filename> +to <command>tftpd</command> as the filename to boot. + +</para><para arch="ia64"> + +For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the +<filename>netboot/netboot.tar.gz</filename> tarball. Simply extract this +tarball into the <command>tftpd</command> boot image directory. Make sure +your dhcp server is configured to pass +<filename>/debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi</filename> +to <command>tftpd</command> as the filename to boot. + +</para> + + <sect3 arch="mipsel"> + <title>DECstation TFTP Images</title> +<para> + +For DECstations, there are tftpimage files for each subarchitecture, +which contain both kernel and installer in one file. The naming +convention is <replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable>/netboot-boot.img. +Copy the tftpimage file you would like to use to +<userinput>/tftpboot/tftpboot.img</userinput> if you work with the +example BOOTP/DHCP setups described above. + +</para><para> + +The DECstation firmware boots by TFTP with the command <userinput>boot +<replaceable>#</replaceable>/tftp</userinput>, where +<replaceable>#</replaceable> is the number of the TurboChannel device +from which to boot. On most DECstations this is <quote>3</quote>. If the +BOOTP/DHCP server does not supply the filename or you need to pass +additional parameters, they can optionally be appended with the +following syntax: + +</para><para> + +<userinput>boot #/tftp/filename param1=value1 param2=value2 ...</userinput> + +</para><para> + +Several DECstation firmware revisions show a problem with regard to +net booting: the transfer starts, but after some time it stops with +an <computeroutput>a.out err</computeroutput>. This can have several reasons: + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +The firmware does not respond to ARP requests during a TFTP +transfer. This leads to an ARP timeout and the transfer stops. The +solution is to add the MAC address of the Ethernet card in the +DECstation statically to the ARP table of the TFTP server. This is +done by running <userinput>arp -s +<replaceable>IP-address</replaceable> +<replaceable>MAC-address</replaceable></userinput> as root on the +machine acting as TFTP server. The MAC-address of the DECstation can +be read out by entering <command>cnfg</command> at the DECstation +firmware prompt. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The firmware has a size limit on the files that can be booted +by TFTP. + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +There are also firmware revisions that cannot boot via TFTP at all. An +overview about the different firmware revisions can be found at the +NetBSD web pages: +<ulink url="http://www.netbsd.org/Ports/pmax/board-list.html#proms"></ulink>. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="alpha"> + <title>Alpha TFTP Booting</title> +<para> +On Alpha, you must specify the filename (as a relative path to the +boot image directory) using the <userinput>-file</userinput> argument +to the SRM <userinput>boot</userinput> command, or by setting the +<userinput>BOOT_FILE</userinput> environment variable. Alternatively, +the filename can be given via BOOTP (in ISC <command>dhcpd</command>, +use the <userinput>filename</userinput> directive). Unlike Open +Firmware, there is <emphasis>no default filename</emphasis> on SRM, so +you <emphasis>must</emphasis> specify a filename by either one of +these methods. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="sparc"> + <title>SPARC TFTP Booting</title> +<para> + +SPARC architectures for instance use the subarchitecture names, such +as <quote>SUN4M</quote> or <quote>SUN4C</quote>; in some cases, the +architecture is left blank, so the file the client looks for is just +<filename>client-ip-in-hex</filename>. Thus, if your system +subarchitecture is a SUN4C, and its IP is 192.168.1.3, the filename +would be <filename>C0A80103.SUN4C</filename>. An easy way to determine +this is to enter the following command in a shell (assuming the +machine's intended IP is 10.0.0.4). + +<informalexample><screen> +$ printf '%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x\n' 10 0 0 4 +</screen></informalexample> + +This will spit out the IP in hexadecimal; to get to the correct +filename, you will need to change all letters to uppercase and +if necessary append the subarchitecture name. + +</para><para> + +You can also force some sparc systems to look for a specific file name +by adding it to the end of the OpenPROM boot command, such as +<userinput>boot net my-sparc.image</userinput>. This must still reside +in the directory that the TFTP server looks in. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="m68k"> + <title>BVM/Motorola TFTP Booting</title> +<para> + +For BVM and Motorola VMEbus systems copy the files +&bvme6000-tftp-files; to <filename>/tftpboot/</filename>. + +</para><para> + +Next, configure your boot ROMs or BOOTP server to initially load the +<filename>tftplilo.bvme</filename> or +<filename>tftplilo.mvme</filename> files from the TFTP server. Refer +to the <filename>tftplilo.txt</filename> file for your subarchitecture +for additional system-specific configuration information. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="mips"> + <title>SGI Indys TFTP Booting</title> +<para> + +On SGI Indys you can rely on the <command>bootpd</command> to supply +the name of the TFTP file. It is given either as the +<userinput>bf=</userinput> in <filename>/etc/bootptab</filename> or as +the <userinput>filename=</userinput> option in +<filename>/etc/dhcpd.conf</filename>. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="mips"> + <title>Broadcom BCM91250A TFTP Booting</title> +<para> + +You don't have to configure DHCP in a special way because you'll pass the +full path of the file to the loaded to CFE. + +</para> + </sect3> + + </sect2> + +<!-- FIXME: commented out since it seems too old to be usable and a current + way is not known + + <sect2 id="tftp-low-memory"> + <title>TFTP Installation for Low-Memory Systems</title> +<para> + +On some systems, the standard installation RAMdisk, combined with the +memory requirements of the TFTP boot image, cannot fit in memory. In +this case, you can still install using TFTP, you'll just have to go +through the additional step of NFS mounting your root directory over +the network as well. This type of setup is also appropriate for +diskless or dataless clients. + +</para><para> + +First, follow all the steps above in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Copy the Linux kernel image on your TFTP server using the +<userinput>a.out</userinput> image for the architecture you are +booting. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Untar the root archive on your NFS server (can be the same system as +your TFTP server): + +<informalexample><screen> +# cd /tftpboot +# tar xvzf root.tar.gz +</screen></informalexample> + +Be sure to use the GNU <command>tar</command> (other tar programs, like the +SunOS one, badly handle devices as plain files). + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Export your <filename>/tftpboot/debian-sparc-root</filename> directory +with root access to your client. E.g., add the following line to +<filename>/etc/exports</filename> (GNU/Linux syntax, should be similar +for SunOS): + +<informalexample><screen> +/tftpboot/debian-sparc-root <replaceable>client</replaceable>(rw,no_root_squash) +</screen></informalexample> + +NOTE: <replaceable>client</replaceable> is the host name or IP address recognized +by the server for the system you are booting. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Create a symbolic link from your client IP address in dotted notation +to <filename>debian-sparc-root</filename> in the +<filename>/tftpboot</filename> directory. For example, if the client +IP address is 192.168.1.3, do + +<informalexample><screen> +# ln -s debian-sparc-root 192.168.1.3 +</screen></informalexample> + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 condition="supports-nfsroot"> + <title>Installing with TFTP and NFS Root</title> +<para> + +Installing with TFTP and NFS Root is similar to +<xref linkend="tftp-low-memory"/> because you don't want to +load the RAMdisk anymore but boot from the newly created NFS-root file +system. You then need to replace the symlink to the tftpboot image by +a symlink to the kernel image (for example, +<filename>linux-a.out</filename>). + +</para><para> + +RARP/TFTP requires all daemons to be running on the same server (the +workstation is sending a TFTP request back to the server that replied +to its previous RARP request). + +</para> + + + </sect2> +END FIXME --> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml b/en/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..383a302fc --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 arch="s390" id="ipl-tape"> + <title>Creating an IPL tape</title> + +<para> + +If you can't boot (IPL) from the CD-ROM and you are not using VM +you need to create an IPL tape first. This is described in section +3.4.3 in the +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions</ulink> +Redbook. The files you +need to write to the tape are (in this order): +<filename>kernel.debian</filename>, +<filename>parmfile.debian</filename> and +<filename>initrd.debian</filename>. The files can be downloaded +from the <filename>tape</filename> sub-directory, see +<xref linkend="where-files"/>, + +</para> + </sect1> + diff --git a/en/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml b/en/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b8c44901 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="official-cdrom"> + <title>Official &debian; CD-ROM Sets</title> +<para> + +By far the easiest way to install &debian; is from an Official +Debian CD-ROM Set. You can buy a set from a vendor (see the +<ulink url="&url-debian-cd-vendors;">CD vendors page</ulink>). +You may also download the CD-ROM images from a Debian mirror and make +your own set, if you have a fast network connection and a CD burner +(see the <ulink url="&url-debian-cd;">Debian CD page</ulink> for +detailed instructions). If you have a Debian CD set and CDs are +bootable on your machine, you can skip right to +<xref linkend="boot-installer"/>; much effort has been expended to ensure +the files most people need are there on the CD. Although a full set of +binary packages requires several CDs, it is unlikely you will need +packages on the third CD and above. You may also consider using the +DVD version, which saves a lot of space on your shelf and you avoid +the CD shuffling marathon. + +</para><para> + +If your machine doesn't support CD booting, but you do have a CD set, +you can use an alternative strategy such as + +<phrase condition="supports-floppy-boot">floppy disk,</phrase> + +<phrase arch="s390">tape, emulated tape,</phrase> + +<phrase condition="bootable-disk">hard disk,</phrase> + +<phrase condition="bootable-usb">usb stick,</phrase> + +<phrase condition="supports-tftp">net boot,</phrase> + +or manually loading the kernel from the CD to initially boot the +system installer. The files you need for booting by another means are +also on the CD; the Debian network archive and CD folder organization +are identical. So when archive file paths are given below for +particular files you need for booting, look for those files in the +same directories and subdirectories on your CD. + +</para><para> + +Once the installer is booted, it will be able to obtain all the other +files it needs from the CD. + +</para><para> + +If you don't have a CD set, then you will need to download the +installer system files and place them on the + +<phrase arch="s390">installation tape</phrase> + +<phrase condition="supports-floppy-boot">floppy disk or</phrase> + +<phrase condition="bootable-disk">hard disk or</phrase> + +<phrase condition="bootable-usb">usb stick or</phrase> + +<phrase condition="supports-tftp">a connected computer</phrase> + +so they can be used to boot the installer. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml b/en/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..110d2405d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 condition="supports-bootp" id="tftp-bootp"> + <title>Setting up BOOTP server</title> +<para> + +There are two BOOTP servers available for GNU/Linux, the CMU +<command>bootpd</command> and the other is actually a DHCP server, ISC +<command>dhcpd</command>, which are contained in the +<classname>bootp</classname> and <classname>dhcp</classname> packages +in &debian;. + +</para><para> + +To use CMU <command>bootpd</command>, you must first uncomment (or +add) the relevant line in <filename>/etc/inetd.conf</filename>. On +&debian;, you can run <userinput>update-inetd --enable +bootps</userinput>, then <userinput>/etc/init.d/inetd +reload</userinput> to do so. Elsewhere, the line in question should +look like: + +<informalexample><screen> +bootps dgram udp wait root /usr/sbin/bootpd bootpd -i -t 120 +</screen></informalexample> + +Now, you must create an <filename>/etc/bootptab</filename> file. This +has the same sort of familiar and cryptic format as the good old BSD +<filename>printcap</filename>, <filename>termcap</filename>, and +<filename>disktab</filename> files. See the +<filename>bootptab</filename> manual page for more information. For +CMU <command>bootpd</command>, you will need to know the hardware +(MAC) address of the client. Here is an example +<filename>/etc/bootptab</filename>: + +<informalexample><screen> +client:\ + hd=/tftpboot:\ + bf=tftpboot.img:\ + ip=192.168.1.90:\ + sm=255.255.255.0:\ + sa=192.168.1.1:\ + ha=0123456789AB: +</screen></informalexample> + +You will need to change at least the <quote>ha</quote> option, which +specifies the hardware address of the client. The <quote>bf</quote> +option specifies the file a client should retrieve via TFTP; see +<xref linkend="tftp-images"/> for more details. + +<phrase arch="mips"> +On SGI Indys you can just enter the command monitor and type +<userinput>printenv</userinput>. The value of the +<userinput>eaddr</userinput> variable is the machine's MAC address. +</phrase> + +</para><para> + +By contrast, setting up BOOTP with ISC <command>dhcpd</command> is +really easy, because it treats BOOTP clients as a moderately special +case of DHCP clients. Some architectures require a complex +configuration for booting clients via BOOTP. If yours is one of +those, read the section <xref linkend="dhcpd"/>. Otherwise, you +will probably be able to get away with simply adding the +<userinput>allow bootp</userinput> directive to the configuration +block for the subnet containing the client, and restart +<command>dhcpd</command> with <userinput>/etc/init.d/dhcpd +restart</userinput>. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml b/en/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee18f73e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect2 condition="supports-dhcp" id="dhcpd"> + <title>Setting up a DHCP server</title> +<para> + +One free software DHCP server is ISC <command>dhcpd</command>. +In &debian;, this is available in the <classname>dhcp</classname> package. +Here is a sample configuration file for it (usually +<filename>/etc/dhcpd.conf</filename>): + +<informalexample><screen> +option domain-name "example.com"; +option domain-name-servers ns1.example.com; +option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0; +default-lease-time 600; +max-lease-time 7200; +server-name "servername"; + +subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { + range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253; + option routers 192.168.1.1; +} + +host clientname { + filename "/tftpboot/tftpboot.img"; + server-name "servername"; + next-server servername; + hardware ethernet 01:23:45:67:89:AB; + fixed-address 192.168.1.90; +} +</screen></informalexample> + +Note: the new (and preferred) <classname>dhcp3</classname> package uses +<filename>/etc/dhcp3/dhcpd.conf</filename>. + +</para><para> + +In this example, there is one server +<replaceable>servername</replaceable> which performs all of the work +of DHCP server, TFTP server, and network gateway. You will almost +certainly need to change the domain-name options, as well as the +server name and client hardware address. The +<replaceable>filename</replaceable> option should be the name of the +file which will be retrieved via TFTP. + +</para><para> + +After you have edited the <command>dhcpd</command> configuration file, +restart it with <userinput>/etc/init.d/dhcpd restart</userinput>. + +</para> + + <sect3 arch="i386"> + <title>Enabling PXE Booting in the DHCP configuration</title> +<para> +Here is another example for a <filename>dhcp.conf</filename> using the +Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP. + +<informalexample><screen> +option domain-name "example.com"; + +default-lease-time 600; +max-lease-time 7200; + +allow booting; +allow bootp; + +# The next paragraph needs to be modified to fit your case +subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { + range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253; + option broadcast-address 192.168.1.255; +# the gateway address which can be different +# (access to the internet for instance) + option routers 192.168.1.1; +# indicate the dns you want to use + option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.3; +} + +group { + next-server 192.168.1.3; + host tftpclient { +# tftp client hardware address + hardware ethernet 00:10:DC:27:6C:15; + filename "/tftpboot/pxelinux.0"; + } +} +</screen></informalexample> + +Note that for PXE booting, the client filename <filename>pxelinux.0</filename> +is a boot loader, not a kernel image (see <xref linkend="tftp-images"/> +below). + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml b/en/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e59b94587 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 condition="supports-rarp" id="tftp-rarp"> + <title>Setting up RARP server</title> +<para> + +To setup RARP, you need to know the Ethernet address (a.k.a. the MAC address) +of the client computers to be installed. +If you don't know this information, you can + +<phrase arch="sparc"> pick it off the initial OpenPROM boot messages, use the +OpenBoot <userinput>.enet-addr</userinput> command, or </phrase> + +boot into <quote>Rescue</quote> mode (e.g., from the rescue floppy) and use the +command <userinput>/sbin/ifconfig eth0</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +On a RARP server system using a Linux 2.2.x kernel, +you need to populate the kernel's RARP table. +To do this, run the following commands: + +<informalexample><screen> +# <userinput>/sbin/rarp -s +<replaceable>client-hostname</replaceable> +<replaceable>client-enet-addr</replaceable></userinput> + +# <userinput>/usr/sbin/arp -s +<replaceable>client-ip</replaceable> +<replaceable>client-enet-addr</replaceable></userinput> +</screen></informalexample> + +If you get + +<informalexample><screen> +SIOCSRARP: Invalid argument +</screen></informalexample> + +you probably need to load the RARP kernel module or else recompile the +kernel to support RARP. Try <userinput>modprobe rarp</userinput> and +then try the <command>rarp</command> command again. + +</para><para> + +On a RARP server system using a Linux 2.4.x kernel, +there is no RARP module, and +you should instead use the <command>rarpd</command> program. The +procedure is similar to that used under SunOS in the following +paragraph. + +</para><para> + +Under SunOS, you need to ensure that the Ethernet hardware address for +the client is listed in the <quote>ethers</quote> database (either in the +<filename>/etc/ethers</filename> file, or via NIS/NIS+) and in the +<quote>hosts</quote> database. Then you need to start the RARP daemon. +In SunOS 4, issue the command (as root): +<userinput>/usr/etc/rarpd -a</userinput>; in SunOS 5, use +<userinput>/usr/sbin/rarpd -a</userinput>. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml b/en/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1b89606f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="i386"> + <title>USB stick partitioning on &arch-title;</title> +<para> + +We will show how to setup the memory stick to use the first partition, +instead of the entire device. + +</para><note><para> + +Since most USB sticks come pre-configured with a single FAT16 +partition, you probably won't have to repartition or reformat the +stick. If you have to do that anyway, use <command>cfdisk</command> +or any other partitioning tool for creating a FAT16 partition and then +create the filesystem using: + +<informalexample><screen> +# mkdosfs /dev/<replaceable>sda1</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The +<command>mkdosfs</command> command is contained in the +<classname>dosfstools</classname> Debian package. + +</para></note><para> + +In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will +put a boot loader on the stick. Although any boot loader +(e.g. <command>LILO</command>) should work, it's convenient to use +<command>SYSLINUX</command>, since it uses a FAT16 partition and can +be reconfigured by just editing a text file. Any operating system +which supports the FAT file system can be used to make changes to the +configuration of the boot loader. + +</para><para> + +To put <command>SYSLINUX</command> on the FAT16 partition on your USB +stick, install the <classname>syslinux</classname> and +<classname>mtools</classname> packages on your system, and do: + +<informalexample><screen> +# syslinux /dev/<replaceable>sda1</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition +must not be mounted when starting <command>SYSLINUX</command>. This +procedure writes a boot sector to the partition and creates the file +<filename>ldlinux.sys</filename> which contains the boot loader code. + +</para><para> + +Mount the partition (<userinput>mount /dev/sda1 /mnt</userinput>) and +copy the following files from the Debian archives to the stick: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>vmlinuz</filename> (kernel binary) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>initrd.gz</filename> (initial ramdisk image) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>syslinux.cfg</filename> (SYSLINUX configuration file) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Optional kernel modules + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +If you want to rename the files, please note that +<command>SYSLINUX</command> can only process DOS (8.3) file names. + +</para><para> + +The <filename>syslinux.cfg</filename> configuration file should +contain the following two lines: + +<informalexample><screen> +default vmlinuz +append initrd=initrd.gz ramdisk_size=12000 root=/dev/rd/0 init=/linuxrc rw +</screen></informalexample> + +Please note that the <userinput>ramdisk_size</userinput> parameter +may need to be increased, depending on the image you are booting. +<phrase condition="sarge"> +If the boot fails, you can try adding <userinput>devfs=mount,dall</userinput> +to the <quote>append</quote> line. +</phrase> + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml b/en/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12e1284b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="powerpc"> + <title>USB stick partitioning on &arch-title;</title> +<para> + +Most USB sticks do not come pre-configured in such a way that Open +Firmware can boot from them, so you will need to repartition the stick. +On Mac systems, run <userinput>mac-fdisk /dev/sda</userinput>, +initialise a new partition map using the <userinput>i</userinput> +command, and create a new partition of type Apple_Bootstrap using the +<userinput>C</userinput> command. (Note that the first "partition" will +always be the partition map itself.) Then type + +<informalexample><screen> +$ hformat /dev/<replaceable>sda2</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample> + +Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The +<command>hformat</command> command is contained in the +<classname>hfsutils</classname> Debian package. + +</para><para> + +In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will +put a boot loader on the stick. The <command>yaboot</command> boot +loader can be installed on an HFS filesystem and can be reconfigured by +just editing a text file. Any operating system which supports the HFS +file system can be used to make changes to the configuration of the boot +loader. + +</para><para> + +The normal <command>ybin</command> tool that comes with +<command>yaboot</command> does not yet understand USB storage devices, +so you will have to install <command>yaboot</command> by hand using the +<classname>hfsutils</classname> tools. Type + +<informalexample><screen> +$ hmount /dev/sda2 +$ hcopy -r /usr/lib/yaboot/yaboot : +$ hattrib -c UNIX -t tbxi :yaboot +$ hattrib -b : +$ humount +</screen></informalexample> + +Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition +must not be otherwise mounted during this procedure. This procedure +writes the boot loader to the partition, and uses the HFS utilities to +mark it in such a way that Open Firmware will boot it. Having done this, +the rest of the USB stick may be prepared using the normal Unix +utilities. + +</para><para> + +Mount the partition (<userinput>mount /dev/sda2 /mnt</userinput>) and +copy the following files from the Debian archives to the stick: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>vmlinux</filename> (kernel binary) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>initrd.gz</filename> (initial ramdisk image) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> (yaboot configuration file) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>boot.msg</filename> (optional boot message) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Optional kernel modules + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para> + +The <filename>yaboot.conf</filename> configuration file should +contain the following lines: + +<informalexample><screen> +default=install +root=/dev/ram + +message=/boot.msg + +image=/vmlinux + label=install + initrd=/initrd.gz + initrd-size=10000<phrase condition="sarge"> + append="devfs=mount,dall --"</phrase> + read-only +</screen></informalexample> + +Please note that the <userinput>initrd-size</userinput> parameter +may need to be increased, depending on the image you are booting. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/partitioning/device-names.xml b/en/partitioning/device-names.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3190bc8f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/device-names.xml @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1 id="device-names"> + <title>Device Names in Linux</title> +<para> + +Linux disks and partition names may be different from other operating +systems. You need to know the names that Linux uses when you create +and mount partitions. Here's the basic naming scheme: + +</para> +<itemizedlist arch="not-s390"> +<listitem><para> + +The first floppy drive is named <filename>/dev/fd0</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The second floppy drive is named <filename>/dev/fd1</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The first SCSI disk (SCSI ID address-wise) is named +<filename>/dev/sda</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The second SCSI disk (address-wise) is named +<filename>/dev/sdb</filename>, and so on. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The first SCSI CD-ROM is named <filename>/dev/scd0</filename>, also +known as <filename>/dev/sr0</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The master disk on IDE primary controller is named +<filename>/dev/hda</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The slave disk on IDE primary controller is named +<filename>/dev/hdb</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The master and slave disks of the secondary controller can be called +<filename>/dev/hdc</filename> and <filename>/dev/hdd</filename>, +respectively. Newer IDE controllers can actually have two channels, +effectively acting like two controllers. + +<phrase arch="m68k"> +The letters may differ from what shows in the mac program pdisk +(i.e. what shows up as <filename>/dev/hdc</filename> on pdisk may show +up as <filename>/dev/hda</filename> in Debian). +</phrase> + +</para></listitem> + +<listitem arch="i386"><para> + +The first XT disk is named <filename>/dev/xda</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem arch="i386"><para> + +The second XT disk is named <filename>/dev/xdb</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem arch="m68k"><para> + +The first ACSI device is named <filename>/dev/ada</filename>, the +second is named <filename>/dev/adb</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<itemizedlist arch="s390"> +<listitem><para> + +The first DASD device is named +<filename>/dev/dasda</filename>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The second DASD device is named +<filename>/dev/dasdb</filename>, and so on. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para arch="not-s390"> + +The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal +number to the disk name: <filename>sda1</filename> and +<filename>sda2</filename> represent the first and +second partitions of the first SCSI disk drive in your system. + +</para><para arch="not-s390"> + +Here is a real-life example. Let's assume you have a system with 2 +SCSI disks, one at SCSI address 2 and the other at SCSI address 4. +The first disk (at address 2) is then named <filename>sda</filename>, +and the second <filename>sdb</filename>. If the +<filename>sda</filename> drive has 3 partitions on it, these will be +named <filename>sda1</filename>, <filename>sda2</filename>, and +<filename>sda3</filename>. The same applies to the +<filename>sdb</filename> disk and its partitions. + +</para><para arch="not-s390"> + +Note that if you have two SCSI host bus adapters (i.e., controllers), +the order of the drives can get confusing. The best solution in this +case is to watch the boot messages, assuming you know the drive models +and/or capacities. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +Linux represents the primary partitions as the drive name, plus the +numbers 1 through 4. For example, the first primary partition on the +first IDE drive is <filename>/dev/hda1</filename>. The logical partitions are +numbered starting at 5, so the first logical partition on that same +drive is <filename>/dev/hda5</filename>. Remember that the extended +partition, that is, the primary partition holding the logical +partitions, is not usable by itself. This applies to SCSI disks as +well as IDE disks. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +VMEbus systems using the TEAC FC-1 SCSI floppy drive will see it as normal +SCSI disk. To make identification of the drive simpler the installation +software will create a symbolic link to the appropriate device and name +it <filename>/dev/sfd0</filename>. + +</para><para arch="sparc"> + +Sun disk partitions allow for 8 separate partitions (or slices). The +third partition is usually (and is preferred to have) the <quote>Whole +Disk</quote> partition. This partition references all of the sectors of the +disk, and is used by the boot loader (either SILO, or Sun's). + +</para><para arch="s390"> + +The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal +number to the disk name: <filename>dasda1</filename> and +<filename>dasda2</filename> represent the first and +second partitions of the first DASD device in your system. + +</para> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition-programs.xml b/en/partitioning/partition-programs.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64bc8f5e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition-programs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="partition-programs"> + <title>Debian Partitioning Programs</title> +<para> + +Several varieties of partitioning programs have been adapted by Debian +developers to work on various types of hard disks and computer +architectures. Following is a list of the program(s) applicable for +your architecture. + +</para> + +<variablelist> + +<varlistentry> +<term><command>partman</command></term> +<listitem><para> + +Recommended partitioning tool in Debian. This swiss army knife can +also resize partitions, create filesystems +<phrase arch="i386"> (<quote>format</quote> in Windows speak)</phrase> +and assign them to the mountpoints. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="fdisk.txt"> +<term><command>fdisk</command></term> +<listitem><para> + +The original Linux disk partitioner, good for gurus. + +</para><para> + +Be careful if you have existing FreeBSD partitions on your machine. +The installation kernels include support for these partitions, but the +way that <command>fdisk</command> represents them (or not) can make the +device names differ. See the +<ulink url="&url-linux-freebsd;">Linux+FreeBSD HOWTO</ulink> + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="cfdisk.txt"> +<term><command>cfdisk</command></term> +<listitem><para> + +A simple-to-use, full-screen disk partitioner for the rest of us. + +</para><para> + +Note that <command>cfdisk</command> doesn't understand FreeBSD +partitions at all, and, again, device names may differ as a result. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="atari-fdisk.txt"> +<term><command>atari-fdisk</command></term> +<listitem><para> + +Atari-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="amiga-fdisk.txt"> +<term><command>amiga-fdisk</command></term> +<listitem><para> + +Amiga-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="mac-fdisk.txt"> +<term><command>mac-fdisk</command></term> +<listitem><para> + +Mac-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="pmac-fdisk.txt"> +<term><command>pmac-fdisk</command></term> +<listitem><para> + +PowerMac-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>, also used by BVM +and Motorola VMEbus systems. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry condition="fdasd.txt"> +<term><command>fdasd</command></term> +<listitem><para> + +&arch-title; version of <command>fdisk</command>; Please read the +fdasd manual page or chapter 13 in +<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/docu/l390dd08.pdf"> +Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink> for details. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +<para> + +One of these programs will be run by default when you select +<guimenuitem>Partition a Hard Disk</guimenuitem>. If the one which is run +by default isn't the one you want, quit the partitioner, go to the shell +(<userinput>tty2</userinput>) by pressing <keycap>Alt</keycap> +and <keycap>F2</keycap> keys together, and manually type in the +name of the program you want to use (and arguments, if any). Then +skip the <guimenuitem>Partition a Hard Disk</guimenuitem> step in +<command>debian-installer</command> and continue to the next step. + +</para><para> + +If you will be working with more than 20 partitions on your ide disk, +you will need to create devices for partitions 21 and beyond. The next +step of initializing the partition will fail unless a proper device is +present. As an example, here are commands you can use in +<userinput>tty2</userinput> or under Execute A Shell to add a device +so the 21st partition can be initialized: + +<informalexample><screen> +# cd /dev +# mknod hda21 b 3 21 +# chgrp disk hda21 +# chmod 660 hda21 +</screen></informalexample> + +Booting into the new system will fail unless proper devices are present +on the target system. After installing the kernel and modules, execute: + +<informalexample><screen> +# cd /target/dev +# mknod hda21 b 3 21 +# chgrp disk hda21 +# chmod 660 hda21 +</screen></informalexample> + +<phrase arch="i386">Remember to mark your boot partition as +<quote>Bootable</quote>.</phrase> + +</para><para condition="mac-fdisk.txt"> + +One key point when partitioning for Mac type disks is that the +swap partition is identified by its name; it must be named <quote>swap</quote>. +All Mac linux partitions are the same partition type, +Apple_UNIX_SRV2. Please read the fine manual. We also suggest reading the +<ulink url="&url-mac-fdisk-tutorial;">mac-fdisk Tutorial</ulink>, which +includes steps you should take if you are sharing your disk with MacOS. + +</para> + +&partition-alpha.xml; +&partition-hppa.xml; +&partition-i386.xml; +&partition-ia64.xml; +&partition-mips.xml; +&partition-powerpc.xml; +&partition-sparc.xml; + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54378128a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para> + +Booting Debian from the SRM console (the only disk boot method supported +by &releasename;) requires you to have a BSD disk label, not a DOS +partition table, on your boot disk. (Remember, the SRM boot block is +incompatible with MS-DOS partition tables — see +<xref linkend="alpha-firmware"/>.) As a result, <command>partman</command> +creates BSD disk labels when running on &architecture;, but if your disk +has an existing DOS partition table the existing partitions will need to +be deleted before partman can convert it to use a disk label. + +</para><para> + +If you have chosen to use <command>fdisk</command> to partition your +disk, and the disk that you have selected for partitioning does not +already contain a BSD disk label, you must use the <quote>b</quote> +command to enter disk label mode. + +</para><para> + +Unless you wish to use the disk you are partitioning from Tru64 Unix +or one of the free 4.4BSD-Lite derived operating systems (FreeBSD, +OpenBSD, or NetBSD), it is suggested that you do +<emphasis>not</emphasis> make the third partition contain the whole +disk. This is not required by <command>aboot</command>, and in fact, +it may lead to confusion since the <command>swriteboot</command> +utility used to install <command>aboot</command> in the boot sector +will complain about a partition overlapping with the boot block. + +</para><para> + +Also, because <command>aboot</command> is written to the first few +sectors of the disk (currently it occupies about 70 kilobytes, or 150 +sectors), you <emphasis>must</emphasis> leave enough empty space at +the beginning of the disk for it. In the past, it was suggested that +you make a small partition at the beginning of the disk, to be left +unformatted. For the same reason mentioned above, we now suggest that +you do not do this on disks that will only be used by GNU/Linux. When +using <command>partman</command>, a small partition will still be +created for <command>aboot</command> for convenience reasons. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +For ARC installations, you should make a small FAT partition at the +beginning of the disk to contain <command>MILO</command> and +<command>linload.exe</command> — 5 megabytes should be sufficient, see +<xref linkend="non-debian-partitioning"/>. Unfortunately, making FAT +file systems from the menu is not yet supported, so you'll have to do +it manually from the shell using <command>mkdosfs</command> before +attempting to install the boot loader. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b898dd5dd --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="hppa"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para> + +PALO, the HPPA boot loader, requires a partition of type <quote>F0</quote> somewhere +in the first 2GB. This is where the boot loader and an optional kernel +and RAMdisk will be stored, so make it big enough for that — at least +4Mb (I like 8–16MB). An additional requirement of the firmware is that +the Linux kernel must reside within the first 2GB of the disk. This +is typically achieved by making the root ext2 partition fit entirely +within the first 2GB of the disk. Alternatively you can create a small +ext2 partition near the start of the disk and mount that on +<filename>/boot</filename>, since that is the directory where the Linux +kernel(s) will be stored. <filename>/boot</filename> needs to be big enough +to hold whatever kernels you might wish load; 8–16MB is generally +sufficient. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/i386.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74e8be4a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="i386"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para> + +If you have an existing other operating system such as DOS or Windows and +you want to preseve that operating system while installing Debian, you may +need to resize its partition to free up space for the Debian installation. +The installer supports resizing of both FAT and NTFS filesystems; when you +get to the installer's partitioning step, select the option to partition +manually and then simply select an existing partition and change its size. + +</para><para> + +The PC BIOS generally adds additional constraints for disk +partitioning. There is a limit to how many <quote>primary</quote> and +<quote>logical</quote> partitions a drive can contain. Additionally, with pre +1994–98 BIOSes, there are limits to where on the drive the BIOS can boot +from. More information can be found in the +<ulink url="&url-partition-howto;">Linux Partition HOWTO</ulink> and the +<ulink url="&url-phoenix-bios-faq-large-disk;">Phoenix BIOS FAQ</ulink>, but +this section will include a brief overview to help you plan most situations. + +</para><para> + +<quote>Primary</quote> partitions are the original partitioning scheme for PC +disks. However, there can only be four of them. To get past this +limitation, <quote>extended</quote> and <quote>logical</quote> partitions were invented. By +setting one of your primary partitions as an extended partition, you +can subdivide all the space allocated to that partition into logical +partitions. You can create up to 60 logical partitions per extended +partition; however, you can only have one extended partition per +drive. + +</para><para> + +Linux limits the partitions per drive to 15 partitions for SCSI disks +(3 usable primary partitions, 12 logical partitions), and 63 +partitions on an IDE drive (3 usable primary partitions, 60 logical +partitions). However the normal &debian; system provides +only 20 devices for partitions, so you may not install on partitions +higher than 20 unless you first manually create devices for those +partitions. + +</para><para> + +If you have a large IDE disk, and are using neither LBA addressing, +nor overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), +then the boot partition (the partition containing your kernel image) +must be placed within the first 1024 cylinders of your hard drive +(usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS translation). + +</para><para> + +This restriction doesn't apply if you have a BIOS newer than around +1995–98 (depending on the manufacturer) that supports the <quote>Enhanced +Disk Drive Support Specification</quote>. Both Lilo, the Linux loader, and +Debian's alternative <command>mbr</command> must use the BIOS to read the +kernel from the disk into RAM. If the BIOS int 0x13 large disk access +extensions are found to be present, they will be utilized. Otherwise, +the legacy disk access interface is used as a fall-back, and it cannot +be used to address any location on the disk higher than the 1023rd +cylinder. Once Linux is booted, no matter what BIOS your computer +has, these restrictions no longer apply, since Linux does not use the +BIOS for disk access. + +</para><para> + +If you have a large disk, you might have to use cylinder translation +techniques, which you can set from your BIOS setup program, such as +LBA (Logical Block Addressing) or CHS translation mode (<quote>Large</quote>). +More information about issues with large disks can be found in the +<ulink url="&url-large-disk-howto;">Large Disk HOWTO</ulink>. If you +are using a cylinder translation scheme, and the BIOS does not support +the large disk access extensions, then your boot partition has to fit +within the <emphasis>translated</emphasis> representation of the +1024th cylinder. + +</para><para> + +The recommended way of accomplishing this is to create a small (5–10MB +should suffice) partition at the beginning of the disk to be used as +the boot partition, and then create whatever other partitions you wish +to have, in the remaining area. This boot partition +<emphasis>must</emphasis> be mounted on <filename>/boot</filename>, +since that is the directory where the Linux kernel(s) will be stored. +This configuration will work on any system, regardless of whether LBA +or large disk CHS translation is used, and regardless of whether your +BIOS supports the large disk access extensions. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7dc396ef --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="ia64"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> + +<para> + +The <command>partman</command> disk partitioner is the default +partitioning tool for the installer. +It manages the set of partitions and their mount points to ensure +that the disks and filesystems is properly configured for a successful +installation. It actually uses the <command>parted</command> to +do the on-disk partitioning. + +</para> + + <note> + <title>EFI Recognized Formats</title> +<para> + +The IA64 EFI firmware supports two partition table (or disk label) +formats, GPT and MS-DOS. MS-DOS, the format typically used on i386 +PCs, is no longer recommended for IA64 systems. Although +the installer also provides the <command>cfdisk</command>, +you should only use the <ulink url="parted.txt"> +<command>parted</command></ulink> because only it can manage both GPT +and MS-DOS tables correctly. + +</para></note> + +<para> + +The automatic partitioning recipes for <command>partman</command> +allocate an EFI partition as the first partition on the disk. +You can also set up the partition under the <guimenuitem>Guided +partitioning</guimenuitem> from the main menu in a manner similar to +setting up a <emphasis>swap</emphasis> partition. + +</para><para> + +The <command>partman</command> partitioner will handle most disk +layouts. +For those rare cases where it is necessary to manually set up a disk, +you can use the shell as described above and run the +<command>parted</command> utility directly using its command line interface. +Assuming that you want to erase your whole disk and create a GPT table +and some partitions, then something similar to the following command +sequence could be used: + +<informalexample><screen> + mklabel gpt + mkpartfs primary fat 0 50 + mkpartfs primary linux-swap 51 1000 + mkpartfs primary ext2 1001 3000 + set 1 boot on + print + quit +</screen></informalexample> + +This creates a new partition table, and three partitions to be used as +an EFI boot partition, swap space, and a root file system. Finally it +sets the boot flag on the EFI partition. Partitions are specified in +Megabytes, with start and end offsets from the beginning of the disk. +So, for example, above we created a 1999MB ext2 file system starting +at offset 1001MB from the start of the disk. Note that formatting swap +space with <command>parted</command> can take a few minutes to +complete, as it scans the partition for bad blocks. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="ia64"><title>Boot Loader Partition Requirements</title> + +<para> + +ELILO, the ia64 boot loader, requires a partition containing a FAT +file system with the <userinput>boot</userinput> flag set. +The partition must be big enough to hold the boot loader and any +kernels or RAMdisks you may wish to boot. A minimum size would be +about 20MB, but if you expect to run with multiple kernels, then +128MB might be a better size. + +</para><para> + +The EFI Boot Manager and the EFI Shell fully support the GPT table +so the boot partition does not necessarily have to be the first +partition or even on the same disk. +This is convenient if you should forget to allocate the partition and +only find out after you have formatted the other partitions on your disk(s). +The <command>partman</command> partitioner checks for an EFI partition +at the same time it checks for a properly set up <emphasis>root</emphasis> +partition. +This gives you an opportunity to correct the disk layout before the +package install begins. +The easiest way to correct this omission is to shrink the last partition +of the disk to make enough free space for adding an EFI partition. + +</para><para> + +It is strongly recommended that you allocate the EFI boot partition +on the same disk as the <emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem. + +</para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="ia64"><title>EFI Diagnostic Partitions</title> + +<para> + +The EFI firmware is significantly more sophisticated than the usual +BIOS seen on most x86 PCs. +Some system vendors take advantage of the ability of the EFI to +access files and run programs from a hard disk filesystem to store diagnostics +and EFI based system management utilities on the hard disk. +This is a separate FAT format filesystem on the system disk. +Consult the system documentation and accessories that come with the +system for details. +The easiest time to set up a diagnostics partition is at the same time you +set up the EFI boot partition. + +</para> + + </sect2> diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/mips.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/mips.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d07499625 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/mips.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="mips"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para> + +SGI Indys require an SGI disk label in order to make the system bootable +from hard disk. It can be created in the fdisk expert menu. The thereby +created volume header(partition number 9) should be at least 3MB large. +If the volume header created is too small, you can simply delete +partition number 9 and re-add it with a different size. Note that the +volume header must start at sector 0. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0c2ee4aa --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>Partitioning Newer PowerMacs</title> +<para> + +If you are installing onto a NewWorld PowerMac you must create a +special bootstrap partition to hold the boot loader. The size of this +partition must be 800KB and its partition type must be +<emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis>. If the bootstrap partition is +not created with the <emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis> type your +machine cannot be made bootable from the hard disk. This partition +can easily be created by creating a new partition in +<command>partman</command> and telling it to use it as a <quote>NewWorld +boot partition</quote>, or in <command>mac-fdisk</command> using the +<userinput>b</userinput> command. + +</para><para> + +The special partition type Apple_Bootstrap is required to prevent +MacOS from mounting and damaging the bootstrap partition, as there are +special modifications made to it in order for OpenFirmware to boot it +automatically. + +</para><para> + +Note that the bootstrap partition is only meant to hold 3 very small +files: the <command>yaboot</command> binary, its configuration +<filename>yaboot.conf</filename>, and a first stage OpenFirmware +loader <command>ofboot.b</command>. It need not and must not be +mounted on your file system nor have kernels or anything else copied +to it. The <command>ybin</command> and <command>mkofboot</command> +utilities are used to manipulate this partition. + +</para><para> + +In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian; the bootstrap +partition should appear before other boot partitions on the disk, +especially MacOS boot partitions. The bootstrap partition should be +the first one you create. However, if you add a bootstrap partition +later, you can use <command>mac-fdisk</command>'s +<userinput>r</userinput> command to reorder the partition map so the +bootstrap partition comes right after the map (which is always +partition 1). It's the logical map order, not the physical address +order, that counts. + +</para><para> + +Apple disks normally have several small driver partitions. If you +intend to dual boot your machine with MacOSX, you should retain these +partitions and a small HFS partition (800k is the minimum size). That +is because MacOSX, on every boot, offers to initialize any disks which do +not have active MacOS partitions and driver partitions. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml b/en/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e861025e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> +<para> + +Make sure you create a <quote>Sun disk label</quote> on your boot disk. This is +the only kind of partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, +and so it's the only scheme from which you can boot. The +<keycap>s</keycap> key is used in <command>fdisk</command> to +create Sun disk labels. + +</para><para> + +Furthermore, on &arch-title; disks, make sure your first partition on +your boot disk starts at cylinder 0. While this is required, it also +means that the first partition will contain the partition table and +the boot block, which are the first two sectors of the disk. You must +<emphasis>not</emphasis> put swap on the first partition of the boot +drive, since swap partitions do not preserve the first few sectors of +the partition. You can put Ext2 or UFS partitions there; these will +leave the partition table and the boot block alone. + +</para><para> + +It is also advised that the third partition should be of type <quote>Whole +disk</quote> (type 5), and contain the entire disk (from the first cylinder +to the last). This is simply a convention of Sun disk labels, and +helps the <command>SILO</command> boot loader keep its bearings. + +</para> + </sect2>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/en/partitioning/partitioning.xml b/en/partitioning/partitioning.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66136a451 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/partitioning.xml @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<appendix id="partitioning"> +<title>Partitioning for Debian</title> + +&sizing.xml; +&tree.xml; +&schemes.xml; +&device-names.xml; +&partition-programs.xml; + +</appendix> diff --git a/en/partitioning/schemes.xml b/en/partitioning/schemes.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6924cc3e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/schemes.xml @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1> + <title>Recommended Partitioning Scheme</title> +<para> + +For new users, personal Debian boxes, home systems, and other +single-user setups, a single <filename>/</filename> partition (plus +swap) is probably the easiest, simplest way to go. However, if your +partition is larger than around 6GB, choose ext3 as your partition +type. Ext2 partitions need periodic file system integrity checking, +and this can cause delays during booting when the partition is large. + +</para><para> + +For multi-user systems or systems with lots of disk space, it's best +to put <filename>/usr</filename>, <filename>/var</filename>, +<filename>/tmp</filename>, and <filename>/home</filename> each on +their own partitions separate from the <filename>/</filename> +partition. + +</para><para> + +You might need a separate <filename>/usr/local</filename> partition if +you plan to install many programs that are not part of the Debian +distribution. If your machine will be a mail server, you might need +to make <filename>/var/mail</filename> a separate partition. Often, +putting <filename>/tmp</filename> on its own partition, for instance +20 to 50MB, is a good idea. If you are setting up a server with lots +of user accounts, it's generally good to have a separate, large +<filename>/home</filename> partition. In general, the partitioning +situation varies from computer to computer depending on its uses. + +</para><para> + +For very complex systems, you should see the +<ulink url="&url-multidisk-howto;"> +Multi Disk HOWTO</ulink>. This contains in-depth information, mostly +of interest to ISPs and people setting up servers. + +</para><para> + +With respect to the issue of swap partition size, there are many +views. One rule of thumb which works well is to use as much swap as +you have system memory. It also shouldn't be smaller than 16MB, in +most cases. Of course, there are exceptions to these rules. If you +are trying to solve 10000 simultaneous equations on a machine with +256MB of memory, you may need a gigabyte (or more) of swap. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +On the other hand, Atari Falcons and Macs feel pain when swapping, so +instead of making a large swap partition, get as much RAM as possible. + +</para><para> + +On 32-bit architectures (i386, m68k, 32-bit SPARC, and PowerPC), the +maximum size of a swap partition is 2GB. That should be enough for +nearly any installation. However, if your swap requirements are this +high, you should probably try to spread the swap across different +disks (also called <quote>spindles</quote>) and, if possible, different SCSI or +IDE channels. The kernel will balance swap usage between multiple +swap partitions, giving better performance. + +</para><para> + +As an example, an older home machine might have 32MB of RAM and a +1.7GB IDE drive on <filename>/dev/hda</filename>. There might be a +500MB partition for another operating system on +<filename>/dev/hda1</filename>, a 32MB swap partition on +<filename>/dev/hda3</filename> and about 1.2GB on +<filename>/dev/hda2</filename> as the Linux partition. + +</para><para> + +For an idea of the space taken by tasks +you might be interested in adding after your system installation is +complete, check <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/>. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/partitioning/sizing.xml b/en/partitioning/sizing.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc174c497 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/sizing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1 id="partition-sizing"> + <title>Deciding on Debian Partitions and Sizes</title> +<para> + +At a bare minimum, GNU/Linux needs one partition for itself. You can +have a single partition containing the entire operating system, +applications, and your personal files. Most people feel that a +separate swap partition is also a necessity, although it's not +strictly true. <quote>Swap</quote> is scratch space for an operating system, +which allows the system to use disk storage as <quote>virtual +memory</quote>. By putting swap on a separate partition, Linux can make much +more efficient use of it. It is possible to force Linux to use a +regular file as swap, but it is not recommended. + +</para><para> + +Most people choose to give GNU/Linux more than the minimum number of +partitions, however. There are two reasons you might want to break up +the file system into a number of smaller partitions. The first is for +safety. If something happens to corrupt the file system, generally +only one partition is affected. Thus, you only have to replace (from +the backups you've been carefully keeping) a portion of your +system. At a bare minimum, you should consider creating what is +commonly called a <quote>root partition</quote>. This contains the most essential +components of the system. If any other partitions get corrupted, you +can still boot into GNU/Linux to fix the system. This can save you the +trouble of having to reinstall the system from scratch. + +</para><para> + +The second reason is generally more important in a business setting, +but it really depends on your use of the machine. For example, a mail +server getting spammed with e-mail can easily fill a partition. If you +made <filename>/var/mail</filename> a separate partition on the mail +server, most of the system will remain working even if you get spammed. + +</para><para> + +The only real drawback to using more partitions is that it is often +difficult to know in advance what your needs will be. If you make a +partition too small then you will either have to reinstall the system +or you will be constantly moving things around to make room in the +undersized partition. On the other hand, if you make the partition too +big, you will be wasting space that could be used elsewhere. Disk +space is cheap nowadays, but why throw your money away? + +</para> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/partitioning/tree.xml b/en/partitioning/tree.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2644a694f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/partitioning/tree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1 id="directory-tree"> + <title>The Directory Tree</title> +<para> + +&debian; adheres to the +<ulink url="&url-fhs-home;">Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink> +for directory and file naming. This standard allows users and software +programs to predict the location of files and directories. The root +level directory is represented simply by the slash +<filename>/</filename>. At the root level, all Debian systems include +these directories: + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>Directory</entry><entry>Content</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry><filename>bin</filename></entry> + <entry>Essential command binaries</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>boot</filename></entry> + <entry>Static files of the boot loader</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>dev</filename></entry> + <entry>Device files</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>etc</filename></entry> + <entry>Host-specific system configuration</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>home</filename></entry> + <entry>User home directories</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>lib</filename></entry> + <entry>Essential shared libraries and kernel modules</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>media</filename></entry> + <entry>Contains mount points for replaceable media</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>mnt</filename></entry> + <entry>Mount point for mounting a file system temporarily</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>proc</filename></entry> + <entry>Virtual directory for system information (2.4 and 2.6 kernels)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>root</filename></entry> + <entry>Home directory for the root user</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>sbin</filename></entry> + <entry>Essential system binaries</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>sys</filename></entry> + <entry>Virtual directory for system information (2.6 kernels)</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>tmp</filename></entry> + <entry>Temporary files</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>usr</filename></entry> + <entry>Secondary hierarchy</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>var</filename></entry> + <entry>Variable data</entry> +</row><row> + <entry><filename>opt</filename></entry> + <entry>Add-on application software packages</entry> +</row> +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +</para> + +<para> + +The following is a list of important considerations regarding +directories and partitions. Note that disk usage varies widely given +system configuration and specific usage patterns. The recommendations +here are general guidelines and provide a starting point for +partitioning. + +</para> +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +The root partition <filename>/</filename> must always physically +contain <filename>/etc</filename>, <filename>/bin</filename>, +<filename>/sbin</filename>, <filename>/lib</filename> and +<filename>/dev</filename>, otherwise you won't be able to boot. +Typically 150–250 MB is needed for the root partition. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/usr</filename>: contains all user programs +(<filename>/usr/bin</filename>), libraries +(<filename>/usr/lib</filename>), documentation +(<filename>/usr/share/doc</filename>), etc. +This is the part of the file system that generally takes up most space. +You should provide at least 500 MB of disk space. This amount should +be increased depending on the number and type of packages you plan +to install. A generous workstation or server installation should allow +4-6 GB. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/var</filename>: variable data like news articles, e-mails, +web sites, databases, the packaging system cache, etc. will be placed +under this directory. The size of this directory depends greatly on +the usage of your system, but for most people will be dictated by +the package management tool's overhead. If you are going to do a full +installation of just about everything Debian has to offer, all in one +session, setting aside 2 or 3 gigabyte of space for +<filename>/var</filename> should be sufficient. If you are going to +install in pieces (that is to say, install services and utilities, +followed by text stuff, then X, ...), you can get away with 300–500 +MB. If hard drive space is at a premium and you don't plan on doing +major system updates, you can get by with as little as 30 or 40 MB. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/tmp</filename>: temporary data created by programs will +most likely go in this directory. 40–100 MB should usually +be enough. Some applications — including archive manipulators, +CD/DVD authoring tools, and multimedia software — may use +<filename>/tmp</filename> to temporarily store image files. If you +plan to use such applications, you should adjust the space available +in <filename>/tmp</filename> accordingly. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/home</filename>: every user will put his personal data +into a subdirectory of this directory. Its size depends on how many +users will be using the system and what files are to be stored in +their directories. Depending on your planned usage you should reserve +about 100 MB for each user, but adapt this value to your needs. Reserve +a lot more space if you plan to save a lot of multimedia files (MP3, movies) +in your home directory. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/post-install/further-reading.xml b/en/post-install/further-reading.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f52631b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/further-reading.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="further-reading"><title>Further Reading and Information</title> +<para> + +If you need information about a particular program, you should first +try <userinput>man <replaceable>program</replaceable></userinput>, or +<userinput>info <replaceable>program</replaceable></userinput>. + +</para><para> + +There is lots of useful documentation in +<filename>/usr/share/doc</filename> as well. In particular, +<filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO</filename> and +<filename>/usr/share/doc/FAQ</filename> contain lots of interesting +information. To submit bugs, look at +<filename>/usr/share/doc/debian/bug*</filename>. To read about +Debian-specific issues for particular programs, look at +<filename>/usr/share/doc/(package name)/README.Debian</filename>. + +</para><para> + +The +<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/">Debian web site</ulink> +contains a large quantity of documentation about Debian. In +particular, see the +<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/FAQ/">Debian GNU/Linux FAQ</ulink> and the +<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/user-manuals#quick-reference">Debian +Reference</ulink>. +An index of more Debian documentation is available from the +<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/ddp">Debian Documentation Project</ulink>. +The Debian community is self-supporting; to subscribe to +one or more of the Debian mailing lists, see the +<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/MailingLists/subscribe"> +Mail List Subscription</ulink> page. +Last, but not least, the <ulink url="http://lists.debian.org/">Debian Mailing +List Archives</ulink> contain a wealth of information on Debian. + +</para><para> + +A general source of information on GNU/Linux is the +<ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/">Linux Documentation Project</ulink>. +There you will find the HOWTOs and pointers to other very valuable +information on parts of a GNU/Linux system. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/post-install/kernel-baking.xml b/en/post-install/kernel-baking.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d02ce08a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/kernel-baking.xml @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="kernel-baking"><title>Compiling a New Kernel</title> +<para> + +Why would someone want to compile a new kernel? It is often not +necessary since the default kernel shipped with Debian handles most +configurations. However, it is useful to compile a new kernel in order +to: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +handle special hardware needs, or hardware conflicts with the pre-supplied +kernels + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +handle hardware or options not included in the stock kernel, such as +APM or SMP + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +optimize the kernel by removing useless drivers to speed up boot +time + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +use options of the kernel which are not supported by the default +kernel (such as high memory support) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +run an updated or development kernel + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +impress your friends, try new things + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + + <sect2><title>Kernel Image Management</title> +<para> + +Don't be afraid to try compiling the kernel. It's fun and profitable. + +</para><para> + +To compile a kernel the Debian way, you need some packages: +<classname>kernel-package</classname>, +<classname>kernel-source-&kernelversion;</classname> (the most recent version +at the time of this writing), <classname>fakeroot</classname> and a +few others which are probably already installed (see +<filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package/README.gz</filename> for the +complete list). + +</para><para> + +This method will make a .deb of your kernel source, and, if you have +non-standard modules, make a synchronized dependent .deb of those +too. It's a better way to manage kernel images; +<filename>/boot</filename> will hold the kernel, the System.map, and a +log of the active config file for the build. + +</para><para> + +Note that you don't <emphasis>have</emphasis> to compile your kernel +the <quote>Debian way</quote>; but we find that using the packaging system +to manage your kernel is actually safer and easier. In fact, you can get +your kernel sources right from Linus instead of +<classname>kernel-source-&kernelversion;</classname>, yet still use the +<classname>kernel-package</classname> compilation method. + +</para><para> + +Note that you'll find complete documentation on using +<classname>kernel-package</classname> under +<filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package</filename>. This section just +contains a brief tutorial. + +</para><para> + +Hereafter, we'll assume you have free rein over your machine and will +extract your kernel source to somewhere in your home directory<footnote> + +<para> + +There are other locations where you can extract kernel sources and build +your custom kernel, but this is easiest as it does not require special +permissions. + +</para> + +</footnote>. We'll also assume that your kernel version is +&kernelversion;. Make sure you are in the directory to where you want to +unpack the kernel sources, extract them using <userinput>tar xjf +/usr/src/kernel-source-&kernelversion;.tar.bz2</userinput> and change +to the directory <filename>kernel-source-&kernelversion;</filename> +that will have been created. + +</para><para> + +Now, you can configure your kernel. Run <userinput>make +xconfig</userinput> if X11 is installed, configured and being run; run +<userinput>make menuconfig</userinput> otherwise (you'll need +<classname>libncurses5-dev</classname> installed). Take the time to read +the online help and choose carefully. When in doubt, it is typically +better to include the device driver (the software which manages +hardware peripherals, such as Ethernet cards, SCSI controllers, and so +on) you are unsure about. Be careful: other options, not related to a +specific hardware, should be left at the default value if you do not +understand them. Do not forget to select <quote>Kernel module loader</quote> +in <quote>Loadable module support</quote> (it is not selected by default). +If not included, your Debian installation will experience problems. + +</para><para> + +Clean the source tree and reset the <classname>kernel-package</classname> +parameters. To do that, do <userinput>make-kpkg clean</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +Now, compile the kernel: +<userinput>fakeroot make-kpkg --revision=custom.1.0 kernel_image</userinput>. +The version number of <quote>1.0</quote> can be changed at will; this is just +a version number that you will use to track your kernel builds. +Likewise, you can put any word you like in place of <quote>custom</quote> +(e.g., a host name). Kernel compilation may take quite a while, depending on +the power of your machine. + +</para><para condition="supports-pcmcia"> + +If you require PCMCIA support, you'll also need to install the +<classname>pcmcia-source</classname> package. Unpack the gzipped tar file +as root in the directory <filename>/usr/src</filename> (it's important that +modules are found where they are expected to be found, namely, +<filename>/usr/src/modules</filename>). Then, as root, do <userinput>make-kpkg +modules_image</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +Once the compilation is complete, you can install your custom kernel +like any package. As root, do <userinput>dpkg -i +../kernel-image-&kernelversion;-<replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable>_custom.1.0_&architecture;.deb</userinput>. +The <replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable> part is an optional +sub-architecture, +<phrase arch="i386"> such as <quote>i586</quote>, </phrase> +depending on what kernel options you set. +<userinput>dpkg -i kernel-image...</userinput> will install the +kernel, along with some other nice supporting files. For instance, +the <filename>System.map</filename> will be properly installed +(helpful for debugging kernel problems), and +<filename>/boot/config-&kernelversion;</filename> will be installed, +containing your current configuration set. Your new +<classname>kernel-image-&kernelversion;</classname> package is also clever +enough to automatically use your platform's boot-loader to run an +update on the booting, allowing you to boot without re-running the +boot loader. If you have created a modules package, e.g., if you have +PCMCIA, you'll need to install that package as well. + +</para><para> + +It is time to reboot the system: read carefully any warning that the +above step may have produced, then <userinput>shutdown -r now</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +For more information on <classname>kernel-package</classname>, read +the fine documentation in <filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package</filename>. + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/post-install/new-to-unix.xml b/en/post-install/new-to-unix.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..50284c380 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/new-to-unix.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1 id="unix-intro"> + <title>If You Are New to Unix</title> +<para> + +If you are new to Unix, you probably should go out and buy some books +and do some reading. A lot of valuable information can also be found +in the <ulink url="&url-debian-reference;">Debian Reference</ulink>. +This <ulink url="&url-unix-faq;">list of Unix FAQs</ulink> contains a +number of UseNet documents which provide a nice historical reference. + +</para><para> + +Linux is an implementation of Unix. The +<ulink url="&url-ldp;">Linux Documentation Project (LDP)</ulink> +collects a number of HOWTOs and online books +relating to Linux. Most of these documents can be installed locally; +just install the <classname>doc-linux-html</classname> package (HTML +versions) or the <classname>doc-linux-text</classname> package (ASCII +versions), then look in <filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO</filename>. +International versions of the LDP HOWTOs are also available as Debian +packages. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/post-install/orientation.xml b/en/post-install/orientation.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..680979342 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/orientation.xml @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1 id="debian-orientation"><title>Orienting Yourself to Debian</title> +<para> + +Debian is a little different from other distributions. Even if you're +familiar with Linux in other distributions, there are things you +should know about Debian to help you to keep your system in a good, +clean state. This chapter contains material to help you get oriented; +it is not intended to be a tutorial for how to use Debian, but just a +very brief glimpse of the system for the very rushed. + +</para> + + <sect2><title>Debian Packaging System</title> +<para> + +The most important concept to grasp is the Debian packaging system. +In essence, large parts of your system should be considered under the +control of the packaging system. These include: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/usr</filename> (excluding <filename>/usr/local</filename>) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/var</filename> (you could make +<filename>/var/local</filename> and be safe in there) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/bin</filename> + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/sbin</filename> + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<filename>/lib</filename> + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +For instance, if you replace <filename>/usr/bin/perl</filename>, that +will work, but then if you upgrade your <classname>perl</classname> +package, the file you put there will be replaced. Experts can get +around this by putting packages on <quote>hold</quote> in +<command>aptitude</command>. + +</para><para> + +One of the best installation methods is apt. You can use the command +line version <command>apt-get</command> or full-screen text version +<application>aptitude</application>. Note apt will also let you merge +main, contrib, and non-free so you can have export-restricted packages +as well as standard versions. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Application Version Management</title> +<para> + + +Alternative versions of applications are managed by update-alternatives. If +you are maintaining multiple versions of your applications, read the +update-alternatives man page. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Cron Job Management</title> +<para> + +Any jobs under the purview of the system administrator should be in +<filename>/etc</filename>, since they are configuration files. If you +have a root cron job for daily, weekly, or monthly runs, put them in +<filename>/etc/cron.{daily,weekly,monthly}</filename>. These are +invoked from <filename>/etc/crontab</filename>, and will run in +alphabetic order, which serializes them. + +</para><para> + +On the other hand, if you have a cron job that (a) needs to run as a +special user, or (b) needs to run at a special time or frequency, you +can use either <filename>/etc/crontab</filename>, or, better yet, +<filename>/etc/cron.d/whatever</filename>. These particular files +also have an extra field that allows you to stipulate the user under +which the cron job runs. + +</para><para> + +In either case, you just edit the files and cron will notice them +automatically. There is no need to run a special command. For more +information see cron(8), crontab(5), and +<filename>/usr/share/doc/cron/README.Debian</filename>. + +</para> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/post-install/post-install.xml b/en/post-install/post-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fae552701 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/post-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<chapter id="post-install"> + <title>Next Steps and Where to Go From Here</title> + +&new-to-unix.xml; +&orientation.xml; +&reactivating-win.xml; +&further-reading.xml; +&kernel-baking.xml; +&rescue.xml; + +</chapter> diff --git a/en/post-install/reactivating-win.xml b/en/post-install/reactivating-win.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..728585b9b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/reactivating-win.xml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1 arch="i386" id="reactivating-win"> + <title>Reactivating DOS and Windows</title> +<para> + +After installing the base system and writing to the <emphasis>Master Boot +Record</emphasis>, you will be able to boot Linux, but probably nothing else. +This depends what you have chosen during the installation. This chapter +will describe how you can reactivate your old systems so that you can also +boot your DOS or Windows again. + +</para><para> + +<command>LILO</command> is a boot manager with which you can also boot +other operating systems than Linux, which complies to PC +conventions. The boot manager is configured via +<filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> file. Whenever you edited this +file you have to run <command>lilo</command> afterwards. The reason +for this is that the changes will take place only when you call the +program. + +</para><para> + +Important parts of the <filename>lilo.conf</filename> file are the +lines containing the <userinput>image</userinput> and +<userinput>other</userinput> keywords, as well as the lines following +those. They can be used to describe a system which can be booted by +<command>LILO</command>. Such a system can include a kernel +(<userinput>image</userinput>), a root partition, additional kernel +parameters, etc. as well as a configuration to boot another, non-Linux +(<userinput>other</userinput>) operating system. These keywords can +also be used more than once. The ordering of these systems within the +configuration file is important because it determines which system +will be booted automatically after, for instance, a timeout +(<userinput>delay</userinput>) presuming <command>LILO</command> +wasn't stopped by pressing the <keycap>shift</keycap> key. + +</para><para> + +After a fresh install of Debian, just the current system is configured +for booting with <command>LILO</command>. If you want to boot another +Linux kernel, you have to edit the configuration file +<filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> to add the following lines: + +<informalexample><screen> +&additional-lilo-image; +</screen></informalexample> + +For a basic setup just the first two lines are necessary. If you want +to know more about the other two options please have a look at the +<command>LILO</command> documentation. This can be found in +<filename>/usr/share/doc/lilo/</filename>. The file which should be +read is <filename>Manual.txt</filename>. To have a quicker start into +the world of booting a system you can also look at the +<command>LILO</command> man pages <filename>lilo.conf</filename> for +an overview of configuration keywords and <filename>lilo</filename> +for description of the installation of the new configuration into the +boot sector. + +</para><para> + +Notice that there are other boot loaders available in &debian;, such as +GRUB (in <classname>grub</classname> package), +CHOS (in <classname>chos</classname> package), +Extended-IPL (in <classname>extipl</classname> package), +loadlin (in <classname>loadlin</classname> package) etc. + +</para> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/post-install/rescue.xml b/en/post-install/rescue.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f920f6078 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/rescue.xml @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="rescue" condition="etch"> + <title>Recovering a Broken System</title> +<para> + +Sometimes, things go wrong, and the system you've carefully installed is no +longer bootable. Perhaps the boot loader configuration broke while trying +out a change, or perhaps a new kernel you installed won't boot, or perhaps +cosmic rays hit your disk and flipped a bit in +<filename>/sbin/init</filename>. Regardless of the cause, you'll need to +have a system to work from while you fix it, and rescue mode can be useful +for this. + +</para><para> + +<!-- TODO: describe what to do on arches where this isn't set up in the + bootloader --> + +To access rescue mode, type <userinput>rescue</userinput> at the +<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt, or boot with the +<userinput>rescue/enable=true</userinput> boot parameter. You'll be shown +the first few screens of the installer, with a note in the corner of the +display to indicate that this is rescue mode, not a full installation. Don't +worry, your system is not about to be overwritten! Rescue mode simply takes +advantage of the hardware detection facilities available in the installer to +ensure that your disks, network devices, and so on are available to you +while repairing your system. + +</para><para> + +Instead of the partitioning tool, you should now be presented with a list of +the partitions on your system, and asked to select one of them. Normally, +you should select the partition containing the root file system that you +need to repair. You may select partitions on RAID and LVM devices as well as +those created directly on disks. + +</para><para> + +If possible, the installer will now present you with a shell prompt in the +file system you selected, which you can use to perform any necessary +repairs. + +<phrase arch="i386"> +For example, if you need to reinstall the GRUB boot loader into the master +boot record of the first hard disk, you could enter the command +<userinput>grub-install '(hd0)'</userinput> to do so. +</phrase> + +</para><para> + +If the installer cannot run a usable shell in the root file system you +selected, perhaps because the file system is corrupt, then it will issue a +warning and offer to give you a shell in the installer environment instead. +You may not have as many tools available in this environment, but they will +often be enough to repair your system anyway. The root file system you +selected will be mounted on the <filename>/target</filename> directory. + +</para><para> + +In either case, after you exit the shell, the system will reboot. + +</para><para> + +Finally, note that repairing broken systems can be difficult, and this +manual does not attempt to go into all the things that might have gone wrong +or how to fix them. If you have problems, consult an expert. + +</para> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/post-install/shutdown.xml b/en/post-install/shutdown.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d838a38c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/post-install/shutdown.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect1 id="shutdown"> + <title>Shutting Down the System</title> + +<para> + +To shut down a running Linux system, you must not reboot with the +reset switch on the front or back of your computer, or just turn off +the computer. Linux must be shut down in a controlled manner, +otherwise files may be lost and disk damage incurred. You can press +the key combination <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> +<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Del</keycap> </keycombo> +<phrase arch="powerpc;m68k"> or <keycombo> <keycap>Control</keycap> +<keycap>Shift</keycap> <keycap>Power</keycap> </keycombo> on Macintosh +systems</phrase>. You may also log in as +root and type <userinput>shutdown -h now</userinput>, +<userinput>reboot</userinput>, or <userinput>halt</userinput> if +either of the key combinations do not work or you prefer to type +commands. + +</para> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/preface.xml b/en/preface.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5ffe44b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preface.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<preface> + <title>Installing &debian; &release; For &architecture;</title> +<para> + +We are delighted that you have decided to try Debian, and are +sure that you will find that Debian's GNU/Linux distribution is +unique. &debian; brings together high-quality free software +from around the world, integrating it into a coherent whole. We +believe that you will find that the result is truly more than the sum +of the parts. + +</para><para> + +We understand that many of you want to install Debian without reading this +manual, and the Debian installer is designed to make this possible. If you +don't have time to read the whole Installation Guide right now, we recommend +that you read the Installation Howto, which will walk you through the basic +installation process, and links to the manual for more advanced topics or +for when things go wrong. The Installation Howto can be found in +<xref linkend="installation-howto"/>. + +</para><para> + +With that said, we hope that you have the time to read most of this manual, +and doing so will lead to a more informed and likely more successful +installation experience. + +</para> +</preface> diff --git a/en/preparing/backup.xml b/en/preparing/backup.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9355d822 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/backup.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="backup"> + <title>Back Up Your Existing Data!</title> +<para> + +Before you start, make sure to back up every file that is now on your +system. If this is the first time a non-native operating system has +been installed on your computer, it's quite likely you will need to +re-partition your disk to make room for &debian;. Anytime you +partition your disk, you should count on losing everything on the +disk, no matter what program you use to do it. The programs used in +installation are quite reliable and most have seen years of use; but +they are also quite powerful and a false move can cost you. Even after +backing up be careful and think about your answers and actions. Two +minutes of thinking can save hours of unnecessary work. + +</para><para> + +If you are creating a multi-boot system, make sure that you have the +distribution media of any other present operating systems on hand. +Especially if you repartition your boot drive, you might find that you +have to reinstall your operating system's boot loader, or in many +cases the whole operating system itself and all files on the affected +partitions. + +</para> + +<para arch="m68k"> + +With the exception of the BVM and Motorola VMEbus computers, the only +supported installation method for m68k systems is booting from a local +disk or floppy using an AmigaOS/TOS/MacOS-based bootstrap, for these +machines you will need the original operating system in order to boot +Linux. In order to boot Linux on the BVM and Motorola VMEbus machines +you will need the <quote>BVMBug</quote> or <quote>16xBug</quote> boot ROMs. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed548ce9f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,332 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="bios-setup"><title>Invoking the BIOS Set-Up Menu</title> + +<para> + +BIOS provides the basic functions needed to boot your machine to allow +your operating system to access your hardware. Your system probably +provides a BIOS set-up menu, which is used to configure the BIOS. +Before installing, you <emphasis>must</emphasis> ensure that your BIOS +is setup correctly; not doing so can lead to intermittent crashes or +an inability to install Debian. + +</para><para> + +The rest of this section is lifted from the +<ulink url="&url-pc-hw-faq;"></ulink>, answering the question, <quote>How do I +enter the CMOS configuration menu?</quote>. How you access the BIOS (or +<quote>CMOS</quote>) configuration menu depends on who wrote your BIOS +software: + +</para> + +<!-- From: burnesa@cat.com (Shaun Burnet) --> +<variablelist> + +<varlistentry> + <term>AMI BIOS</term> + <listitem><para> + +<keycap>Delete</keycap> key during the POST (power on self test) + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> + <term>Award BIOS</term> + <listitem><para> + +<keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Esc</keycap> +</keycombo>, or <keycap>Delete</keycap> key during the POST + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry><term>DTK BIOS</term> + <listitem><para> + +<keycap>Esc</keycap> key during the POST + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry><term>IBM PS/2 BIOS</term> + <listitem><para> + +<keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Insert</keycap> +</keycombo> +after +<keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Delete</keycap> +</keycombo> + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> + <term>Phoenix BIOS</term> + <listitem><para> + +<keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Esc</keycap> +</keycombo> +or +<keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>S</keycap> +</keycombo> +or +<keycap>F1</keycap> + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +<para> + +Information on invoking other BIOS routines can be found in +<ulink url="&url-invoking-bios-info;"></ulink>. + +</para><para> + +Some &arch-title; machines don't have a CMOS configuration menu in the +BIOS. They require a software CMOS setup program. If you don't have +the Installation and/or Diagnostics diskette for your machine, you can +try using a shareware/freeware program. Try looking in +<ulink url="&url-simtel;"></ulink>. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="i386" id="boot-dev-select"><title>Boot Device Selection</title> + +<para> + +Many BIOS set-up menus allow you to select the devices that will be +used to bootstrap the system. Set this to look for a bootable +operating system on <filename>A:</filename> (the first floppy disk), +then optionally the first CD-ROM device (possibly appearing as +<filename>D:</filename> or <filename>E:</filename>), and then from +<filename>C:</filename> (the first hard disk). This setting enables +you to boot from either a floppy disk or a CD-ROM, which are the two +most common boot devices used to install Debian. + +</para><para> + +If you have a newer SCSI controller and you have a CD-ROM device +attached to it, you are usually able to boot from the CD-ROM. All you +have to do is enable booting from a CD-ROM in the SCSI-BIOS of your +controller. + +</para><para> + +Other popular option is to boot from a USB storage (also called USB +memory stick or USB key). Some BIOSes can boot USB storage directly, +and some cannot. You may need to configure your BIOS to boot from +a <quote>Removable drive</quote> or even a <quote>USB-ZIP</quote> to +get it to boot from the USB device. + +</para><para> + +Here are some details about how to set the boot order. Remember to +reset the boot order after Linux is installed, so that you restart +your machine from the hard drive. + +</para> + + <sect3 id="ctbooi"> + <title>Changing the Boot Order on IDE Computers</title> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +As your computer starts, press the keys to enter the BIOS +utility. Often, it is the <keycap>Delete</keycap> key. However, +consult the hardware documentation for the exact keystrokes. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Find the boot sequence in the setup utility. Its location depends on +your BIOS, but you are looking for a field that lists drives. + +</para><para> + + +Common entries on IDE machines are C, A, cdrom or A, C, cdrom. + +</para><para> + + +C is the hard drive, and A is the floppy drive. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Change the boot sequence setting so that the CD-ROM or the +floppy is first. Usually, the <keycap>Page Up</keycap> or +<keycap>Page Down</keycap> keys cycle +through the possible choices. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Save your changes. Instructions on the screen tell you how to +save the changes on your computer. + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="ctboos"> + <title>Changing the Boot Order on SCSI Computers</title> +<para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +As your computer starts, press the keys to enter the SCSI setup +utility. + +</para><para> + +You can start the SCSI setup utility after the memory check and +the message about how to start the BIOS utility displays when you +start your computer. + +</para><para> + +The keystrokes you need depend on the utility. Often, it is +<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F2</keycap></keycombo>. +However, consult your hardware documentation for the +exact keystrokes. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Find the utility for changing the boot order. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Set the utility so that the SCSI ID of the CD drive is first on +the list. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Save your changes. Instructions on the screen tell you how to +save the changes on your computer. Often, you must press +<keycap>F10</keycap>. + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="i386"> + <title>Miscellaneous BIOS Settings</title> + + <sect3 id="cd-settings"><title>CD-ROM Settings</title> +<para> + +Some BIOS systems (such as Award BIOS) allow you to automatically set +the CD speed. You should avoid that, and instead set it to, say, the +lowest speed. If you get <userinput>seek failed</userinput> error +messages, this may be your problem. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Extended vs. Expanded Memory</title> +<para> + +If your system provides both ex<emphasis>ten</emphasis>ded and +ex<emphasis>pan</emphasis>ded memory, set it so that there is as much +extended and as little expanded memory as possible. Linux requires +extended memory and cannot use expanded memory. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Virus Protection</title> +<para> + +Disable any virus-warning features your BIOS may provide. If you have +a virus-protection board or other special hardware, make sure it is +disabled or physically removed while running GNU/Linux. These aren't +compatible with GNU/Linux; moreover, due to the file system +permissions and protected memory of the Linux kernel, viruses are +almost unheard of<footnote> +<para> + +After installation you can enable Boot Sector protection if you +want. This offers no additional security in Linux but if you also run +Windows it may prevent a catastrophe. There is no need to tamper with +the Master Boot Record (MBR) after the boot manager has been set up. + +</para> +</footnote>. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Shadow RAM</title> +<para> + +Your motherboard may provide <emphasis>shadow RAM</emphasis> or BIOS +caching. You may see settings for <quote>Video BIOS Shadow</quote>, +<quote>C800-CBFF Shadow</quote>, etc. <emphasis>Disable</emphasis> +all shadow RAM. Shadow +RAM is used to accelerate access to the ROMs on your motherboard and +on some of the controller cards. Linux does not use these ROMs once it +has booted because it provides its own faster 32-bit software in place +of the 16-bit programs in the ROMs. Disabling the shadow RAM may make +some of it available for programs to use as normal memory. Leaving +the shadow RAM enabled may interfere with Linux access to hardware +devices. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>Memory Hole</title> +<para> + +If your BIOS offers something like <quote>15–16 MB Memory +Hole</quote>, please disable that. Linux expects to find memory there if +you have that much RAM. + +</para><para> + +We have a report of an Intel Endeavor motherboard on which there is an +option called <quote>LFB</quote> or <quote>Linear Frame Buffer</quote>. +This had two settings: <quote>Disabled</quote> and <quote>1 +Megabyte</quote>. Set it to <quote>1 Megabyte</quote>. +When disabled, the installation floppy was not read correctly, and the +system eventually crashed. At this writing we don't understand what's +going on with this particular device — it just worked with that +setting and not without it. + +</para> + </sect3> + +<!-- no other platforms other than x86 provide this sort of thing, AFAIK --> + + <sect3><title>Advanced Power Management</title> +<para> + +If your motherboard provides Advanced Power Management (APM), +configure it so that power management is controlled by APM. Disable +the doze, standby, suspend, nap, and sleep modes, and disable the hard +disk's power-down timer. Linux can take over control of these modes, +and can do a better job of power-management than the BIOS. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c7d4b178 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k" id="firmware-revs"> + <title>Firmware Revisions and Existing OS Setup</title> + +<para> + +&arch-title; machines are generally self-configuring and do not require +firmware configuration. However, you should make sure that you have +the appropriate ROM and system patches. On the Macintosh, MacOS +version >= 7.1 is recommended because version 7.0.1 contains a bug in +the video drivers preventing the boot loader from deactivating the +video interrupts, resulting in a boot hang. On the BVM VMEbus systems +you should make sure you are using BVMBug revision G or higher boot ROMs. +The BVMBug boot ROMs do not come as standard on the BVM systems but are +available from BVM on request free of charge. + +</para> + + </sect2> + diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b676a03bd --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="invoking-openfirmware"> + <title>Invoking OpenFirmware</title> +<para> + +There is normally no need to set up the BIOS (called OpenFirmware) on +&arch-title; systems. PReP and CHRP are equipped with OpenFirmware, +but unfortunately, the means you use to invoke it vary from +manufacturer to manufacturer. You'll have to consult the hardware +documentation which came with your machine. + +</para><para> + +On &arch-title; Macintoshes, you invoke OpenFirmware with +<keycombo><keycap>Command</keycap> <keycap>option</keycap> +<keycap>O</keycap> <keycap>F</keycap></keycombo> while booting. Generally it +will check for these keystrokes after the chime, but the exact timing +varies from model to model. See +<ulink url="&url-netbsd-powerpc-faq;"></ulink> for more hints. + +</para><para> + +The OpenFirmware prompt looks like this: + +<informalexample><screen> +ok +0 > +</screen></informalexample> + +Note that on older model &arch-title; Macs, the default and sometimes +hardwired I/O for OpenFirmware user interaction is through the serial +(modem) port. If you invoke OpenFirmware on one of these machines, you +will just see a black screen. In that case, a terminal program running +on another computer, connected to the modem port, is needed to +interact with OpenFirmware. + +</para><para> + +The OpenFirmware on OldWorld Beige G3 machines, OF versions 2.0f1 +and 2.4, is broken. These machines will most likely not be able to +boot from the hard drive unless the firmware is patched. A firmware +patch is included in the <application>System Disk 2.3.1</application> +utility, available from Apple at +<ulink url="ftp://ftp.apple.com/developer/macosxserver/utilities/SystemDisk2.3.1.smi.bin"></ulink>. +After unpacking the utility in MacOS, and launching it, select the +Save button to have the firmware patches installed to nvram. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7da892259 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="s390"><title>BIOS Setup</title> +<para> + +In order to install &debian; on a &arch-title; or zSeries +machine you have first boot a kernel into the system. The boot +mechanism of this platform is inherently different to other ones, +especially from PC-like systems: there are no floppy devices available +at all. You will notice another big difference while you work with +this platform: most (if not all) of the time you will work remote, +with the help of some client session software like telnet, or a +browser. This is due to that special system architecture where the +3215/3270 console is line-based instead of character-based. + +</para><para> + +Linux on this platform runs either natively on the bare machine, in a +so-called LPAR (Logical Partition) or in a virtual machine supplied by +the VM system. You can use a boot tape on all of those systems; you +may use some other boot media, too, but those may not be generally +available. For example, you can use the virtual card reader of a +virtual machine, or boot from the HMC (Hardware Management Console) of +an LPAR if the HMC and this option is available for you. + +</para><para> + +Before you actually perform an installation, you have to go over some +design and preparation steps. IBM has made documentation available +about the whole process, e.g. how to prepare an installation medium +and how actually boot from that medium. Duplicating that information +here is neither possible nor necessary. However, we will describe +here which kind of Debian-specific data is needed and where do you +find them. Based on both sources of information you have to prepare +your machine and the installation medium and to perform a boot from +it. When you see the welcome message in your client session join this +document again for the Debian-specific installation steps. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="s390"> + <title>Native and LPAR installations</title> +<para> + +Please refer to chapter 5 of the +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf"> +Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> +Redbook and chapter 3.2 of the +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> +Redbook on how to set up an LPAR for Linux. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="s390"> + <title>Installation as a VM guest</title> + +<para> + +Please refer to chapter 6 of the +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf"> +Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> +Redbook and chapter 3.1 of the +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> +Redbook on how to set up a VM guest for running Linux. + +</para><para> + +You need to copy all the files from the <filename>generic</filename> +sub-directory to your CMS disk. Be sure to transfer +<filename>kernel.debian</filename> and +<filename>initrd.debian</filename> in binary mode with a fixed record +length of 80 characters. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="s390"> + <title>Setting up an installation server</title> + +<para> + +If you don't have a connection to the Internet (either directly or via +a web proxy) you need to create a local installation server that can +be accessed from your S/390. This server keeps all the packages +you want to install and must make them available using NFS, HTTP or +FTP. + +</para><para> + +The installation server needs to copy the exact directory structure +from any &debian; mirror but of only the s390 and +architecture-independent files are required. You can also copy the +contents of all installation CDs into such a directory tree. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +<emphasis>FIXME: more information needed — from a Redbook?</emphasis> + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml b/en/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b222a142 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="invoking-openboot"><title>Invoking OpenBoot</title> + +<para> + +OpenBoot provides the basic functions needed to boot the &arch-title; +architecture. This is rather similar in function to the BIOS in the +x86 architecture, although much nicer. The Sun boot PROMs have a +built-in forth interpreter which lets you do quite a number of things +with your machine, such as diagnostics, simple scripts, etc. + +</para><para> + +To get to the boot prompt you need to hold down the +<keycap>Stop</keycap> key (on older type 4 keyboards, use the +<keycap>L1</keycap> key, if you have a PC keyboard adapter, use +the <keycap>Break</keycap> key) and press the +<keycap>A</keycap> key. The boot PROM will give you a prompt, +either <userinput>ok</userinput> or <userinput>></userinput>. It is +preferred to have the <userinput>ok</userinput> prompt. So if you get +the old style prompt, hit the <keycap>n</keycap> key to get the new +style prompt. + +</para><para> + +If you are using a serial console, send a break to the machine. With Minicom, +use <keycap>Ctrl-A F</keycap>, with cu, hit <keycap>Enter</keycap>, then type +<userinput>%~break</userinput>. Consult the documentation of your terminal +emulator if you are using a different program. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="sparc" id="boot-dev-select-sun"> + <title>Boot Device Selection</title> + +<para> + +You can use OpenBoot to boot from specific devices, and also to change +your default boot device. However, you need to know some details +about how OpenBoot names devices; it's much different from Linux +device naming, described in <xref linkend="device-names"/>. +Also, the command will vary a bit, depending on what version of +OpenBoot you have. More information about OpenBoot can be found in +the <ulink url="&url-openboot;">Sun OpenBoot Reference</ulink>. + +</para><para> + +Typically, with newer revisions, you can use OpenBoot device such as +<quote>floppy</quote>, <quote>cdrom</quote>, <quote>net</quote>, +<quote>disk</quote>, or <quote>disk2</quote>. These have the obvious +meanings; the <quote>net</quote> device is for booting from the network. +Additionally, the device name can specify a particular partition of a disk, +such as <quote>disk2:a</quote> to boot disk2, first partition. Full +OpenBoot device names have the form + +<informalexample> +<screen> +<replaceable>driver-name</replaceable>@ +<replaceable>unit-address</replaceable>: +<replaceable>device-arguments</replaceable> +</screen></informalexample>. + +In older revisions of OpenBoot, device naming is a bit different: the +floppy device is called <quote>/fd</quote>, and SCSI disk devices are of +the form <quote>sd(<replaceable>controller</replaceable>, +<replaceable>disk-target-id</replaceable>, +<replaceable>disk-lun</replaceable>)</quote>. The command +<userinput>show-devs</userinput> in newer OpenBoot revisions is useful +for viewing the currently configured devices. For full information, +whatever your revision, see the +<ulink url="&url-openboot;">Sun OpenBoot Reference</ulink>. + +</para><para> + +To boot from a specific device, use the command <userinput>boot +<replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. You can set this +behavior as the default using the <userinput>setenv</userinput> +command. However, the name of the variable to set changed between +OpenBoot revisions. In OpenBoot 1.x, use the command +<userinput>setenv boot-from +<replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. In later revisions of +OpenBoot, use the command <userinput>setenv boot-device +<replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. Note, this is also +configurable using the <command>eeprom</command> command on Solaris, +or modifying the appropriate files in +<filename>/proc/openprom/options/</filename>, for example under Linux: + +<informalexample><screen> +# echo disk1:1 > /proc/openprom/options/boot-device +</screen></informalexample> + +and under Solaris: + +<informalexample><screen> +eeprom boot-device=disk1:1 +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/preparing/install-overview.xml b/en/preparing/install-overview.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e2bab762 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/install-overview.xml @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="install-overview"> + <title>Overview of the Installation Process</title> +<para> + +First, just a note about re-installations. With Debian, a +circumstance that will require a complete re-installation of your +system is very rare; perhaps mechanical failure of the hard disk would +be the most common case. + +</para><para> + +Many common operating systems may require a complete installation to +be performed when critical failures take place or for upgrades to new +OS versions. Even if a completely new installation isn't required, +often the programs you use must be re-installed to operate properly in +the new OS. + +</para><para> + +Under &debian;, it is much more likely that your OS can be repaired +rather than replaced if things go wrong. Upgrades never require a +wholesale installation; you can always upgrade in-place. And the +programs are almost always compatible with successive OS releases. If +a new program version requires newer supporting software, the Debian +packaging system ensures that all the necessary software is +automatically identified and installed. The point is, much effort has +been put into avoiding the need for re-installation, so think of it as +your very last option. The installer is <emphasis>not</emphasis> +designed to re-install over an existing system. + +</para><para> + +Here's a road map for the steps you will take during the installation +process. + +</para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Back up any existing data or documents on the hard disk where you +plan to install. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Gather information about your computer and any needed documentation, +before starting the installation. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Create partition-able space for Debian on your hard disk. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Locate and/or download the installer software and any specialized +driver files your machine requires (except Debian CD users). + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Set up boot tapes/floppies/USB sticks, or place boot files (most Debian +CD users can boot from one of the CDs). + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Boot the installation system. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem arch="not-s390"><para> + +Select installation language. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem arch="not-s390"><para> + +Activate the ethernet network connection, if available. + +</para></listitem> + +<listitem arch="s390"><para> + +Configure one network interface. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem arch="s390"><para> + +Open a ssh connection to the new system. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem arch="s390"><para> + +Attach one or more DASDs (Direct Access Storage Device). + +</para></listitem> + +<listitem><para> + +Create and mount the partitions on which Debian will be installed. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Watch the automatic download/install/setup of the +<firstterm>base system</firstterm>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Install a <firstterm>boot loader</firstterm> +which can start up &debian; and/or your existing system. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Load the newly installed system for the first time, and make some +initial system settings. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem arch="s390"><para> + +Open a ssh connection to the new system. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Install additional software (<firstterm>tasks</firstterm> +and/or <firstterm>packages</firstterm>), at your discretion. + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +<para> + +If you have problems during the installation, it helps to know which +packages are involved in which steps. Introducing the leading software +actors in this installation drama: + +</para><para> + +The installer software, <classname>debian-installer</classname>, is +the primary concern of this manual. It detects hardware and loads +appropriate drivers, uses <classname>dhcp-client</classname> to set up the +network connection, and runs <classname>debootstrap</classname> to install +the base system packages. Many more actors play smaller parts in this process, +but <classname>debian-installer</classname> has completed its task when +you load the new system for the first time. + +</para><para> + +Upon loading the new base system, <classname>base-config</classname> +supervises adding users, setting a time zone (via +<classname>tzsetup</classname>), and setting up the +package installation system (using <classname>apt-setup</classname>). It then +launches <classname>tasksel</classname> which can be used to select large +groups of related programs, and in turn can run <classname>aptitude</classname> +which allows you to choose individual software packages. + +</para><para> + +When <classname>debian-installer</classname> finishes, before the +first system load, you have only a very basic command line driven +system. The graphical interface which displays windows on your monitor +will not be installed unless you select it during the final steps, +with either <classname>tasksel</classname> or +<classname>aptitude</classname>. It's optional because many &debian; +systems are servers which don't really have any need for a graphical +user interface to do their job. + +</para><para arch="not-s390"> + +Just be aware that the X system is completely separate from +<classname>debian-installer</classname>, and in fact is much more +complicated. Installation and trouble shooting of the X window +installation is not within the scope of this manual. + +</para> + </sect1> + diff --git a/en/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml b/en/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3dffd6e91 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="minimum-hardware-reqts"> +<title>Meeting Minimum Hardware Requirements</title> +<para> + +Once you have gathered information about your computer's hardware, +check that your hardware will let you do the type of installation +that you want to do. + +</para><para arch="not-s390"> + +Depending on your needs, you might manage with less than some of the +recommended hardware listed in the table below. However, most users +risk being frustrated if they ignore these suggestions. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +A Pentium 100 is the minimum recommended for desktop +systems, and a Pentium II-300 for a Server. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +A 68030 or better processor is recommended for m68k +installs. You may get by with a little less drive space than shown. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +Any OldWorld or NewWorld PowerPC can serve well +as a Desktop System. For servers, a minimum 132-Mhz machine is +recommended. + +</para> + +<table> +<title>Recommended Minimum System Requirements</title> +<tgroup cols="3"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>Install Type</entry><entry>RAM</entry><entry>Hard Drive</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry>No desktop</entry> + <entry>24 megabytes</entry> + <entry>450 megabytes</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>With Desktop</entry> + <entry>64 megabytes</entry> + <entry>1 gigabyte</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Server</entry> + <entry>128 megabytes</entry> + <entry>4 gigabytes</entry> +</row> + +</tbody></tgroup></table> + +<para> + +Here is a sampling of some common Debian system configurations. +You can also get an idea of the disk space used by related groups +of programs by referring to <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/>. + +</para> +<variablelist> + +<varlistentry> + <term>Standard Server</term> + <listitem><para> + +This is a small server profile, useful for a stripped down server +which does not have a lot of niceties for shell users. It includes an +FTP server, a web server, DNS, NIS, and POP. For these 100MB of disk +space would suffice, and then you would need to add space +for any data you serve up. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry arch="not-s390"> + <term>Desktop</term> + <listitem><para> + +A standard desktop box, including the X window system, full desktop +environments, sound, editors, etc. You'll need about 2GB using the +standard desktop task, though it can be done in far less. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry arch="not-s390"> + <term>Work Console</term> + <listitem><para> + +A more stripped-down user machine, without the X window system or X +applications. Possibly suitable for a laptop or mobile computer. The +size is around 140MB. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> + <term>Developer</term> + <listitem><para> + +A desktop setup with all the development packages, such as Perl, C, +C++, etc. Size is around 475MB. Assuming you are adding X11 and some +additional packages for other uses, you should plan around 800MB for +this type of machine. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist><para> + +Remember that these sizes don't include all the other materials which +are usually to be found, such as user files, mail, and data. It is +always best to be generous when considering the space for your own +files and data. Notably, the <filename>/var</filename> partition contains +a lot of state information specific to Debian in addition to its regular +contents like logfiles. The +<command>dpkg</command> files (with information on all installed +packages) can easily consume 20MB. Also, +<command>apt-get</command> puts downloaded packages here before they are +installed. You should +usually allocate at least 100MB for <filename>/var</filename>. + +</para> + + </sect1> + diff --git a/en/preparing/needed-info.xml b/en/preparing/needed-info.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7474a9107 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/needed-info.xml @@ -0,0 +1,416 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="needed-info"> + <title>Information You Will Need</title> + + <sect2> + <title>Documentation</title> + + <sect3> + <title>Installation Manual</title> + +<para condition="for_cd"> + +This document you are now reading, in plain ASCII, HTML or PDF format. + +</para> + +<itemizedlist condition="for_cd"> + +&list-install-manual-files; + +</itemizedlist> + +<para condition="for_wdo"> + +The document you are now reading, which is the official version of the +Installation Guide for the &releasename; release of Debian; available +in <ulink url="&url-release-area;/installmanual">various formats and +translations</ulink>. + +</para> + +<para condition="for_alioth"> + +The document you are now reading, which is a development version of the +Installation Guide for the next release of Debian; available in +<ulink url="&url-d-i-alioth-manual;">various formats and +translations</ulink>. + +</para> + +</sect3> + + + <sect3><title>Hardware documentation</title> +<para> + +Often contains useful information on configuring or using your hardware. + +</para> + + <!-- We need the arch dependence for the whole list to ensure proper xml + as long as not architectures have a paragraph --> + <itemizedlist arch="i386;m68k;alpha;sparc;mips;mipsel"> +<listitem arch="i386"><para> + +<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink> + +</para></listitem> + +<listitem arch="m68k"><para> + +<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink> + +</para></listitem> + +<listitem arch="alpha"><para> + +<ulink url="&url-alpha-faq;">Linux/Alpha FAQ</ulink> + +</para></listitem> + +<listitem arch="sparc"><para> + +<ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;">Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ</ulink> + +</para></listitem> + +<listitem arch="mips;mipsel"><para> + +<ulink url="&url-linux-mips;">Linux/Mips website</ulink> + +</para></listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + </sect3> + + + <sect3 arch="s390"> + <title>&arch-title; Hardware References</title> +<para> + + +Installation instructions and device drivers (DASD, XPRAM, Console, + tape, z90 crypto, chandev, network) for Linux on &arch-title; using + kernel 2.4 + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/docu/l390dd08.pdf">Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink> + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +IBM Redbook describing how Linux can be combined with z/VM on +zSeries and &arch-title; hardware. + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf"> +Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +IBM Redbook describing the Linux distributions available for the +mainframe. It has no chapter about Debian but the basic installation +concepts are the same across all &arch-title; distributions. + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> +Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + </sect3> + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="fsohi"> + <title>Finding Sources of Hardware Information</title> +<para> + +In many cases, the installer will be able to automatically detect your +hardware. But to be prepared, we do recommend familiarizing +yourself with your hardware before the install. + +</para><para> + +Hardware information can be gathered from: + +</para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +The manuals that come with each piece of hardware. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The BIOS setup screens of your computer. You can view these screens +when you start your computer by pressing a combination of keys. Check +your manual for the combination. Often, it is the <keycap>Delete</keycap> key. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The cases and boxes for each piece of hardware. + +</para></listitem> + +<listitem arch="i386"><para> + +The System window in the Windows Control Panel. + + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +System commands or tools in another operating system, including file +manager displays. This source is especially useful for information +about RAM and hard drive memory. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Your system administrator or Internet Service Provider. These +sources can tell you the settings you need to set up your +networking and e-mail. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +<table> +<title>Hardware Information Needed for an Install</title> +<tgroup cols="2"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>Hardware</entry><entry>Information You Might Need</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="5">Hard Drives</entry> + <entry>How many you have.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Their order on the system.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry>Whether IDE or SCSI (most computers are IDE).</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Available free space.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Partitions.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry>Partitions where other operating systems are installed.</entry> +</row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="5">Monitor</entry> + <entry>Model and manufacturer.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Resolutions supported.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Horizontal refresh rate.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Vertical refresh rate.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry>Color depth (number of colors) supported.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Screen size.</entry></row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="3">Mouse</entry> + <entry>Type: serial, PS/2, or USB.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Port.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Manufacturer.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Number of buttons.</entry></row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="1">Network</entry> + <entry>Model and manufacturer.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Type of adapter.</entry></row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="1">Printer</entry> + <entry>Model and manufacturer.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Printing resolutions supported.</entry></row> + +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry morerows="2">Video Card</entry> + <entry>Model and manufacturer.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Video RAM available.</entry></row> +<row arch="not-s390"> + <entry>Resolutions and color depths supported (these should be + checked against your monitor's capabilities).</entry> +</row> + +<row arch="s390"> + <entry morerows="1">DASD</entry> + <entry>Device number(s).</entry> +</row> +<row arch="s390"><entry>Available free space.</entry></row> + +<row arch="s390"> + <entry morerows="2">Network</entry> + <entry>Type of adapter.</entry> +</row> +<row arch="s390"><entry>Device numbers.</entry></row> +<row arch="s390"><entry>Relative adapter number for OSA cards.</entry></row> + +</tbody></tgroup></table> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Hardware Compatibility</title> + +<para> + +Many brand name products work without trouble on Linux. Moreover, +hardware for Linux is improving daily. However, Linux still does not +run as many different types of hardware as some operating systems. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +In particular, Linux usually cannot run hardware that requires a +running version of Windows to work. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +Although some Windows-specific hardware can be made to run on Linux, +doing so usually requires extra effort. In addition, Linux drivers +for Windows-specific hardware are usually specific to one Linux +kernel. Therefore, they can quickly become obsolete. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +So called win-modems are the most common type of this hardware. +However, printers and other equipment may also be Windows-specific. + +</para><para> + +You can check hardware compatibility by: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Checking manufacturers' web sites for new drivers. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Looking at web sites or manuals for information about emulation. +Lesser known brands can sometimes use the drivers or settings for +better-known ones. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Checking hardware compatibility lists for Linux on web sites +dedicated to your architecture. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Searching the Internet for other users' experiences. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Network Settings</title> + +<para> + +If your computer is connected to a network 24 hours a day (i.e., an +Ethernet or equivalent connection — not a PPP connection), you +should ask your network's system administrator for this information. + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Your host name (you may be able to decide this on your own). + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Your domain name. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Your computer's IP address. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The netmask to use with your network. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The IP address of the default gateway system you should route to, if +your network <emphasis>has</emphasis> a gateway. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The system on your network that you should use as a DNS (Domain Name +Service) server. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para condition="supports-dhcp"> + +On the other hand, if your administrator tells you that a DHCP server +is available and is recommended, then you don't need this information +because the DHCP server will provide it directly to your computer +during the installation process. + +</para><para> + +If you use a wireless network, you should also find out: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +ESSID of your wireless network. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +WEP security key (if applicable). + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para> + </sect2> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml b/en/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e444855a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="non-debian-partitioning"> + <title>Pre-Partitioning for Multi-Boot Systems</title> +<para> + +Partitioning your disk simply refers to the act of breaking up your +disk into sections. Each section is then independent of the others. +It's roughly equivalent to putting up walls inside a house; if you add +furniture to one room it doesn't affect any other room. + +</para><para arch="s390"> + +Whenever this section talks about <quote>disks</quote> you should translate +this into a DASD or VM minidisk in the &arch-title; world. Also a machine +means an LPAR or VM guest in this case. + +</para><para> + +If you already have an operating system on your system + +<phrase arch="i386"> +(Windows 9x, Windows NT/2000/XP, OS/2, MacOS, Solaris, FreeBSD, …) +</phrase> + +<phrase arch="alpha"> +(Tru64 (Digital UNIX), OpenVMS, Windows NT, FreeBSD, …) +</phrase> + +<phrase arch="s390"> +(VM, z/OS, OS/390, …) +</phrase> + +<phrase arch="m68k"> +(Amiga OS, Atari TOS, Mac OS, …) +</phrase> + +and want to stick Linux on the same disk, you will need to repartition +the disk. Debian requires its own hard disk partitions. It cannot be +installed on Windows or MacOS partitions. It may be able to share some +partitions with other Linux systems, but that's not covered here. At +the very least you will need a dedicated partition for the Debian +root. + +</para><para> + +You can find information about your current partition setup by using +a partitioning tool for your current operating system<phrase +arch="i386">, such as fdisk or PartitionMagic</phrase><phrase +arch="powerpc">, such as Drive Setup, HD Toolkit, or MacTools</phrase><phrase +arch="m68k">, such as HD SC Setup, HDToolBox, or SCSITool</phrase><phrase +arch="s390">, such as the VM diskmap</phrase>. Partitioning tools always +provide a way to show existing partitions without making changes. + +</para><para> + +In general, changing a partition with a file system already on +it will destroy any information there. Thus you should always make +backups before doing any repartitioning. Using the analogy of the +house, you would probably want to move all the furniture out of the +way before moving a wall or you risk destroying it. + +</para><para arch="hppa" condition="FIXME"> + +<emphasis>FIXME: write about HP-UX disks?</emphasis> + +</para><para> + +If your computer has more than one hard disk, you may want to dedicate +one of the hard disks completely to Debian. If so, you don't need to +partition that disk before booting the installation system; the +installer's included partitioning program can handle the job nicely. + +</para><para> + +If your machine has only one hard disk, and you would like to +completely replace the current operating system with &debian;, +you also can wait to partition as part of the installation process +(<xref linkend="partman"/>), after you have booted the +installation system. However this only works if you plan to boot the +installer system from tapes, CD-ROM or files on a connected machine. +Consider: if you boot from files placed on the hard disk, and then +partition that same hard disk within the installation system, thus +erasing the boot files, you'd better hope the installation is +successful the first time around. At the least in this case, you +should have some alternate means of reviving your machine like the +original system's installation tapes or CDs. + +</para><para> + +If your machine already has multiple partitions, and enough space can +be provided by deleting and replacing one or more of them, then you +too can wait and use the Debian installer's partitioning program. You +should still read through the material below, because there may be +special circumstances like the order of the existing partitions within +the partition map, that force you to partition before installing +anyway. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +If your machine has a FAT or NTFS filesystem, as used by DOS and Windows, +you can wait and use Debian installer's partitioning program to +resize the filesystem. + +</para><para> + +If none of the above apply, you'll need to partition your hard disk before +starting the installation to create partition-able space for +Debian. If some of the partitions will be owned by other operating +systems, you should create those partitions using native operating +system partitioning programs. We recommend that you do +<emphasis>not</emphasis> attempt to create partitions for &debian; +using another operating system's tools. Instead, you should just +create the native operating system's partitions you will want to +retain. + +</para><para> + +If you are going to install more than one operating system on the same +machine, you should install all other system(s) before proceeding with +Linux installation. Windows and other OS installations may destroy +your ability to start Linux, or encourage you to reformat non-native +partitions. + +</para><para> + +You can recover from these actions or avoid them, but installing +the native system first saves you trouble. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian; the Linux +partitions should appear before all other partitions on the disk, +especially MacOS boot partitions. This should be kept in mind when +pre-partitioning; you should create a Linux placeholder partition to +come <emphasis>before</emphasis> the other bootable partitions on the +disk. (The small partitions dedicated to Apple disk drivers are not +bootable.) You can delete the placeholder with the Linux partition +tools later during the actual install, and replace it with Linux +partitions. + +</para><para> + +If you currently have one hard disk with one partition (a common setup +for desktop computers), and you want to multi-boot the native +operating system and Debian, you will need to: + + <orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Back up everything on the computer. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Boot from the native operating system installer media such as CD-ROM +or tapes. + +<phrase arch="powerpc">When booting from a MacOS CD, hold the +<keycap>c</keycap> key while +booting to force the CD to become the active MacOS system.</phrase> + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Use the native partitioning tools to create native system +partition(s). Leave either a place holder partition or free space for +&debian;. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Install the native operating system on its new partition. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Boot back into the native system to verify everything's OK, + and to download the Debian installer boot files. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Boot the Debian installer to continue installing Debian. + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para> + +&nondeb-part-alpha.xml; +&nondeb-part-i386.xml; +&nondeb-part-m68k.xml; +&nondeb-part-sparc.xml; +&nondeb-part-powerpc.xml; + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..39b6f876d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Partitioning in Tru64 UNIX</title> +<para> + +Tru64 UNIX, formerly known as Digital UNIX, which is in turn formerly +known as OSF/1, uses the partitioning scheme similar to the BSD <quote>disk +label</quote>, which allows for up to eight partitions per disk drive. The +partitions are numbered <quote>1</quote> through to <quote>8</quote> in +Linux and <quote>lettered</quote> <quote>a</quote> through to +<quote>h</quote> in UNIX. Linux kernels 2.2 and higher always correspond +<quote>1</quote> to <quote>a</quote>, <quote>2</quote> to <quote>b</quote> +and so on. For example, <filename>rz0e</filename> in Tru64 UNIX would most +likely be called <filename>sda5</filename> in Linux. + +</para><para> + +Partitions in a Tru64 disk label may overlap. Moreover, if this disk +will be used from Tru64, the <quote>c</quote> partition is required to span +the entire disk (thus overlapping all other non-empty partitions). Under +Linux this makes <filename>sda3</filename> identical to +<filename>sda</filename> (<filename>sdb3</filename> to +<filename>sdb</filename>, if present, and so on). However, the partman +partitioning tool used by &d-i; cannot handle overlapping partitions at +present. As a result, it is currently not recommended to share disks +between Tru64 and Debian. Partitions on Tru64 disks can be mounted +under Debian after installation has been completed. + +</para><para> + +Another conventional requirement is for the <quote>a</quote> partition to +start from the beginning of the disk, so that it always includes the boot +block with the disk label. If you intend to boot Debian from that disk, you +need to size it at least 2MB to fit aboot and perhaps a kernel. +Note that this partition is only required for compatibility; you must +not put a file system onto it, or you'll destroy data. + +</para><para> + +It is possible, and indeed quite reasonable, to share a swap partition +between UNIX and Linux. In this case it will be needed to do a +<command>mkswap</command> on that partition every time the system is rebooted +from UNIX into Linux, as UNIX will damage the swap signature. You may +want to run <command>mkswap</command> from the Linux start-up scripts before +adding swap space with <command>swapon -a</command>. + +</para><para> + +If you want to mount UNIX partitions under Linux, note that Digital UNIX +can use two different file system types, UFS and AdvFS, of which Linux +only understands the former. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Partitioning in Windows NT</title> + +<para> + +Windows NT uses the PC-style partition table. If you are manipulating +existing FAT or NTFS partitions, it is recommended that you use the +native Windows NT tools (or, more conveniently, you can also +repartition your disk from the AlphaBIOS setup menu). Otherwise, it +is not really necessary to partition from Windows; the Linux +partitioning tools will generally do a better job. Note that when you +run NT, the Disk Administrator may offer you to write a <quote>harmless +signature</quote> on non-Windows disks if you have any. +<emphasis>Never</emphasis> let it do that, as this signature will destroy +the partition information. + +</para><para> + +If you plan to boot Linux from an ARC/AlphaBIOS/ARCSBIOS console, you +will need a (small) FAT partition for MILO. 5 MB is quite +sufficient. If Windows NT is installed, its 6 MB bootstrap partition +can be employed for this purpose. Debian &releasename; does not support +installing MILO. If you already have MILO installed on your system, or +install MILO from other media, Debian can still be booted from ARC. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5509b3d27 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="i386"><title>Partitioning From DOS or Windows</title> +<para> + +If you are manipulating existing FAT or NTFS partitions, it is +recommended that you either use the scheme below or native Windows or +DOS tools. Otherwise, it is not really necessary to partition from DOS +or Windows; the Linux partitioning tools will generally do a better +job. + +</para><para> + +But if you have a large IDE disk, and are using neither LBA addressing, +overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), nor a +new (post 1998) BIOS that supports large disk access extensions, then +you must locate your Debian boot partition carefully. In this case, +you will have to put the boot partition into the first 1024 cylinders +of your hard drive (usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS +translation). This may require that you move an existing FAT or NTFS +partition. + +</para> + + <sect3 id="lossless"> + <title>Lossless Repartitioning When Starting From DOS, Win-32 or OS/2 + </title> + +<para> + +One of the most common installations is onto a system that already +contains DOS (including Windows 3.1), Win32 (such as Windows 95, 98, Me, +NT, 2000, XP), or OS/2, and it is desired to put Debian onto the same disk +without destroying the previous system. Note that the installer supports +resizing of FAT and NTFS filesystems as used by DOS and Windows. Simply +start the installer, select the option to <menuchoice> <guimenuitem>Manually +edit partition table</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, select the partition to +resize, and specify its new size. +So in most cases you should not need to use the method described below. + +</para><para> + +Before going any further, you should have decided how you will be +dividing up the disk. The method in this section will only split a +partition into two pieces. One will contain the original OS and the +other will be used for Debian. During the installation of Debian, you +will be given the opportunity to use the Debian portion of the disk as you +see fit, i.e., as swap or as a file system. + +</para><para> + +The idea is to move all the data on the partition to the beginning, +before changing the partition information, so that nothing will be +lost. It is important that you do as little as possible between the +data movement and repartitioning to minimize the chance of a file +being written near the end of the partition as this will decrease the +amount of space you can take from the partition. + +</para><para> + +The first thing needed is a copy of <command>fips</command> which is +available in the <filename>tools/</filename> directory on your nearest Debian +mirror. Unzip the archive and copy the files +<filename>RESTORRB.EXE</filename>, <filename>FIPS.EXE</filename> and +<filename>ERRORS.TXT</filename> to a bootable floppy. A bootable floppy can +be created using the command <filename>sys a:</filename> under DOS. +<command>fips</command> comes with very good documentation which you may +want to read. You will definitely need to read the documentation if +you use a disk compression driver or a disk manager. Create the disk +and read the documentation <emphasis>before</emphasis> you defragment the disk. + +</para><para> + +The next thing needed is to move all the data to the beginning of the +partition. <command>defrag</command>, which comes standard with DOS 6.0 and +later, can easily do the job. See the <command>fips</command> documentation +for a list of other software that may do the trick. Note that if you +have Windows 9x, you must run <command>defrag</command> from there, since +DOS doesn't understand VFAT, which is used to support for long +filenames, used in Windows 95 and higher. + +</para><para> + +After running the defragmenter (which can take a while on a large +disk), reboot with the <command>fips</command> disk you created in the +floppy drive. Simply type <filename>a:\fips</filename> and follow the directions. + +</para><para> + +Note that there are many other partition managers out there, in +case <command>fips</command> doesn't do the trick for you. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 id="partitioning-for-dos"><title>Partitioning for DOS</title> + +<para> + +If you are partitioning for DOS drives, or changing the size of DOS +partitions, using Linux tools, many people experience problems working +with the resulting FAT partitions. For instance, some have reported +slow performance, consistent problems with <command>scandisk</command>, or +other weird errors in DOS or Windows. + +</para><para> + +Apparently, whenever you create or resize a partition for DOS use, +it's a good idea to fill the first few sectors with zeros. Do this +prior to running DOS's <command>format</command> command, from Linux: + +<informalexample><screen> +# dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/hdXX bs=512 count=4 +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09f677851 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Partitioning in AmigaOS</title> +<para> + +If you are running AmigaOS, you can use the <command>HDToolBox</command> +program to adjust your native partitions prior to installation. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Partitioning in Atari TOS</title> +<para> + +Atari partition IDs are three ASCII characters, use <quote>LNX</quote> for +data and <quote>SWP</quote> for swap partitions. If using the low memory +installation method, a small Minix partition is also needed (about 2 MB), +for which the partition ID is <quote>MNX</quote>. Failure to set the +appropriate partition IDs not only prevents the Debian installation process +from recognizing the partitions, but also results in TOS attempting to use +the Linux partitions, which confuses the hard disk driver and renders the +whole disk inaccessible. + +</para><para> + +There are a multitude of third party partitioning tools available (the +Atari <command>harddisk</command> utility doesn't permit changing the +partition ID); this manual cannot give detailed descriptions for all +of them. The following description covers <command>SCSITool</command> (from +Hard+Soft GmBH). + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Start <command>SCSITool</command> and select the disk you want to partition +(<guimenu>Disk</guimenu> menu, item <guimenuitem>select</guimenuitem>). + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +From the <guimenu>Partition</guimenu> menu, select either +<guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem> to add new partitions or change the +existing partition sizes, or <guimenuitem>Change</guimenuitem> to +change one specific partition. Unless you have already created +partitions with the right sizes and only want to change the partition +ID, <guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem> is probably the best choice. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +For the <guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem> choice, select +<guilabel>existing</guilabel> in the dialog box +prompting the initial settings. The next window shows a list of +existing partitions which you can adjust using the scroll buttons, or +by clicking in the bar graphs. The first column in the partition list +is the partition type; just click on the text field to edit it. When +you are finished changing partition settings, save the changes by +leaving the window with the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +For the <guimenuitem>Change</guimenuitem> option, select the partition +to change in the selection list, and select <guilabel>other +systems</guilabel> in the dialog box. The +next window lists detailed information about the location of this +partition, and lets you change the partition ID. Save changes by +leaving the window with the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Write down the Linux names for each of the partitions you created or +changed for use with Linux — see <xref linkend="device-names"/>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Quit <command>SCSITool</command> using the +<guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem> item from the <guimenu>File</guimenu> +menu. The computer will reboot to make sure the changed partition +table is used by TOS. If you changed any TOS/GEM partitions, they will +be invalidated and have to be reinitialized (we told you to back up +everything on the disk, didn't we?). + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para><para> + +There is a partitioning tool for Linux/m68k called +<command>atari-fdisk</command> in the installation system, but for now we +recommend you partition your disk using a TOS partition editor or some +disk tool. If your partition editor doesn't have an option to edit the +partition type, you can do this crucial step at a later stage (from +the booted temporary install RAMdisk). <command>SCSITool</command> is only +one of the partition editors we know of which supports selection of +arbitrary partition types. There may be others; select the tool that +suits your needs. + +</para> +</sect2> + + <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Partitioning in MacOS</title> +<para> + +Partitioning tools for Macintosh tested include <command>pdisk</command>, +<command>HD SC Setup</command> 7.3.5 (Apple), <command>HDT</command> 1.8 (FWB), +<command>SilverLining</command> (LaCie), and <command>DiskTool</command> (Tim +Endres, GPL). Full versions are required for <command>HDT</command> and +<command>SilverLining</command>. The Apple tool requires a patch in order +to recognize third-party disks (a description on how to patch <command>HD +SC Setup</command> using <command>ResEdit</command> can be found at +<ulink url="http://www.euronet.nl/users/ernstoud/patch.html"></ulink>). + +</para><para> + +For IDE based Macs, you need to use <command>Apple Drive Setup</command> to create +empty space for the Linux partitions, and complete the partitioning under +Linux, or use the MacOS version of pdisk available from the MkLinux FTP +server. + +</para> +</sect2> + diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..948995d9e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>MacOS/OSX Partitioning</title> + +<para> + +The <application>Apple Drive Setup</application> application can be found in the +<filename>Utilities</filename> folder on the MacOS CD. It will not adjust existing +partitions; it is limited to partitioning the entire disk at once. The +disk driver partitions don't show up in <application>Drive Setup</application>. + +</para><para> + +Remember to create a placeholder partition for GNU/Linux, preferably +positioned first in the disk layout. it doesn't matter what type it +is, it will be deleted and replaced later inside the &debian; installer. + +</para><para> + +If you are planning to install both MacOS 9 and OS X, it is best to +create separate partitions for OS 9 and OS X. If they are installed on +the same partition, <application>Startup Disk</application> (and reboot) must be used to select +between the two; the choice between the two systems can't be made at +boot time. With separate partitions, separate options for OS 9 and OS +X will appear when holding the <keycap>option</keycap> key at boot time, and separate +options can be installed in the <application>yaboot</application> boot menu as well. Also, +Startup Disk will de-bless all other mountable partitions, which can +affect GNU/Linux booting. Both OS 9 and OS X partitions will be +accessible from either OS 9 or OS X. + +</para><para> + +GNU/Linux is unable to access information on UFS partitions, but does +support HFS+ (aka MacOS Extended) partitions. OS X requires one of these +two types for its boot partition. MacOS 9 can be installed on either HFS +(aka MacOS Standard) or HFS+. To share information between the MacOS and +GNU/Linux systems, an exchange partition is handy. HFS, HFS+ and MS-DOS FAT +partitions are supported by both MacOS and Linux. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2784f6a2b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>Partitioning from SunOS</title> + +<para> + +It's perfectly fine to partition from SunOS; in fact, if you intend to +run both SunOS and Debian on the same machine, it is recommended that +you partition using SunOS prior to installing Debian. The Linux +kernel understands Sun disk labels, so there are no problems there. +Just make sure you leave room for the Debian root partition within the +first 1GB area of the boot disk. You can also place the kernel image on a +UFS partition if that is easier than putting the root partition there. +SILO supports booting Linux and SunOS from either EXT2 (Linux), UFS +(SunOS), romfs and iso9660 (CDROM) partitions. + +</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>Partitioning from Linux or another OS</title> + +<para> + +Whatever system you are using to partition, make sure you create a +<quote>Sun disk label</quote> on your boot disk. This is the only kind of +partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, and so it's the +only scheme from which you can boot. In <command>fdisk</command>, the +<keycap>s</keycap> key is used to create Sun disk labels. You only need to do this +on drives that do not already have a Sun disk label. If you are using a +drive that was previously formatted using a PC (or other architecture) you +must create a new disk label, or problems with the disk geometry will most +likely occur. + +</para><para> + +You will probably be using <command>SILO</command> as your boot loader (the +small program which runs the operating system kernel). +<command>SILO</command> has certain requirements for partition sizes and +location; see <xref linkend="partitioning"/>. + +</para> + </sect2> diff --git a/en/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml b/en/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e992c0d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="pre-install-bios-setup"> + <title>Pre-Installation Hardware and Operating System Setup</title> +<para> + +This section will walk you through pre-installation hardware setup, if +any, that you will need to do prior to installing Debian. Generally, +this involves checking and possibly changing firmware settings for +your system. The <quote>firmware</quote> is the core software used by the +hardware; it is most critically invoked during the bootstrap process +(after power-up). Known hardware issues affecting the reliability of +&debian; on your system are also highlighted. + +</para> + +&bios-setup-i386.xml; +&bios-setup-m68k.xml; +&bios-setup-powerpc.xml; +&bios-setup-sparc.xml; +&bios-setup-s390.xml; + + <sect2><title>Hardware Issues to Watch Out For</title> +<para arch="not-s390"> + +Many people have tried operating their 90 MHz CPU at 100 MHz, etc. It +sometimes works, but is sensitive to temperature and other factors and +can actually damage your system. One of the authors of this document +over-clocked his own system for a year, and then the system started +aborting the <command>gcc</command> program with an unexpected signal +while it was compiling the operating system kernel. Turning the CPU +speed back down to its rated value solved the problem. + +</para><para arch="not-s390"> + +The <command>gcc</command> compiler is often the first thing to die +from bad memory modules (or other hardware problems that change data +unpredictably) because it builds huge data structures that it +traverses repeatedly. An error in these data structures will cause it +to execute an illegal instruction or access a non-existent +address. The symptom of this will be <command>gcc</command> dying from +an unexpected signal. + +</para><para arch="m68k"> + +Atari TT RAM boards are notorious for RAM problems under Linux; if you +encounter any strange problems, try running at least the kernel in +ST-RAM. Amiga users may need to exclude RAM using a booter memfile. + +<phrase condition="FIXME"><emphasis> + +FIXME: more description of this needed. + +</emphasis></phrase> + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +The very best motherboards support parity RAM and will actually tell +you if your system has a single-bit error in RAM. Unfortunately, they +don't have a way to fix the error, thus they generally crash +immediately after they tell you about the bad RAM. Still, it's better +to be told you have bad memory than to have it silently insert errors +in your data. Thus, the best systems have motherboards that support +parity and true-parity memory modules; see +<xref linkend="Parity-RAM"/>. + +</para><para arch="i386"> + +If you do have true-parity RAM and your motherboard can handle it, be +sure to enable any BIOS settings that cause the motherboard to +interrupt on memory parity errors. + +</para> + + <sect3 arch="i386"><title>The Turbo Switch</title> +<para> + +Many systems have a <emphasis>turbo</emphasis> switch that controls +the speed of the CPU. Select the high-speed setting. If your BIOS +allows you to disable software control of the turbo switch (or +software control of CPU speed), do so and lock the system in +high-speed mode. We have one report that on a particular system, while +Linux is auto-probing (looking for hardware devices) it can +accidentally touch the software control for the turbo switch. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="i386"><title>Cyrix CPUs and Floppy Disk Errors</title> +<para> + +Many users of Cyrix CPUs have had to disable the cache in their +systems during installation, because the floppy disk has errors if +they do not. If you have to do this, be sure to re-enable your cache +when you are finished with installation, as the system runs +<emphasis>much</emphasis> slower with the cache disabled. + +</para><para> + +We don't think this is necessarily the fault of the Cyrix CPU. It may +be something that Linux can work around. We'll continue to look into +the problem. For the technically curious, we suspect a problem with +the cache being invalid after a switch from 16-bit to 32-bit code. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="i386"><title>Peripheral Hardware Settings</title> +<para> + +You may have to change some settings or jumpers on your computer's +peripheral cards. Some cards have setup menus, while others rely on +jumpers. This document cannot hope to provide complete information on +every hardware device; what it hopes to provide is useful tips. + +</para><para> + +If any cards provide <quote>mapped memory</quote>, the memory should be +mapped somewhere between 0xA0000 and 0xFFFFF (from 640K to just below 1 +megabyte) or at an address at least 1 megabyte greater than the total +amount of RAM in your system. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="i386" id="usb-keyboard-config"> + <title>USB BIOS support and keyboards</title> +<para> + +If you have no AT-style keyboard and only a USB model, you may need +to enable legacy AT keyboard emulation in your BIOS setup. Only do this if +the installation system fails to use your keyboard in USB mode. Conversely, +for some systems (especially laptops) you may need to disable legacy USB +support if your keyboard does not respond. +Consult your main board manual and look in the BIOS for <quote>Legacy +keyboard emulation</quote> or <quote>USB keyboard support</quote> options. + +</para> + </sect3> + + <sect3><title>More than 64 MB RAM</title> +<para> + +The Linux Kernel cannot always detect what amount of RAM you have. If +this is the case please look at <xref linkend="boot-parms"/>. + +</para> + </sect3> + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/preparing/preparing.xml b/en/preparing/preparing.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdedadffc --- /dev/null +++ b/en/preparing/preparing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<chapter id="preparing"> + <title>Before Installing &debian;</title> +<para> + +This chapter deals with the preparation for installing Debian before you even +boot the installer. This includes backing up your data, gathering information +about your hardware, and locating any necessary information. + +</para> + +&install-overview.xml; +&backup.xml; +&needed-info.xml; +&minimum-hardware-reqts.xml; +&non-debian-partitioning.xml; +&pre-install-bios-setup.xml; + +</chapter> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/components.xml b/en/using-d-i/components.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b53f88ef5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/components.xml @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="module-details"> + <title>Using Individual Components</title> +<para> + +In this section we will describe each installer component in +detail. The components have been grouped into stages that should +be recognizable for users. They are presented in the order they +appear during the install. Note that not all modules will be used +for every installation; which modules are actually used depends on +the installation method you use and on your hardware. + +</para> + + <sect2 id="di-setup"> + <title>Setting up Debian Installer and Hardware Configuration</title> +<para> + +Let's assume the Debian Installer has booted and you are facing its +first screen. At this time, the capabilities of &d-i; are still quite +limited. It doesn't know much about your hardware, preferred language, +or even the task it should perform. Don't worry. Because &d-i; is quite +clever, it can automatically probe your hardware, locate the rest +of its components and upgrade itself to a capable installation system. + +However, you still need to help &d-i; with some information it can't +determine automatically (like selecting your preferred language, keyboard +layout or desired network mirror). + +</para><para> + +You will notice that &d-i; performs <firstterm>hardware detection</firstterm> +several times during this stage. The first time is targeted specifically +at the hardware needed to load installer components (e.g. your CD-ROM or +network card). As not all drivers may be available during this first run, +hardware detection needs to be repeated later in the process. + +</para> + +&module-lowmem.xml; +&module-languagechooser.xml; +&module-countrychooser.xml; +&module-localechooser.xml; +&module-kbd-chooser.xml; +&module-s390-netdevice.xml; +&module-ddetect.xml; +&module-cdrom-detect.xml; +&module-iso-scan.xml; +&module-anna.xml; +&module-netcfg.xml; +&module-choose-mirror.xml; + + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-partition"> + <title>Partitioning and Mount Point Selection</title> +<para> + +At this time, after hardware detection has been executed a final time, +&d-i; should be at its full strength, customized for the user's needs +and ready to do some real work. + +As the title of this section indicates, the main task of the next few +components lies in partitioning your disks, creating filesystems, +assigning mountpoints and optionally configuring closely related issues +like LVM or RAID devices. + +</para> + +&module-s390-dasd.xml; +&module-partman.xml; +&module-autopartkit.xml; +&module-partitioner.xml; +&module-partconf.xml; +&module-lvmcfg.xml; +&module-mdcfg.xml; + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-install-base"> + <title>Installing the Base System</title> +<para> + +Although this stage is the least problematic, it consumes most time of +the install because it downloads, verifies and unpacks the whole base +system. If you have a slow computer or network connection, this could +take some time. + +</para> + +&module-base-installer.xml; + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-make-bootable"> + <title>Making Your System Bootable</title> + +<para condition="supports-nfsroot"> + +If you are installing a diskless workstation, obviously, booting off +the local disk isn't a meaningful option, and this step will be +skipped. <phrase arch="sparc">You may wish to set the OpenBoot to boot +from the network by default; see <xref +linkend="boot-dev-select-sun"/>.</phrase> + +</para><para> + +Note that multiple operating systems booting on a single machine is +still something of a black art. This document does not even attempt +to document the various boot managers, which vary by architecture and +even by subarchitecture. You should see your boot manager's +documentation for more information. + +</para> + +&module-os-prober.xml; +&module-alpha-aboot-installer.xml; +&module-hppa-palo-installer.xml; +&module-i386-grub-installer.xml; +&module-i386-lilo-installer.xml; +&module-ia64-elilo-installer.xml; +&module-mips-arcboot-installer.xml; +&module-mipsel-colo-installer.xml; +&module-mipsel-delo-installer.xml; +&module-powerpc-yaboot-installer.xml; +&module-powerpc-quik-installer.xml; +&module-s390-zipl-installer.xml; +&module-sparc-silo-installer.xml; +&module-nobootloader.xml; + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-finish"> + <title>Finishing the First Stage</title> +<para> + +These are the last bits to do before rebooting to your new Debian. It +mostly consists of tidying up after the &d-i;. + +</para> + +&module-prebaseconfig.xml; + </sect2> + + <sect2 id="di-miscellaneous"> + <title>Miscellaneous</title> +<para> + +The components listed in this section are usually not involved in the +installation process, but are waiting in the background to help the +user in case something goes wrong. + +</para> + +&module-save-logs.xml; +&module-cdrom-checker.xml; +&module-shell.xml; +&module-network-console.xml; +&module-baseconfig.xml; + </sect2> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7deaebb5a --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="alpha"> + <title>Install <command>aboot</command> on a Hard Disk</title> +<para> + +If you have booted from SRM, if you select this option, the installer +will write <command>aboot</command> to the first sector of the disk on +which you installed Debian. Be <emphasis>very</emphasis> careful — it +is <emphasis>not</emphasis> possible to boot multiple operating +systems (e.g. GNU/Linux, Free/Open/NetBSD, OSF/1 a.k.a. Digital Unix +a.k.a. Tru64 Unix, or OpenVMS) from the same disk. If you also have a +different operating system installed on the disk where you have +installed Debian, you will have to boot GNU/Linux from a floppy +instead. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..741e7df5f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="base-installer"> + <title>Base System Installation</title> + +<para> + +During the Base installation, package unpacking and setup messages are +redirected to <userinput>tty3</userinput>. You can access this +terminal by pressing +<keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F3</keycap></keycombo>; +get back to the main installer process with +<keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>. + + +</para><para> + +The unpack/setup messages generated by the base installation are saved in +<filename>/var/log/messages</filename> when the installation is +performed over a serial console. + +</para><para> + +As part of the installation, a Linux kernel will be installed. At the default +priority, the installer will choose one for you that best matches your +hardware. In lower priority modes, you will be able to choose from a list +of available kernels. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/baseconfig.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/baseconfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a6acbeeb --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/baseconfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="baseconfig"> + <title>Running <command>base-config</command> From Within &d-i;</title> + +<para> + +It is possible to configure the base system within the first stage +installer (before rebooting from the hard drive), by running +<command>base-config</command> in a <firstterm>chroot</firstterm> +environment. This is mainly useful for testing the installer and +should normally be avoided. +<!-- Feel free to prove me I'm wrong --> + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9e3ba30f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<!-- +- Component is only selected and executed if the installer needs to load + installer components or the base system from the network + (either local or the internet). +- This means you first have to configure a network interface. +- A list of countries is displayed with the default based on the country you + selected earlier. +- Note that not all mirrors are equal (see http://www.nl.debian.org/mirror/list) +- Selection of a local mirror (at top of the list: manual selection). +- After selecting a country, a list of mirrors in the country will be shown. + +- The selected mirror will be tested. +- How to handle problems with mirrors. +-->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/countrychooser.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/countrychooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd767b701 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/countrychooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect3 id="country-chooser" condition="sarge"> + <title>Country selection</title> + +<para> + +If you selected a language in <xref linkend="lang-chooser"/> which has +more than one country associated with it (true for Chinese, English, +French, and many other languages), you can specify the country here. +If you choose <guimenuitem>Other</guimenuitem> at the bottom of the list, +you will be presented with a list of all countries, grouped by continent. + +</para><para> + +This selection will be used later in the installation process to pick the +default timezone and a Debian mirror appropriate for your geographic +location. If the defaults proposed by the installer are not suitable, you +can make a different choice. The selected country, together with the selected +language, may also affect locale settings for your new Debian system. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb5398812 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="hppa"> + <title><command>palo</command>-installer</title> +<para> + +The bootloader on PA-RISC is <quote>palo</quote>. +<command>PALO</command> is similar in configuration and usage to +<command>LILO</command>, with a few exceptions. First of all, +<command>PALO</command> allows you to boot any kernel image on your +boot partition. This is because <command>PALO</command> can actually +read Linux partitions. + +</para><para condition="FIXME"> + +hppa FIXME ( need more info ) + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..77cdd9a45 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="i386"> + <title>Install the <command>Grub</command> Boot Loader + on a Hard Disk</title> +<para> + +The main &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>grub</quote>. +Grub is a flexible and robust boot loader and a good default choice for +newbies and old hands alike. + +</para><para> + +By default, grub will be installed into the Master Boot Record (MBR), where +it will take over complete control of the boot process. If you prefer, you +can install it elsewhere. See the grub manual for complete information. + +</para><para> + +If you do not want to install grub at all, use the Back button to get to +the main menu, and from there select whatever bootloader you would like to +use. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef517fc1d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="i386"> + <title>Install the <command>LILO</command> Boot Loader + on a Hard Disk</title> +<para> + +The second &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>LILO</quote>. +It is an old complex program which offers lots of functionality, +including DOS, Windows, and OS/2 boot management. Please carefully +read the instructions in the directory +<filename>/usr/share/doc/lilo/</filename> if you have special needs; +also see the <ulink url="&url-lilo-howto;">LILO mini-HOWTO</ulink>. + +</para> +<note><para> + +Currently the LILO installation will only create menu entries for other +operating systems if these can be <firstterm>chainloaded</firstterm>. +This means you may have to manually add a menu entry for operating +systems like GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd after the installation. + +</para></note> +<para> + +&d-i; presents you three choices where to install the +<command>LILO</command> boot loader: + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term>Master Boot Record (MBR)</term><listitem><para> + +This way the <command>LILO</command> will take complete control of the +boot process. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term>new Debian partition</term><listitem><para> + +Choose this if you want to use another boot +manager. <command>LILO</command> will install itself at the beginning +of the new Debian partition and it will serve as a secondary boot +loader. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term>Other choice</term><listitem><para> + +Useful for advanced users who want to install <command>LILO</command> +somewhere else. In this case you will be asked for desired +location. You can use devfs style names, such as those that start with +<filename>/dev/ide</filename>, <filename>/dev/scsi</filename>, and +<filename>/dev/discs</filename>, as well as traditional names, such as +<filename>/dev/hda</filename> or <filename>/dev/sda</filename>. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +</para><para> + +If you can no longer boot into Windows 9x (or DOS) after this step, +you'll need to use a Windows 9x (MS-DOS) boot disk and use the +<userinput>fdisk /mbr</userinput> command to reinstall the MS-DOS +master boot record — however, this means that you'll need to use +some other way to get back into Debian! For more information on this +please read <xref linkend="reactivating-win"/>. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ec6bc26d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="ia64"> + <title>Install the <command>ELILO</command> Boot Loader + on a Hard Disk</title> +<para> + +The &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>elilo</quote>. +It is modeled on the <quote>lilo</quote> boot loader for the +x86 architecture and uses a similar configuration file. +However, instead of writing an MBR or partition boot record to +the disk, it copies the necessary files to a separate FAT formatted +disk partition and modifies the <guimenuitem>EFI Boot Manager</guimenuitem> +menu in the firmware to point to the files in the EFI partition. +The <command>elilo</command> boot loader is really in two parts. +The <filename>/usr/sbin/elilo</filename> command manages the partition and +copies file into it. +The <filename>elilo.efi</filename> program is copied into the EFI +partition and then run by the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> to actually +do the work of loading and starting the Linux kernel. + +</para><para> + +The <quote>elilo</quote> configuration and installation is done as the +last step of installing the packages of the base installation. +&d-i; will present you with a list of potential disk partitions that it +has found suitable for an EFI partition. +Select the partition you set up earlier in the installation, typically +a partition on the same disk that contains your +<emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem. + +</para> + + <warning><title>Choose the correct partition!</title> + +<para> + +The criteria for selecting a partition is that it is FAT format +filesystem with its <emphasis>boot</emphasis> flag set. +&d-i; may show multiple choices depending on what it finds from scanning +all of the disks of the system including EFI partitions of other system +disks and EFI diagnostic partitions. +Remember, the <command>elilo</command> may format the partition during +the installation, erasing any previous contents! + +</para></warning> + + </sect3> + + <sect3 arch="ia64"> + <title>EFI Partition Contents</title> + +<para> + +The EFI partition is a FAT filesystem format partition on one of the +hard disks of the system, usually the same disk that contains the +<emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem. +It is normally not mounted on a running system as it is only needed +by the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> to load the system and the +installer part of the <command>elilo</command> writes to the filesystem +directly. +The <command>/usr/sbin/elilo</command> utility writes the following files +into the <filename>efi/debian</filename> directory of the EFI +partition during the installation. +Note that the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> would find these files +using the path <filename>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:\efi\debian</filename>. +There may be other files in this filesystem as well over time as +the system is updated or re-configured. + +</para> + +<variablelist> + +<varlistentry> +<term><filename>elilo.conf</filename></term> +<listitem><para> + +This is the configuration file read by the boot loader when it starts. +It is a copy of the <filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename> with +the filenames re-written to refer to files in the EFI partition. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term><filename>elilo.efi</filename></term> +<listitem><para> + +This is the boot loader program that the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> +runs to boot the system. +It is the program behind the <guimenuitem>Debian GNU/Linux</guimenuitem> +menu item of the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> command menu. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term><filename>initrd.img</filename></term> +<listitem><para> + +This is the initial root filesystem used to boot the kernel. +It is a copy of the file referenced in the +<filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename>. +In a standard Debian installation it would be the file in +<filename>/boot</filename> pointed to by the symbolic link +<filename>/initrd.img</filename>. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term><filename>readme.txt</filename></term> +<listitem><para> + +This is a small text file warning you that the contents of the +directory are managed by the <command>elilo</command> and that +any local changes would be lost at the next time +<filename>/usr/sbin/elilo</filename> is run. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term><filename>vmlinuz</filename></term> +<listitem><para> + +This is the compressed kernel itself. +It is a copy of the file referenced in the +<filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename>. +In a standard Debian installation it would be the file in +<filename>/boot</filename> pointed to by the symbolic link +<filename>/vmlinuz</filename>. + +</para></listitem></varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aaf56d89d --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="iso-scan"> + <title>Looking for the Debian Installer ISO Image</title> +<para> + +When installing via the <emphasis>hd-media</emphasis> method, there +will be a moment where you need to find and mount the Debian Installer +iso image in order to get the rest of the installation files. The +component <command>iso-scan</command> does exactly this. + +</para><para> + +At first, <command>iso-scan</command> automatically mounts all block +devices (e.g. partitions) which have some known filesystem on them and +sequentially searches for filenames ending with +<filename>.iso</filename> (or <filename>.ISO</filename> for that +matter). Beware that the first attempt scans only files in the root +directory and in the first level of subdirectories (i.e. it finds +<filename>/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>, +<filename>/data/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>, +but not +<filename>/data/tmp/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>). +After an iso image has been found, <command>iso-scan</command> checks +its content to determine if the image is a valid Debian iso image or +not. In the former case we are done, in the latter +<command>iso-scan</command> seeks for another image. + +</para><para> + +In case the previous attempt to find an installer iso image fails, +<command>iso-scan</command> will ask you whether you would like to +perform a more thorough search. This pass doesn't just look into the +topmost directories, but really traverses whole filesystem. + +</para><para> + +If <command>iso-scan</command> does not discover your installer iso +image, reboot back to your original operating system and check if the +image is named correctly (ending in <filename>.iso</filename>), if it is +placed on a filesystem recognizable by &d-i;, and if it is not +corrupted (verify the checksum). Experienced Unix users could do this +without rebooting on the second console. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31459f284 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="kbd-chooser"> + <title>Choosing a Keyboard</title> + +<para> + +Keyboards are often tailored to the characters used in a language. +Select a layout that conforms to the keyboard you are using, or +select something close if the keyboard layout you want +isn't represented. Once the system installation is complete, you'll be +able to select a keyboard layout from a wider range of choices (run +<command>kbdconfig</command> as root after you have completed the +installation). + +</para><para> + +Move the highlight to the keyboard selection you desire and press +&enterkey;. Use the arrow keys to move the highlight — they are +in the same place in all national language keyboard layouts, so they +are independent of the keyboard configuration. An 'extended' keyboard +is one with <keycap>F1</keycap> through <keycap>F10</keycap> keys +along the top row. + +</para><para arch="mipsel"> + +On DECstations there is currently no loadable keymap available, +so you have to skip the keyboard selection and keep the default +kernel keymap (LK201 US). This may change in the future as it +depends on further Linux/MIPS kernel development. + +</para><para arch="powerpc"> + +There are two keyboard layouts for US keyboards; the qwerty/mac-usb-us +(Apple USB) layout will place the Alt function on the +<keycap>Command/Apple</keycap> key (in the keyboard position next to +the <keycap>space</keycap> key similar to <keycap>Alt</keycap> on +PC keyboards), while the qwerty/us (Standard) layout will place the +Alt function on the <keycap>Option</keycap> key (engraved with 'alt' +on most Mac keyboards). In other respects the two layouts are similar. + +</para> + +<note arch="sparc"><para> + +If you are installing on a system that has a Sun USB keyboard and have +booted the installer with the default 2.4 kernel, the keyboard will not +be identified correctly by the installation system. The installer will show +you a list of Sun type keymaps to choose from, but selecting one of these +will result in a non-working keyboard. If you are installing with the 2.6 +kernel, there is no problem. + +</para><para> + +To get a working keyboard, you should boot the installer with parameter +<userinput>debconf/priority=medium</userinput>. When you get to keyboard +selection<footnote> + +<para> +If you are installing at default priority you should use the <userinput>Go +Back</userinput> button to return to the installer menu when you are shown +the list of Sun type keymaps. +</para> + +</footnote>, choose <quote>No keyboard to configure</quote> if you have a +keyboard with an American (US) layout, or choose <quote>USB keyboard</quote> +if you have a keyboard with a localized layout. Selecting <quote>No keyboard +to configure</quote> will leave the kernel keymap in place, which is correct +for US keyboards. + +</para></note> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/languagechooser.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/languagechooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0cc95c39 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/languagechooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect3 id="lang-chooser" condition="sarge"> + <title>Language selection</title> + +<para> + +As the first step of the installation, select the language in which +you want the installation process to proceed. The language names +are listed in both English (left side) and in the language itself +(right side); the names on the right side are also shown in the proper +script for the language. The list is sorted on the English names. + +</para><para> + +The language you choose will be used for the rest of the installation +process, provided a translation of the different dialogs is available. +If no valid translation is available for the selected language, the +installer will default to English. The selected language will also be +used to help select a suitable keyboard layout. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d17dd4dcb --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <sect3 id="localechooser" condition="etch"> + <title>Selecting Localization Options</title> + +<para> + +In most cases the first questions you will be asked concern the selection +of localization options to be used both for the installation and for the +installed system. The localization options consist of language, country +and locales. + +</para><para> + +The language you choose will be used for the rest of the installation +process, provided a translation of the different dialogs is available. +If no valid translation is available for the selected language, the +installer will default to English. + +</para><para> + +The selected country will be used later in the installation process to +pick the default timezone and a Debian mirror appropriate for your +geographic location. Language and country together will be used to set +the default locale for your system and to help select your keyboard. + +</para><para> + +You will first be asked to select your preferred language. The language +names are listed in both English (left side) and in the language itself +(right side); the names on the right side are also shown in the proper +script for the language. The list is sorted on the English names. +At the top of the list is an extra option that allows you to select the +<quote>C</quote> locale instead of a language. Choosing the <quote>C</quote> +locale will result in the installation proceding in English; the installed +system will have no localization support as the <classname>locales</classname> +package will not be installed. + +</para><para> + +If you selected a language that is recognized as an official language for +more than one country<footnote> + +<para> + +In technical terms: where multiple locales exist for that language with +differing country codes. + +</para> + +</footnote>, you will next be asked to select a country. +If you choose <guimenuitem>Other</guimenuitem> at the bottom of the list, +you will be presented with a list of all countries, grouped by continent. +If the language has only one country associated with it, that country +will be selected automatically. + +</para><para> + +A default locale will be selected based on the selected language and country. +If you are installing at medium or low priority, you will have the option +of selecting a different default locale and of selecting additional locales to +be generated for the installed system. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..013379199 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="lowmem"> + <title>Check available memory</title> + +<para> + +One of the first things &d-i; does, is to check available memory. +If the available memory is limited, this component will make some +changes in the installation process which hopefully will allow +you to install &debian; on your system. + +</para><para> + +During a low memory install, not all components will be available. +One of the limitations is that you won't be able to choose a +language for the installation. + +</para> + </sect3>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..19b77f53c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="lvmcfg"> + <title>Configuring Logical Volume Manager (LVM)</title> +<para> + +If you are working with computers at the level of system administrator +or <quote>advanced</quote> user, you have surely seen the situation +where some disk partition (usually the most important one) was short on +space, while some other partition was grossly underused and you had to +manage this situation with moving stuff around, symlinking, etc. + +</para><para> + +To avoid the described situation you can use Logical Volume Manager +(LVM). Simply said, with LVM you can combine your partitions +(<firstterm>physical volumes</firstterm> in LVM lingo) to form +a virtual disc (so called <firstterm>volume group</firstterm>), which +can then be divided into virtual partitions (<firstterm>logical +volumes</firstterm>). The point is that logical volumes (and of course +underlying volume groups) can span across several physical discs. + +</para><para> + +Now when you realize you need more space for your old 160GB +<filename>/home</filename> partition, you can simply add a new 300GB +disc to the computer, join it with your existing volume group and then +resize the logical volume which holds your <filename>/home</filename> +filesystem and voila — your users have some room again on their +renewed 460GB partition. This example is of course a bit +oversimplified. If you haven't read it yet, you should consult the +<ulink url="&url-lvm-howto;">LVM HOWTO</ulink>. + +</para><para> + +LVM setup in &d-i; is quite simple. At first, you have to mark your +partitions to be used as physical volumes for LVM. (This is done in +<command>partman</command> in the <guimenu>Partition +settings</guimenu> menu where you should select <menuchoice> +<guimenu>Use as:</guimenu> <guimenuitem>physical volume for +LVM</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.) Then start the +<command>lvmcfg</command> module (either directly from +<command>partman</command> or from the &d-i;'s main menu) and combine +physical volumes to volume group(s) under the <guimenuitem>Modify +volume groups (VG)</guimenuitem> menu. After that, you should create +logical volumes on the top of volume groups from the menu +<guimenuitem>Modify logical volumes (LV)</guimenuitem>. + +<note arch="powerpc" condition="sarge"><para> + +There is no widely accepted standard to identify partitions containing +LVM data on Apple Power Macintosh hardware. On this particular +hardware, the above procedure for creating physical volumes and volume +groups will not work. There is a good workaround for this limitation, +provided you are familiar with the underlying LVM tools. + +</para><para> + +To install using logical volumes on Power Macintosh hardware you +should create all the disk partitions for your logical volumes as +usual. In the <guimenu>Partition settings</guimenu> menu you should +choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Use as:</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Do Not +Use</guimenuitem></menuchoice> for these partitions (you will not be +offered the option to use the partition as a physical volume). When +you are done with creating all your partitions, you should start the +logical volume manager as usual. However, since no physical volumes +have been created you must now access the command shell available on +the second virtual terminal (see <xref linkend="shell"/>) and create +them manually. + +</para><para> + +Use the <command>pvcreate</command> command at the shell command prompt +to create a physical volume on each of your chosen partitions. Then use +the <command>vgcreate</command> command to create each volume group +you want. You can safely ignore any errors about incorrect metadata +area header checksums and fsync failures while doing this. When you +have finished creating all your volume groups, you should go back to +the first virtual terminal and skip directly to the +<command>lvmcfg</command> menu items for logical volume +management. You will see your volume groups and you can create the +logical volumes you need as usual. + +</para></note> + +</para><para> + +After returning from <command>lvmcfg</command> back to +<command>partman</command>, you will see any created logical volumes +in the same way as ordinary partitions (and you should treat them like +that). + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6365a3fa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml @@ -0,0 +1,230 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="mdcfg"> + <title>Configuring Multidisk Device (Software RAID)</title> +<para> + +If you have more than one harddrive<footnote><para> + +To be honest, you can construct MD device even from partitions +residing on single physical drive, but that won't bring you anything +useful. + +</para></footnote> in your computer, you can use +<command>mdcfg</command> to setup your drives for increased +performance and/or better reliability of your data. The result is +called <firstterm>Multidisk Device</firstterm> (or after its most +famous variant <firstterm>software RAID</firstterm>). + +</para><para> + +MD is basically a bunch of partitions located on different disks and +combined together to form a <emphasis>logical</emphasis> device. This +device can then be used like an ordinary partition (i.e. in +<command>partman</command> you can format it, assign a mountpoint, +etc.). + +</para><para> + +The benefit you gain depends on a type of a MD device you are +creating. Currently supported are: + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> + +<term>RAID0</term><listitem><para> + +Is mainly aimed at performance. RAID0 splits all incoming data into +<firstterm>stripes</firstterm> and distributes them equally over each +disk in the array. This can increase the speed of read/write +operations, but when one of the disks fails, you will loose +<emphasis>everything</emphasis> (part of the information is still on +the healthy disk(s), the other part <emphasis>was</emphasis> on the +failed disk). + +</para><para> + +The typical use for RAID0 is a partition for video editing. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>RAID1</term><listitem><para> + +Is suitable for setups where reliability is the first concern. It +consists of several (usually two) equally sized partitions where every +partition contains exactly the same data. This essentially means three +things. First, if one of your disks fails, you still have the data +mirrored on the remaining disks. Second, you can use only a fraction +of the available capacity (more precisely, it is the size of the +smallest partition in the RAID). Third, file reads are load balanced among +the disks, which can improve performance on a server, such as a file +server, that tends to be loaded with more disk reads than writes. + +</para><para> + +Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array which will take the +place of the failed disk in the case of failure. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>RAID5</term><listitem><para> + +Is a good compromise between speed, reliability and data redundancy. +RAID5 splits all incomming data into stripes and distributes them +equally on all but one disks (similar to RAID0). Unlike RAID0, RAID5 +also computes <firstterm>parity</firstterm> information, which gets +written on the remaining disk. The parity disk is not static (that +would be called RAID4), but is changing periodically, so the parity +information is distributed equally on all disks. When one of the +disks fails, the missing part of information can be computed from +remaining data and its parity. RAID5 must consist of at least three +active partitions. Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array +which will take the place of the failed disk in the case of failure. + +</para><para> + +As you can see, RAID5 has similar degree of reliability like RAID1 +while achieving less redundancy. On the other hand it might be a bit +slower on write operation than RAID0 due to computation of parity +information. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +To sum it up: + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="5"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>Type</entry> + <entry>Minimum Devices</entry> + <entry>Spare Device</entry> + <entry>Survives disk failure?</entry> + <entry>Available Space</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry>RAID0</entry> + <entry>2</entry> + <entry>no</entry> + <entry>no</entry> + <entry>Size of the smallest partition multiplied by number of devices in RAID</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>RAID1</entry> + <entry>2</entry> + <entry>optional</entry> + <entry>yes</entry> + <entry>Size of the smallest partition in RAID</entry> +</row> + +<row> + <entry>RAID5</entry> + <entry>3</entry> + <entry>optional</entry> + <entry>yes</entry> + <entry> + Size of the smallest partition multiplied by (number of devices in + RAID minus one) + </entry> +</row> + +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +</para><para> + +If you want to know the whole truth about Software RAID, have a look +at <ulink url="&url-software-raid-howto;">Software RAID HOWTO</ulink>. + +<note arch="powerpc" condition="sarge"><para> + +There is no widely accepted standard to identify partitions containing +RAID data on Apple Power Macintosh hardware. This means that &d-i; +currently does not support setting up RAID on this platform. + +</para></note> + +</para><para> + +To create a MD device, you need to have the desired partitions it +should consist of marked for use in a RAID. (This is done in +<command>partman</command> in the <guimenu>Partition +settings</guimenu> menu where you should select <menuchoice> +<guimenu>Use as:</guimenu> <guimenuitem>physical volume for +RAID</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.) + +</para><warning><para> + +Support for MD is a relatively new addition to the installer. +You may experience problems for some RAID levels and in combination +with some bootloaders if you try to use MD for the root +(<filename>/</filename>) filesystem. For experienced users, it may be +possible to work around some of these problems by executing some +configuration or installation steps manually from a shell. + +</para></warning><para> + +Next, you should choose <guimenuitem>Configure software +RAID</guimenuitem> from the main <command>partman</command> menu. +On the first screen of <command>mdcfg</command> simply select +<guimenuitem>Create MD device</guimenuitem>. You will be presented with +a list of supported types of MD devices, from which you should choose +one (e.g. RAID1). What follows depends on the type of MD you selected. +</para> + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +RAID0 is simple — you will be issued with the list of available +RAID partitions and your only task is to select the partitions which +will form the MD. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +RAID1 is a bit more tricky. First, you will be asked to enter the +number of active devices and the number of spare devices which will +form the MD. Next, you need to select from the list of available RAID +partitions those that will be active and then those that will be +spare. The count of selected partitions must be equal to the number +provided few seconds ago. Don't worry. If you make a mistake and +select different number of partitions, the &d-i; won't let you +continue until you correct the issue. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +RAID5 has similar setup procedure as RAID1 with the exception that you +need to use at least <emphasis>three</emphasis> active partitions. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +<para> + +It is perfectly possible to have several types of MD at once. For +example if you have three 200 GB hard drives dedicated to MD, each +containing two 100 GB partitions, you can combine first partitions on +all three disk into the RAID0 (fast 300 GB video editing partition) +and use the other three partitions (2 active and 1 spare) for RAID1 +(quite reliable 100 GB partition for <filename>/home</filename>). + +</para><para> + +After you setup MD devices to your liking, you can +<guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem> <command>mdcfg</command> to return +back to the <command>partman</command> to create filesystems on your +new MD devices and assign them the usual attributes like mountpoints. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aba21a7e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="mips"> + <title><command>arcboot</command>-installer</title> +<para> + +The boot loader on SGI Indys is <command>arcboot</command>. +It has to be installed on the same hard disk as the kernel (this is done +automatically by the installer). Arcboot supports different configurations +which are set up in <filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename>. Each +configuration has a unique name, +the default setup as created by the installer is <quote>linux</quote>. +After arcboot has been installed, the system can be booted from hard disk +by setting some firmware environment variables entering + +<informalexample><screen> +<userinput> setenv SystemPartition scsi(<replaceable>scsi</replaceable>)disk(<replaceable>disk</replaceable>)rdisk(0)partition(0)</userinput> +<userinput> setenv OSLoadPartition scsi(<replaceable>scsi</replaceable>)disk(<replaceable>disk</replaceable>)rdisk(0)partition(<replaceable>partnr</replaceable>)</userinput> +<userinput> setenv OSLoader arcboot</userinput> +<userinput> setenv OSLoadFilename <replaceable>config</replaceable></userinput> +<userinput> setenv AutoLoad yes</userinput> +</screen></informalexample> + +on the firmware prompt, and then typing <command>boot</command>. + +</para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term> <replaceable>scsi</replaceable> </term> +<listitem><para> + +is the SCSI bus to be booted from, this is <userinput>0</userinput> +for the onboard controllers + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term> <replaceable>disk</replaceable> </term> +<listitem><para> + +is the SCSI ID of the hard disk on which <command>arcboot</command> is +installed + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term> <replaceable>partnr</replaceable> </term> +<listitem><para> + +is the number of the partition on which +<filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename> resides + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term> <replaceable>config</replaceable> </term> +<listitem><para> + +is the name of the configuration entry in +<filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename>, which is <quote>linux</quote> by +default. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70efb3e77 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="mipsel"> + <title><command>delo</command>-installer</title> +<para> + +The boot loader on DECstations is <command>DELO</command>. +It has to be installed on the same hard disk as the kernel (this is done +automatically by the installer). DELO supports different configurations +which are set up in <filename>/etc/delo.conf</filename>. Each +configuration has a unique name, +the default setup as created by the installer is <quote>linux</quote>. +After DELO has been installed, the system can be booted from hard disk +by entering + +<informalexample><screen> +<userinput>boot <replaceable>#</replaceable>/rz<replaceable>id</replaceable> <replaceable>partnr</replaceable>/<replaceable>name</replaceable></userinput> +</screen></informalexample> + +on the firmware prompt. + +</para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> +<term> <replaceable>#</replaceable> </term> +<listitem><para> + +is the TurboChannel device to be booted from, on most DECstations this +is <userinput>3</userinput> for the onboard controllers + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term> <replaceable>id</replaceable> </term> +<listitem><para> + +is the SCSI ID of the hard disk on which <command>DELO</command> is +installed + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term> <replaceable>partnr</replaceable> </term> +<listitem><para> + +is the number of the partition on which +<filename>/etc/delo.conf</filename> resides + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term> <replaceable>name</replaceable> </term> +<listitem><para> + +is the name of the configuration entry in +<filename>/etc/delo.conf</filename>, which is <quote>linux</quote> by +default. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> + +<para> + +In case <filename>/etc/delo.conf</filename> is on the first partition +on the disk and the default configuration shall be booted, it is +sufficient to use + +<informalexample><screen> +<userinput>boot #/rz<replaceable>id</replaceable></userinput> +</screen></informalexample> + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ffeae3792 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="netcfg"> + <title>Configuring Network</title> + +<para> + +As you enter this step, if the system detects that you have more than +one network device, you'll be asked to choose which device will be +your <emphasis>primary</emphasis> network interface, i.e. the one +which you want to use for installation. The other interfaces won't be +configured at this time. You may configure additional interfaces after +installation is complete; see the <citerefentry> +<refentrytitle>interfaces</refentrytitle> <manvolnum>5</manvolnum> +</citerefentry> man page. + +</para><para> + +By default, &d-i; tries to configure your computer's network +automatically via DHCP. If the DHCP probe succeeds, you are done. If the +probe fails, it may be caused by many factors ranging from unplugged +network cable, to a misconfigured DHCP setup. Or maybe you don't have +a DHCP server in your local network at all. For further explanation +check the error messages on the third console. In any case, you will +be asked if you want to retry, or if you want to perform manual +setup. DHCP servers are sometimes really slow in their responses, so +if you are sure everything is in place, try again. + +</para><para> + +The manual network setup in turn asks you a number of questions about +your network, notably +<computeroutput>IP address</computeroutput>, +<computeroutput>Netmask</computeroutput>, +<computeroutput>Gateway</computeroutput>, +<computeroutput>Name server addresses</computeroutput>, and a +<computeroutput>Hostname</computeroutput>. +Moreover, if you have a wireless network interface, you will be asked +to provide your <computeroutput>Wireless ESSID</computeroutput> and +a <computeroutput>WEP key</computeroutput>. Fill in the answers from +<xref linkend="needed-info"/>. + +</para><note><para> + +Some technical details you might, or might not, find handy: the +program assumes the network IP address is the bitwise-AND of your +system's IP address and your netmask. It will guess the broadcast +address is the bitwise OR of your system's IP address with the bitwise +negation of the netmask. It will also guess your gateway. If you +can't find any of these answers, use the system's guesses — you +can change them once the system has been installed, if necessary, by +editing <filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>. Alternatively, +you can install <classname>etherconf</classname>, which will step you +through your network setup. + +</para></note> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d0bff67c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="network-console"> + <title>Installation Over the Network</title> + +<para arch="not-s390"> + +One of the more interesting components is +<firstterm>network-console</firstterm>. It allows you to do a large +part of the installation over the network via SSH. The use of the +network implies you will have to perform the first steps of the +installation from the console, at least to the point of setting up +the networking. (Although you can automate that part with +<xref linkend="automatic-install"/>.) + +</para><para arch="not-s390"> + +This component is not loaded into the main installation menu by default, +so you have to explicitly ask for it. + +If you are installing from CD, you need to boot with medium priority or +otherwise invoke the main installation menu and choose <guimenuitem>Load +installer components from CD</guimenuitem> and from the list of +additional components select <guimenuitem>network-console: Continue +installation remotely using SSH</guimenuitem>. Successful load is +indicated by a new menu entry called <guimenuitem>Continue +installation remotely using SSH</guimenuitem>. + +</para><para arch="s390"> + +For installations on &arch-title;, this is the default method after +setting up the network. + +</para><para> + +<phrase arch="not-s390">After selecting this new entry, you</phrase> +<phrase arch="s390">You</phrase> will be asked for a new password +to be used for connecting to the installation system and for its +confirmation. That's all. Now you should see a screen which instructs +you to login remotely as the user <emphasis>installer</emphasis> with +the password you just provided. Another important detail to notice on +this screen is the fingerprint of this system. You need to transfer +the fingerprint securely to the <quote>person who will continue the +installation remotely</quote>. + +</para><para> + +Should you decide to continue with the installation locally, you +can always press &enterkey;, which will bring you back to +the main menu, where you can select another component. + +</para><para> + +Now let's switch to the other side of the wire. As a prerequisite, you +need to configure your terminal for UTF-8 encoding, because that is +what the installation system uses. If you do not, remote installation +will be still possible, but you may encounter strange display +artefacts like destroyed dialog borders or unreadable non-ascii +characters. Establishing a connection with the installation system +is as simple as typing: + +<informalexample><screen> +<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput>ssh -l installer <replaceable>install_host</replaceable></userinput> +</screen></informalexample> + +Where <replaceable>install_host</replaceable> is either the name +or IP address of the computer being installed. Before the actual +login the fingerprint of the remote system will be displayed and +you will have to confirm that it is correct. + +</para><note><para> + +If you install several computers in turn and they happen to have the +same IP address or hostname, <command>ssh</command> will refuse to connect +to such host. The reason is that it will have different fingerprint, which +is usually a sign of a spoofing attack. If you are sure this is not the +case, you will need to delete the relevant line from +<filename>~/.ssh/known_hosts</filename> and try again. + +</para></note><para> + +After the login you will be presented with an initial screen where you +have two possibilities called <guimenuitem>Start menu</guimenuitem> and +<guimenuitem>Start shell</guimenuitem>. The former brings you to the +main installer menu, where you can continue with the installation as +usual. The latter starts a shell from which you can examine and possibly +fix the remote system. You should only start one SSH session for the +installation menu, but may start multiple sessions for shells. + +</para><warning><para> + +After you have started the installation remotely over SSH, you should +not go back to the installation session running on the local console. +Doing so may corrupt the database that holds the configuration of +the new system. This in turn may result in a failed installation or +problems with the installed system. + +</para><para> + +Also, if you are running the SSH session from an X terminal, you should +not resize the window as that will result in the connection being +terminated. + +</para></warning> + + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df251b1a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="nobootloader"> + <title>Continue Without Boot Loader</title> + +<para> + +This option can be used to complete the installation even when no boot +loader is to be installed, either because the arch/subarch doesn't +provide one, or because none is desired (e.g. you will use existing +boot loader). <phrase arch="m68k">This option is especially useful for +Macintosh, Atari, and Amiga systems, where the original operating system +must be maintained on the box and used to boot GNU/Linux.</phrase> + +</para><para> + +If you plan to manually configure your bootloader, you should check the +name of the installed kernel in <filename>/target/boot</filename>. +You should also check that directory for the presence of an +<firstterm>initrd</firstterm>; if one is present, you will probably have +to instruct your bootloader to use it. Other information you will need +are the disk and partition you selected for your <filename>/</filename> +filesystem and, if you chose to install <filename>/boot</filename> on a +separate partition, also your <filename>/boot</filename> filesystem. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03aa06176 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="os-prober"> + <title>Detecting other operating systems</title> + +<para> + +Before a boot loader is installed, the installer will attempt to probe for +other operating systems which are installed on the machine. If it finds a +supported operating system, you will be informed of this during the boot +loader installation step, and the computer will be configured to boot this +other operating system in addition to Debian. + +</para><para> + +Note that multiple operating systems booting on a single machine is still +something of a black art. The automatic support for detecting and setting +up boot loaders to boot other operating systems varies by architecture and +even by subarchitecture. If it does not work you should consult your +boot manager's documentation for more information. + +<!-- TODO: Maybe include some arch-dependent tables with supported OS'es here --> + +</para> + +<note condition="sarge"><para> + +The installer may fail to detect other operating systems if the partitions on +which they reside are mounted when the detection takes place. This may occur if +you select a mountpoint (e.g. /win) for a partition containing another operating +system in <command>partman</command>, or if you have mounted partitions manually +from a console. + +</para></note> + + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53394db87 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a5bc2e6e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="partman"> + <title>Partitioning Your Disks</title> + +<para> + +Now it is time to partition your disks. If you are uncomfortable with +partitioning, or just want to know more details, see <xref +linkend="partitioning"/>. + +</para><para> + +First you will be given the opportunity to automatically partition +either an entire drive, or free space on a drive. This is also called +<quote>guided</quote> partitioning. If you do not want to +autopartition, choose <guimenuitem>Manually edit partition +table</guimenuitem> from the menu. + +</para><para> + +If you choose guided partitioning, you will be able to choose from the +schemes listed in the table below. All schemes have their pros and cons, +some of which are discussed in <xref linkend="partitioning"/>. If you are +unsure, choose the first one. Bear in mind, that guided partitioning +needs certain minimal amount of free space to operate with. If you don't +give it at least about 1GB of space (depends on chosen scheme), guided +partitioning will fail. + +</para> + +<informaltable> +<tgroup cols="3"> +<thead> +<row> + <entry>Partitioning scheme</entry> + <entry>Minimum space</entry> + <entry>Created partitions</entry> +</row> +</thead> + +<tbody> +<row> + <entry>All files in one partition</entry> + <entry>600MB</entry> + <entry><filename>/</filename>, swap</entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Desktop machine</entry> + <entry>500MB</entry> + <entry> + <filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename>, swap + </entry> +</row><row> + <entry>Multi-user workstation</entry> + <entry>1GB</entry> + <entry> + <filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename>, + <filename>/usr</filename>, <filename>/var</filename>, + <filename>/tmp</filename>, swap + </entry> +</row> + +</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> + +<para arch="ia64"> + +If you chose an automatic partitioning for your IA64 system, there +will be an additional partition, formatted as a FAT16 bootable filesystem, +for the EFI boot loader. +There is also an additional menu item in the formatting menu to manually +set up a partition as an EFI boot partition. + +</para><para arch="alpha"> + +If you chose an automatic partitioning for your Alpha system, an +additional, unformatted partition will be allocated at the beginning of +your disk to reserve this space for the aboot boot loader. + +</para><para> + +After selecting a scheme, the next screen will show your new partition +table, including information on whether and how partitions will be +formatted and where they will be mounted. + +</para><para> + +The list of partitions might look like this: + +<!-- TODO: show some flags here (lightning, skull, smiley) --> +<informalexample><screen> + IDE1 master (hda) - 6.4 GB WDC AC36400L + #1 primary 16.4 MB ext2 /boot + #2 primary 551.0 MB swap swap + #3 primary 5.8 GB ntfs + pri/log 8.2 MB FREE SPACE + + IDE1 slave (hdb) - 80.0 GB ST380021A + #1 primary 15.9 MB ext3 + #2 primary 996.0 MB fat16 + #3 primary 3.9 GB xfs /home + #5 logical 6.0 GB ext3 / + #6 logical 1.0 GB ext3 /var + #7 logical 498.8 MB ext3 + #8 logical 551.5 MB swap swap + #9 logical 65.8 GB ext2 +</screen></informalexample> + +This example shows two IDE harddrives divided into several partitions; +the first disk has some free space. Each partition line consists of the +partition number, its type, size, optional flags, file system, and +mountpoint (if any). + +</para><para> + +This concludes the guided partitioning. If you are satisfied with the +generated partition table, you can choose <guimenuitem>Finish +partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem> from the menu to +implement the new partition table (as described at the end of this +section). If you are not happy, you can choose to <guimenuitem>Undo +changes to partitions</guimenuitem>, to run guided partitioning again +or modify the proposed changes as described below for manual partitioning. + +</para><para> + +A similar screen to the one shown just above will be displayed if you +choose manual partitioning except that your existing partition table will +be shown and without the mount points. How to manually setup your partition +table and the usage of partitions by your new Debian system will be covered +in the remainder of this section. + +</para><para> + +If you select a pristine disk which doesn't have neither partitions +nor free space on it, you will be offered to create a new partition +table (this is needed so you can create new partitions). After this +a new line entitled <quote>FREE SPACE</quote> should appear under the +selected disk. + +</para><para> + +If you select some free space, you will be offered to create new +partition. You will have to answer a quick series of questions about +its size, type (primary or logical), and location (beginning or end of +the free space). After this, you will be presented with detailed +overview of your new partition. There are options like mountpoint, +mount options, bootable flag, or way of usage. If you don't like the +preselected defaults, feel free to change them to your liking. E.g. by +selecting the option <guimenuitem>Use as:</guimenuitem>, you can +choose different filesystem for this partition including the +possibility to use the partition for swap, software RAID, LVM, or not +use it at all. Other nice feature is the possibility to copy data from +existing partition onto this one. +When you are satisfied with your new partition, select +<guimenuitem>Done setting up the partition</guimenuitem> and you will be +thrown back to the <command>partman</command>'s main screen. + +</para><para> + +If you decide you want to change something about your partition, +simply select the partition, which will bring you to the partition +configuration menu. Because this is the same screen like when creating +a new partition, you can change the same set of options. One thing +which might not be very obvious at a first glance is that you can +resize the partition by selecting the item displaying the size of the +partition. Filesystems known to work are at least fat16, fat32, ext2, +ext3 and swap. This menu also allows you to delete a partition. + +</para><para> + +Be sure to create at least two partitions: one for the +<emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem (which must be mounted as +<filename>/</filename>) and one for <emphasis>swap</emphasis>. If you +forget to mount the root filesystem, <command>partman</command> won't +let you continue until you correct this issue. + +</para><para arch="ia64"> + +If you forget to select and format an EFI boot partition +<command>partman</command> will detect this and will not let you continue +until you allocate one. + +</para><para> + +Capabilities of <command>partman</command> can be extended with installer +modules, but are dependent on your system's architecture. So if you can't +see all promised goodies, check if you have loaded all required modules +(e.g. <filename>partman-ext3</filename>, <filename>partman-xfs</filename>, +or <filename>partman-lvm</filename>). + +</para><para> + +After you are satisfied with partitioning, select <guimenuitem>Finish +partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem> from the partitioning +menu. You will be presented with a summary of changes made to the disks +and asked to confirm that the filesystems should be created as requested. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..07ba1e66b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="powerpc"> + <title>Install <command>Quik</command> on a Hard Disk</title> +<para> + +The boot loader for OldWorld Power Macintosh machines is +<command>quik</command>. You can also use it on CHRP. The installer +will attempt to set up <command>quik</command> automatically. The +setup has been known to work on 7200, 7300, and 7600 Powermacs, and on +some Power Computing clones. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b3ad198b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="powerpc"> + <title>Install <command>Yaboot</command> on a Hard Disk</title> +<para> + +Newer (mid 1998 and on) PowerMacs use <command>yaboot</command> as +their boot loader. The installer will set up <command>yaboot</command> +automatically, so all you need is a small 820k partition named +<quote>bootstrap</quote> with type +<emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis> created back in the partitioning +component. If this step completes successfully then your disk should +now be bootable and OpenFirmware will be set to boot &debian;. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df4b0772e --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="prebaseconfig"> + <title>Finish the Installation and Reboot</title> + +<para> + +This is the last step in the initial Debian installation process. You will +be prompted to remove the boot media (CD, floppy, etc) that you used to +boot the installer. The installer will do any last minute tasks, and then +reboot into your new Debian system. + +</para><para arch="s390"> + +Select the <guimenuitem>Finish the installation</guimenuitem> +menu item which will halt the system +because rebooting is not supported on &arch-title; in this case. You +then need to IPL GNU/Linux from the DASD which you selected for the +root filesystem during the first steps of the installation. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67c575a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b460b33fa --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="s390"> + <title><command>zipl</command>-installer</title> +<para> + +The boot loader on &arch-title; is <quote>zipl</quote>. +<command>ZIPL</command> is similar in configuration and usage to +<command>LILO</command>, with a few exceptions. Please take a look at +<quote>LINUX for &arch-title; Device Drivers and Installation +Commands</quote> from IBM's developerWorks web site if you want to +know more about <command>ZIPL</command>. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..788b90935 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="save-logs"> + <title>Saving the installation logs</title> + +<para> + +If the installation is successful, the logfiles created during +the installation process will be automatically saved to +<filename>/var/log/debian-installer/</filename> on your new +Debian system. + +</para><para> + +Choosing <guimenuitem>Save debug logs</guimenuitem> from the main +menu allows you to save the log files to a floppy +disk<phrase condition="etch">, network, hard disk, or other +media</phrase>. This can be useful if you encounter fatal problems +during the installation and wish to study the logs on another system +or attach them to an installation report. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57081c7a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 id="shell"> + <title>Using the Shell and Viewing the Logs</title> + <!-- TODO: There is nothing about logs in this section! --> + +<para> + +There is an <guimenuitem>Execute a Shell</guimenuitem> item on the +menu. If the menu is not available when you need to use the shell, +press <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap></keycombo> +(on a Mac keyboard, <keycombo><keycap>Option</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> +</keycombo>) to switch to the second <emphasis>virtual +console</emphasis>. That's the <keycap>Alt</keycap> key on the +left-hand side of the <keycap>space bar</keycap>, and the +<keycap>F2</keycap> function key, at the same time. This is a separate +window running a Bourne shell clone called <command>ash</command>. + +</para><para> + +At this point you are booted from the RAM disk, and there is a limited +set of Unix utilities available for your use. You can see what +programs are available with the command <command>ls /bin /sbin /usr/bin +/usr/sbin</command> and by typing <command>help</command>. The +text editor is <command>nano</command>. The shell has some nice features +like autocompletion and history. + +</para><para> + +Use the menus to perform any task that they are able to do — the +shell and commands are only there in case something goes wrong. In +particular, you should always use the menus, not the shell, to +activate your swap partition, because the menu software can't detect +that you've done this from the shell. Press <keycombo><keycap>Left +Alt</keycap> <keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo> to get back to menus, or +type <command>exit</command> if you used a menu item to open the +shell. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml b/en/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe6d0f607 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect3 arch="sparc"> + <title>Install the <command>SILO</command> Boot Loader + on a Hard Disk</title> +<para> + +The standard &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>silo</quote>. +It is documented in +<filename>/usr/share/doc/silo/</filename>. <command>SILO</command> is +similar in configuration and usage to <command>LILO</command>, with +a few exceptions. First of all, <command>SILO</command> allows you to +boot any kernel image on your drive, even if it is not listed in +<filename>/etc/silo.conf</filename>. This is because +<command>SILO</command> can actually read Linux partitions. Also, +<filename>/etc/silo.conf</filename> is read at boot time, so there is +no need to rerun <command>silo</command> after installing a new kernel +like you would with <command>LILO</command>. <command>SILO</command> +can also read UFS partitions, which means it can boot SunOS/Solaris +partitions as well. This is useful if you want to install GNU/Linux +alongside an existing SunOS/Solaris install. + +</para> + </sect3> diff --git a/en/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml b/en/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95fa6b10f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml @@ -0,0 +1,378 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + + <chapter id="d-i-intro"><title>Using the Debian Installer</title> + + <sect1><title>How the Installer Works</title> +<para> + +The Debian Installer consists of a number of special-purpose +components to perform each installation task. Each component performs +its task, asking the user questions as necessary to do its job. +The questions themselves are given priorities, and the priority +of questions to be asked is set when the installer is started. + +</para><para> + +When a default installation is performed, only essential (high priority) +questions will be asked. This results in a highly automated installation +process with little user interaction. Components are automatically run +in sequence; which components are run depends mainly on the installation +method you use and on your hardware. The installer will use default values +for questions that are not asked. + +</para><para> + +If there is a problem, the user will see an error screen, and the +installer menu may be shown in order to select some alternative +action. If there are no problems, the user will never see the +installer menu, but will simply answer questions for each component +in turn. Serious error notifications are set to priority +<quote>critical</quote> so the user will always be notified. + +</para><para> + +Some of the defaults that the installer uses can be influenced by passing +boot arguments when &d-i; is started. If, for example, you wish to +force static network configuration (DHCP is used by default if available), +you could add the boot parameter <userinput>netcfg/disable_dhcp=true</userinput>. +See <xref linkend="installer-args"/> for available options. + +</para><para> + +Power users may be more comfortable with a menu-driven interface, +where each step is controlled by the user rather than the installer +performing each step automatically in sequence. To use the installer +in a manual, menu-driven way, add the boot argument +<userinput>debconf/priority=medium</userinput>. + +</para><para> + +If your hardware requires you to pass options to kernel modules as +they are installed, you will need to start the installer in +<quote>expert</quote> mode. This can be done by either using the +<command>expert</command> command to start the installer or by adding +the boot argument <userinput>debconf/priority=low</userinput>. +Expert mode gives you full control over &d-i;. + +</para><para> + +The normal installer display is character-based (as opposed to the now +more familiar graphical interface). The mouse is not operational in +this environment. Here are the keys you can use to navigate within the +various dialogs. The <keycap>Tab</keycap> or <keycap>right</keycap> +arrow keys move <quote>forward</quote>, and the <keycombo> <keycap>Shift</keycap> +<keycap>Tab</keycap> </keycombo> or <keycap>left</keycap> arrow keys +move <quote>backward</quote> between displayed buttons and selections. +The <keycap>up</keycap> and <keycap>down</keycap> arrow select +different items within a scrollable list, and also scroll the list +itself. In addition, in long lists, you can type a letter to cause the +list to scroll directly to the section with items starting with the +letter you typed and use <keycap>Pg-Up</keycap> and +<keycap>Pg-Down</keycap> to scroll the list in sections. The +<keycap>space bar</keycap> selects an item such as a checkbox. Use +&enterkey; to activate choices. + +</para><para arch="s390"> + +S/390 does not support virtual consoles. You may open a second and third +ssh session to view the logs described below. + +</para><para> + +Error messages are redirected to the third console. +You can access this console by +pressing <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F3</keycap></keycombo> +(hold the left <keycap>Alt</keycap> key while pressing the +<keycap>F3</keycap> function key); get back to +the main installer process with +<keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>. + +</para><para> + +These messages can also be found in +<filename>/var/log/messages</filename>. After installation, this log +is copied to <filename>/var/log/debian-installer/messages</filename> on your +new system. Other installation messages may be found in +<filename>/var/log/</filename> during the +installation, and <filename>/var/log/debian-installer/</filename> +after the computer has been booted into the installed system. + +</para> + </sect1> + + + <sect1 id="modules-list"><title>Components Introduction</title> +<para> + +Here is a list of installer components with a brief description +of each component's purpose. Details you might need to know about +using a particular component are in <xref linkend="module-details"/>. + +</para> + +<variablelist> +<varlistentry> + +<term>main-menu</term><listitem><para> + +Shows the list of components to the user during installer operation, +and starts a component when it is selected. Main-menu's +questions are set to priority medium, so if your priority is set to +high or critical (high is the default), you will not see the menu. On +the other hand, if there is an error which requires your intervention, +the question priority may be downgraded temporarily to allow you +to resolve the problem, and in that case the menu may appear. + +</para><para> + +You can get to the main menu by selecting the <quote>Back</quote> button +repeatedly to back all the way out of the currently running component. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry condition="sarge"> + +<term>languagechooser</term><listitem><para> + +Shows a list of languages and language variants. The installer will +display messages in the chosen language, unless the translation for +that language is not complete. When a translation is not complete, +English messages are shown. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry condition="sarge"> + +<term>countrychooser</term><listitem><para> + +Shows a list of countries. The user may choose the country he lives +in. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry condition="etch"> + +<term>localechooser</term><listitem><para> + +Allows the user to select localization options for the installation and +the installed system: language, country and locales. The installer will +display messages in the selected language, unless the translation for +that language is not complete in which case some messages may be shown +in English. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>kbd-chooser</term><listitem><para> + +Shows a list of keyboards, from which the user chooses the model which +matches his own. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>hw-detect</term><listitem><para> + +Automatically detects most of the system's hardware, including network +cards, disk drives, and PCMCIA. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>cdrom-detect</term><listitem><para> + +Looks for and mounts a Debian installation CD. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>netcfg</term><listitem><para> + +Configures the computer's network connections so it can communicate +over the internet. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>iso-scan</term><listitem><para> + +Looks for ISO file systems, which may be on a CD-ROM or on the +hard drive. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>choose-mirror</term><listitem><para> + +Presents a list of Debian archive mirrors. The user may choose +the source of his installation packages. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>cdrom-checker</term><listitem><para> + +Checks integrity of a CD-ROM. This way the user may assure him/herself +that the installation CD-ROM was not corrupted. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>lowmem</term><listitem><para> + +Lowmem tries to detect systems with low memory and then does various +tricks to remove unnecessary parts of &d-i; from the memory (at the +cost of some features). + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>anna</term><listitem><para> + +Anna's Not Nearly APT. Installs packages which have been retrieved +from the chosen mirror or CD. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>partman</term><listitem><para> + +Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system, create file +systems on the selected partitions, and attach them to the +mountpoints. Included are also interesting features like a fully +automatic mode or LVM support. This is the preferred partitioning tool +in Debian. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>autopartkit</term><listitem><para> + +Automatically partitions an entire disk according to preset +user preferences. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>partitioner</term><listitem><para> + +Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system. A +partitioning program appropriate to your computer's architecture +is chosen. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>partconf</term><listitem><para> + +Displays a list of partitions, and creates file systems on +the selected partitions according to user instructions. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>lvmcfg</term><listitem><para> + +Helps the user with the configuration of the +<firstterm>LVM</firstterm> (Logical Volume Manager). + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>mdcfg</term><listitem><para> + +Allows the user to setup Software <firstterm>RAID</firstterm> +(Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks). This Software RAID is usually +superior to the cheap IDE (pseudo hardware) RAID controllers found on +newer motherboards. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>base-installer</term><listitem><para> + +Installs the most basic set of packages which would allow +the computer to operate under Linux when rebooted. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>os-prober</term><listitem><para> + +Detects currently installed operating systems on the computer and +passes this information to the bootloader-installer, which may offer +you an ability to add discovered operating systems to the bootloader's +start menu. This way the user could easily choose at the boot time +which operating system to start. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>bootloader-installer</term><listitem><para> + +Installs a boot loader program on the hard disk, which is necessary +for the computer to start up using Linux without using a floppy or +CD-ROM. Many boot loaders allow the user to choose an alternate +operating system each time the computer boots. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>base-config</term><listitem><para> + +Provides dialogs for setting up the base system packages according +to user preferences. This is normally done after rebooting the +computer; it is the <quote>first run</quote> of the new Debian system. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term>shell</term><listitem><para> + +Allows the user to execute a shell from the menu, or in the second +console. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +<varlistentry> + +<term condition="sarge">bugreporter</term><term condition="etch">save-logs</term><listitem><para> + +Provides a way for the user to record information on a floppy +disk<phrase condition="etch">, network, hard disk, or other media</phrase> +when trouble is encountered, in order to accurately report installer +software problems to Debian developers later. + +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +</variablelist> + + </sect1> + +&using-d-i-components.xml; + +</chapter> + diff --git a/en/welcome/about-copyright.xml b/en/welcome/about-copyright.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b456f828 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/about-copyright.xml @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1> +<title>About Copyrights and Software Licenses + </title> + +<para> + +We're sure that you've read some of the licenses that come with most +commercial software — they usually say that you can only use one +copy of the software on a single computer. This system's license +isn't like that at all. We encourage you to put a copy of on every +computer in your school or place of business. Lend your installation +media to your friends and help them install it on their computers! +You can even make thousands of copies and <emphasis>sell</emphasis> +them — albeit with a few restrictions. Your freedom to install +and use the system comes directly from Debian being based on +<emphasis>free software</emphasis>. + +</para><para> + +Calling software <emphasis>free</emphasis> doesn't mean that the software isn't +copyrighted, and it doesn't mean that CDs containing that software +must be distributed at no charge. Free software, in part, means that +the licenses of individual programs do not require you to pay for the +privilege of distributing or using those programs. Free software also +means that not only may anyone extend, adapt, and modify the software, +but that they may distribute the results of their work as +well. + +<note><para> + +The Debian project, as a pragmatic concession to its users, +does make some packages available that do not meet our criteria for +being free. These packages are not part of the official distribution, +however, and are only available from the +<userinput>contrib</userinput> or <userinput>non-free</userinput> +areas of Debian mirrors or on third-party CD-ROMs; see the +<ulink url="&url-debian-faq;">Debian FAQ</ulink>, under +<quote>The Debian FTP archives</quote>, for more information about the +layout and contents of the archives. + +</para></note> + +</para><para> + +Many of the programs in the system are licensed under the +<emphasis>GNU</emphasis> <emphasis>General Public License</emphasis>, +often simply referred to as <quote>the GPL</quote>. The GPL requires you to make +the <emphasis>source code</emphasis> of the programs available +whenever you distribute a binary copy of the program; that provision +of the license ensures that any user will be able to modify the +software. Because of this provision, the source code<footnote> +<para> + +For information on how to locate, unpack, and build +binaries from Debian source packages, see the +<ulink url="&url-debian-faq;">Debian FAQ</ulink>, +under <quote>Basics of the Debian Package Management System</quote>. + +</para> +</footnote> for all such programs is available in the Debian system. + +</para><para> + +There are several other forms of copyright statements and software +licenses used on the programs in Debian. You can find the copyrights +and licenses for every package installed on your system by looking in +the file +<filename>/usr/share/doc/<replaceable>package-name</replaceable>/copyright +</filename> +once you've installed a package on your system. + +</para><para> + +For more information about licenses and how Debian determines whether +software is free enough to be included in the main distribution, see the +<ulink url="&url-dfsg;">Debian Free Software Guidelines</ulink>. + +</para><para> + +The most important legal notice is that this software comes with +<emphasis>no warranties</emphasis>. The programmers who have created this +software have done so for the benefit of the community. No guarantee +is made as to the suitability of the software for any given purpose. +However, since the software is free, you are empowered to modify that +software to suit your needs — and to enjoy the benefits of the +changes made by others who have extended the software in this way. + +</para> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/welcome/doc-organization.xml b/en/welcome/doc-organization.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fcbc8d0b --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/doc-organization.xml @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="doc-organization"> + <title>Organization of This Document</title> + +<para> + +This document is meant to serve as a manual for first-time Debian +users. It tries to make as few assumptions as possible about your +level of expertise. However, we do assume that you have a general +understanding of how the hardware in your computer works. + +</para><para> + +Expert users may also find interesting reference information in this +document, including minimum installation sizes, details about the +hardware supported by the Debian installation system, and so on. We +encourage expert users to jump around in the document. + +</para><para> + +In general, this manual is arranged in a linear fashion, walking you +through the installation process from start to finish. Here are the +steps in installing &debian;, and the sections of this document which +correlate with each step: + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> + +Determine whether your hardware meets the requirements for using the +installation system, in <xref linkend="hardware-req"/>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Backup your system, perform any necessary planning and hardware +configuration prior to installing Debian, in <xref linkend="preparing"/>. If +you are preparing a multi-boot system, you may need to create +partition-able space on your hard disk for Debian to use. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +In <xref linkend="install-methods"/>, you will obtain the necessary +installation files for your method of installation. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<xref linkend="boot-installer"/> describes booting into the +installation system. This chapter also discusses troubleshooting +procedures in case you have problems with this step. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Perform the actual installation according to +<xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. This involves choosing your language, +configuring peripheral driver modules, configuring your network +connection, so that remaining installation files can be obtained +directly from a Debian server (if you are not installing from a CD), +partitioning your hard drives and installation of minimal working +system. +(Some background about setting up the partitions for your Debian +system is explained in <xref linkend="partitioning"/>.) + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Boot into your newly installed base system and run through some +additional configuration tasks, from <xref linkend="boot-new"/>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +Install additional software in <xref linkend="install-packages"/>. + +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</para><para> + +Once you've got your system installed, you can read +<xref linkend="post-install"/>. That chapter explains where to +look to find more information about Unix and Debian, and how to +replace your kernel. + +<!-- XXX FIXME: If you want to build your own install system +from source, be sure to read <xref linkend="boot-floppy-techinfo"/>. --> + +</para><para> + +Finally, information about this document and how to contribute to it +may be found in <xref linkend="administrivia"/>. + +</para> + + </sect1> + + <sect1 condition="FIXME"> + <title>Your Documentation Help is Welcome</title> + +<para> + +Any help, suggestions, and especially, patches, are greatly +appreciated. Working versions of this document can be found at +<ulink url="&url-d-i-alioth-manual;" />. There you will find a list of all the different +architectures and languages for which this document is available. + +</para><para> + +Source is also available publicly; look in <xref linkend="administrivia"/> +for more information concerning how to contribute. +We welcome suggestions, comments, patches, and bug reports (use the +package &d-i-manual; for bugs, but check first to see if the problem is +already reported). + +</para> + </sect1> diff --git a/en/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml b/en/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..859ac23a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="getting-newest-doc"> + <title>Getting the Newest Version of This Document</title> + +<para> + +This document is constantly being revised. Be sure to check the +<ulink url="&url-release-area;"> +Debian &release; pages</ulink> for any last-minute information about +the &release; release of the &debian; system. Updated versions of +this installation manual are also available from the +<ulink url="&url-install-manual;">official Install Manual pages</ulink>. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml b/en/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..191abdd2f --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="getting-newest-inst"> + <title>Getting Debian</title> + +<para> + +For information on how to download &debian; from the Internet +or from whom official Debian CDs can be purchased, see the +<ulink url="&url-debian-distrib;">distribution web page</ulink>. +The <ulink url="&url-debian-mirrors;">list of Debian mirrors</ulink> +contains a full set of official Debian +mirrors, so you can easily find the nearest one. + +</para><para> + +Debian can be upgraded after installation very easily. The +installation procedure will help set up the system so that you can +make those upgrades once installation is complete, if need be. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/welcome/welcome.xml b/en/welcome/welcome.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee3a90c8c --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/welcome.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<chapter id="welcome"><title>Welcome to Debian</title> +<para> + +This chapter provides an overview of the Debian Project and +&debian;. If you already know about the Debian Project's +history and the &debian; distribution, feel free to skip to +the next chapter. + +</para> + +&what-is-debian.xml; +&what-is-linux.xml; +&what-is-debian-linux.xml; +&what-is-debian-hurd.xml; +&getting-newest-inst.xml; +&getting-newest-doc.xml; +&doc-organization.xml; +&about-copyright.xml; + +</chapter> diff --git a/en/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml b/en/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..37f64d0ff --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + +<!-- conditionalised because the hurd port is not yet an official debian +release --> + <sect1 id="what-is-debian-hurd" condition="unofficial-build"> + <title>What is Debian GNU/Hurd?</title> + +<para> + +Debian GNU/Hurd is a Debian GNU system that replaces the Linux +monolithic kernel with the GNU Hurd — a set of servers running on +top of the GNU Mach microkernel. The Hurd is still unfinished, and is +unsuitable for day-to-day use, but work is continuing. The Hurd is +currently only being developed for the i386 architecture, although +ports to other architectures will be made once the system becomes more +stable. + +</para><para> + +For more information, see the +<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/ports/hurd/"> +Debian GNU/Hurd ports page</ulink> +and the <email>debian-hurd@lists.debian.org</email> +mailing list. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml b/en/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db2cd2306 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="what-is-debian-linux"> + <title>What is &debian;?</title> +<para> + +The combination of Debian's philosophy and methodology and the GNU +tools, the Linux kernel, and other important free software, form a +unique software distribution called &debian;. This +distribution is made up of a large number of software +<emphasis>packages</emphasis>. Each package in the distribution +contains executables, scripts, documentation, and configuration +information, and has a <emphasis>maintainer</emphasis> who is +primarily responsible for keeping the package up-to-date, tracking bug +reports, and communicating with the upstream author(s) of the packaged +software. Our extremely large user base, combined with our bug +tracking system ensures that problems are found and fixed quickly. + +</para><para> + +Debian's attention to detail allows us to produce a high-quality, +stable, and scalable distribution. Installations can be easily +configured to serve many roles, from stripped-down firewalls to +desktop scientific workstations to high-end network servers. + +</para><para> + +Debian is especially popular among advanced users because of its +technical excellence and its deep commitment to the needs and +expectations of the Linux community. Debian also introduced many +features to Linux that are now commonplace. + +</para><para> + +For example, Debian was the first Linux distribution to include a +package management system for easy installation and removal of +software. It was also the first Linux distribution that could be +upgraded without requiring reinstallation. + +</para><para> + +Debian continues to be a leader in Linux development. Its development +process is an example of just how well the Open Source development +model can work — even for very complex tasks such as building and +maintaining a complete operating system. + +</para><para> + +The feature that most distinguishes Debian from other Linux +distributions is its package management system. These tools give the +administrator of a Debian system complete control over the packages +installed on that system, including the ability to install a single +package or automatically update the entire operating system. +Individual packages can also be protected from being updated. You can +even tell the package management system about software you have +compiled yourself and what dependencies it fulfills. + +</para><para> + +To protect your system against <quote>Trojan horses</quote> and other malevolent +software, Debian's servers verify that uploaded packages come from +their registered Debian maintainers. Debian packagers also take great +care to configure their packages in a secure manner. When security +problems in shipped packages do appear, fixes are usually available +very quickly. With Debian's simple update options, security fixes can +be downloaded and installed automatically across the Internet. + +</para><para> + +The primary, and best, method of getting support for your &debian; +system and communicating with Debian Developers is through +the many mailing lists maintained by the Debian Project (there are +more than &num-of-debian-maillists; at this writing). The easiest +way to subscribe to one or more of these lists is visit +<ulink url="&url-debian-lists-subscribe;"> +Debian's mailing list subscription page</ulink> and fill out the form +you'll find there. + +</para> + + </sect1> diff --git a/en/welcome/what-is-debian.xml b/en/welcome/what-is-debian.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dcd384c65 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/what-is-debian.xml @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="what-is-debian"> + <title>What is Debian?</title> +<para> + +Debian is an all-volunteer organization dedicated to developing free +software and promoting the ideals of the Free Software Foundation. +The Debian Project began in 1993, when Ian Murdock issued an open +invitation to software developers to contribute to a complete and +coherent software distribution based on the relatively new Linux +kernel. That relatively small band of dedicated enthusiasts, +originally funded by the +<ulink url="&url-fsf-intro;">Free Software Foundation</ulink> +and influenced by the +<ulink url="&url-gnu-intro;">GNU</ulink> +philosophy, has grown over the years into an organization of around +&num-of-debian-developers; <firstterm>Debian Developers</firstterm>. + +</para><para> + +Debian Developers are involved in a variety of activities, including +<ulink url="&url-debian-home;">Web</ulink> +and <ulink url="&url-debian-ftp;">FTP</ulink> +site administration, graphic design, legal analysis of +software licenses, writing documentation, and, of course, maintaining +software packages. + +</para><para> + +In the interest of communicating our philosophy and attracting +developers who believe in the principles that Debian stands for, the +Debian Project has published a number of documents that outline our +values and serve as guides to what it means to be a Debian Developer: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +The +<ulink url="&url-social-contract;">Debian Social Contract</ulink> is +a statement of Debian's commitments to the Free Software Community. +Anyone who agrees to abide to the Social Contract may become a +<ulink url="&url-new-maintainer;">maintainer</ulink>. +Any maintainer can introduce new software into Debian — provided +that the software meets our criteria for being free, and the package +follows our quality standards. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The +<ulink url="&url-dfsg;">Debian Free Software Guidelines</ulink> are a +clear and concise statement of Debian's criteria for free software. +The DFSG is a very influential document in the Free Software Movement, +and was the foundation of the +<ulink url="&url-osd;">The Open Source Definition</ulink>. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The +<ulink url="&url-debian-policy;">Debian Policy Manual</ulink> is an +extensive specification of the Debian Project's standards of quality. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> +</para><para> + +Debian developers are also involved in a number of other projects; +some specific to Debian, others involving some or all of the Linux +community. Some examples include: + +<itemizedlist> +<listitem><para> + +The +<ulink url="&url-lsb-org;">Linux Standard Base</ulink> +(LSB) is a project aimed at standardizing the basic GNU/Linux system, +which will enable third-party software and hardware developers to +easily design programs and device drivers for Linux-in-general, rather +than for a specific GNU/Linux distribution. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +The +<ulink url="&url-fhs-home;">Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink> +(FHS) is an effort to standardize the layout of the Linux +file system. The FHS will allow software developers to concentrate +their efforts on designing programs, without having to worry about how +the package will be installed in different GNU/Linux distributions. + +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> + +<ulink url="&url-debian-jr;">Debian Jr.</ulink> +is an internal project, aimed at making sure Debian has something to +offer to our youngest users. + +</para></listitem> +</itemizedlist> + +</para><para> + +For more general information about Debian, see the +<ulink url="&url-debian-faq;">Debian FAQ</ulink>. + +</para> + + </sect1> + diff --git a/en/welcome/what-is-linux.xml b/en/welcome/what-is-linux.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1608c090 --- /dev/null +++ b/en/welcome/what-is-linux.xml @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> +<!-- $Id$ --> + + <sect1 id="what-is-linux"> + <title>What is GNU/Linux?</title> +<para> + +Linux is an operating system: a series of programs that let you +interact with your computer and run other programs. + +</para><para> + +An operating system consists of various fundamental programs which are +needed by your computer so that it can communicate and receive +instructions from users; read and write data to hard disks, tapes, and +printers; control the use of memory; and run other software. The most +important part of an operating system is the kernel. In a GNU/Linux +system, Linux is the kernel component. The rest of the system +consists of other programs, many of which were written by or for the +GNU Project. Because the Linux kernel alone does not form a working +operating system, we prefer to use the term <quote>GNU/Linux</quote> +to refer to systems that many people casually refer to as +<quote>Linux</quote>. + +</para><para> + +Linux is modelled on the Unix operating system. From the start, Linux +was designed to be a multi-tasking, multi-user system. These facts are +enough to make Linux different from other well-known operating +systems. However, Linux is even more different than you might +imagine. In contrast to other operating systems, nobody owns +Linux. Much of its development is done by unpaid volunteers. + +</para><para> + +Development of what later became GNU/Linux began in 1984, when the +<ulink url="http://www.gnu.org/">Free Software Foundation</ulink> +began development of a free Unix-like operating system called GNU. + +</para><para> + +The GNU Project has developed a comprehensive set of free software +tools for use with Unix™ and Unix-like operating systems such as +Linux. These tools enable users to perform tasks ranging from the +mundane (such as copying or removing files from the system) to the +arcane (such as writing and compiling programs or doing sophisticated +editing in a variety of document formats). + +</para><para> + +While many groups and individuals have contributed to Linux, the +largest single contributor is still the Free Software Foundation, +which created not only most of the tools used in Linux, but also the +philosophy and the community that made Linux possible. + +</para><para> + +The <ulink url="&url-kernel-org;">Linux kernel</ulink> first +appeared in 1991, when a Finnish computing science student named Linus +Torvalds announced an early version of a replacement kernel for Minix +to the Usenet newsgroup <userinput>comp.os.minix</userinput>. See +Linux International's +<ulink url="&url-linux-history;">Linux History Page</ulink>. + +</para><para> + +Linus Torvalds continues to coordinate the work of several hundred +developers with the help of a few trusty deputies. An excellent +weekly summary of discussions on the +<userinput>linux-kernel</userinput> mailing list is +<ulink url="&url-kernel-traffic;">Kernel Traffic</ulink>. +More information about the <userinput>linux-kernel</userinput> mailing +list can be found on the +<ulink url="&url-linux-kernel-list-faq;">linux-kernel mailing list FAQ</ulink>. + +</para><para> + +Linux users have immense freedom of choice in their software. For +example, Linux users can choose from a dozen different command line +shells and several graphical desktops. This selection is often +bewildering to users of other operating systems, who are not used to +thinking of the command line or desktop as something that they can +change. + +</para><para> + +Linux is also less likely to crash, better able to run more than one +program at the same time, and more secure than many operating +systems. With these advantages, Linux is the fastest growing operating +system in the server market. More recently, Linux has begun to be +popular among home and business users as well. + +</para> + + </sect1> + |